Home

Safety Summary - Silicon Integrated Circuit Reverse Engineering

1. 43521A External Signal Source Figure 5 2 Connections on the Rear Panel Table 5 2 Parts Used on the Rear Panel Number Name Agilent Part Connection Locations Number BNC BNC connector 1250 1859 The 2ND IF Output connector and the 2ND IF Input connector of the 4352B 0 BNC BNC cable 8120 1838 The 40MHz Output connector of the 30 em attached to the 4352B and the 40MHz Input connector 43521A of the 43521A 15 pin D Sub cable 04380 61601 The I O PORT connector of the 4352B attached to the and the I O PORT connector of the 43521A 43521A O BNC BNC cable 8120 1839 The EXT REF Input connector of the 60 em 4352B and the 10MHz OUT connector of the external signal source O GPIB cable 10833A The GPIB connector of the 4352B and the GPIB connector of the external signal source 5 4 Basic Measurements Using the 43521A Connect the power cables to each device and plug them into outlets Warning For protection from electrical shock the power cable ground must not be defeated A The power plug must be plugged into an outlet that provides a protective earth ground connection 1 2 Power ON 1 Turn on the external signal source 2 Press the LINE switch of the 43521A 3 Press the LINE switch of the 4352B Internal test in progress is displ
2. Figure 4 8 Example of Measurement Screen Spectrum 7 Read the measurement value Press Menu MARKER to display the marker The measurement value at the marker is displayed on the screen If the measurement value is not your expected value check that the DC outputs are ON DC appears if the DC outputs are OFF and that the modulation output is OFF For more information about other features for this measurement see Chapter 8 for the automatic frequency control video bandwidth averaging power level unit switching and marker functions Note In this measurement the sweep time can not be specified Only the query for i the sweep time is available Y 4 34 Basic Measurement Procedures Advanced Measurement Items in Analyzer Mode This section provides advanced measurement items based on basic measurement steps in the analyzer mode 7 8 Comparison between Carrier and Harmonic Levels Carrier level is compared with third harmonics level by using the marker 1 10 Measure the carrier level See 7 7 Spectrum Target Device VCO or PLL in Chapter 4 for how to measure the carrier level Stop the sweep Set the trigger mode to HOLD Press Trigger and HOLD Store the measurement trace using the memory trace function Press Display DEF TRACE Press DATA MEMORY The carrier measurement trace is stored in the memory
3. Back Space Key Number Value Input Keys Unit Input Keys 5004001 Figure 6 1 Entry Block Entry Block 6 1 Numeric Keypad The numeric keypad selects digits decimal point and minus sign for numerical entries unit s terminator is required to complete the entry Terminator Keys The unit s terminator keys are the four keys in the right hand column of the keypad These specify units of numerical entries from the keypad and also terminate the entries A numerical entry is incomplete until a terminator is entered When a terminator is required the data entry arrow points at the last entered digit in the active entry area When the unit s terminator key is pressed the arrow is replaced by the units selected The units are abbreviated on the terminator keys as follows G n G N KEY 35 Giga nano 10 109 M p MA U KEY 34 Mega micro 10 106 k m K M KEY 33 Kilo milli 103 103 x1 KEY 32 Basic Units dB second Hz dB GHz Hz V Also used in cases where the value has no units such as the averaging factor Not required for GPIB commands Knob The knob adjusts the current values continuously for functions such as scale reference level and others Values changed by the knob are effective immediately and require no terminator D and W The J KEY 16 and KEY 17 keys step the current value of the
4. MARKER gt SUB MKR SUB MKR 1 AMKR MENU 2 PRESET MKRS 3 MKR ON DATA 4 MKR CONT CLEAR SUB MKRS MKR LIST on OFF RETURN RETURN gt AMKR FIXED AMKR TRACKING AMKR AMODE OFF AMKR SWP PARAM FIXED AMKR VALUE RETURN Figure A 9 Softkey menu called from the MARKER key for serial number JP1KE A 6 Manual Changes MARKER MENU MARKER SUB MKR SUB MKR 1 AMKR MENU 2 INTG NOISE on OFF 3 PRESET MKRS 4 MKR ON DATA CLEAR SUB MKRS MKR CONT RETURN MKR LIST on OF RETURN MKR FIXED AMKR TRACKING AMKR AMODE OFF AMKR SWP PARAM FIXED AMKR VALUE RETURN cdQj0704 Figure A 10 Softkey menu called from the MARKER key current Changes of softkeys under the RF L0 key only for analyzer mode Make the following changes in Figure A 12 to adapt it to Figure A 11 Deletion m SG MAX FREQ E DOWNCONV on OFF LO CONTROL auto MAN LO SWITCH TIME SG TYPE Figure A 11 Softkey menu called from the RF LO key for serial number JP1KE RF LO LO CONTROL auto MAN LO SWTCH TIME SG TYPE SG MAX FREQ DOWNCONV on OFF cd0j0804 Figure A 12 Softkey menu called from the key current Manual Changes A 7 Adding IBASIC sample programs To adapt this manual to the 4352B with serial number JP1KE add the following to Appendix C Technical Information 2 6 IBASIC sample programs for frequency transient measu
5. Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default Power Voltage Output On Off Off Off Power Voltage Oto 16 V OV OV Instrument State Block Co py Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default Print mode Standard Color Standard Standard Copy skey On Off Off Off Copy time On Off Off Off Print color Fixed Variable Fixed Fixed DPI 75 to 600 dpi 75 75 Top margin 0 to 5 inch 0 1 inch steps 1 0 inch 1 0 inch Left margin 0 to 5 inch 0 1 inch steps 1 0 inch 1 0 inch Orient Portrait Landscape Portrait Portrait Formfeed On Off On On Save Recall Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default Storage Device Disk Memory Not Affected Not Affected Initialize disk format LIF DOS Not Affected Not Affected Define Save Data On Off On On Define Save Mem On Off Off Off System Allowable Values and Defaults for Key Functions E 15 Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default Limit Line On Off Off Off Limit Test On Off Off Off Beeper Fail On Off Off Off Limit Test Result 1 Not Done 0 Fail 1 Pass 1 Ta Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default GPIB address 0 to 30 Not Affected Not Affected GPIB mode System controller Addressable Not Affected Not Affected E 16 Allowable Values and Defaults for Key Functions Factory Set
6. 9 295 7 aaa Dana es en To 24 bit I O port on 4352B Rear Panel GND OUTPUT1 A1 AO gt To RF Out of Signal Source cd00503 Figure 5 4 Connecting a PLL DUT Note For information on the pin numbers of the 24 bit I O port refer to Chapter 11 i Specifications 1 4 Initial Setup This section describes how to perform the initial setup of the 4352B and the 43521A Downconverter Unit Verifying GPIB Controller Mode Make sure that the 4352B is the GPIB system controller 1 Press the key 2 Make sure that the SYSTEM CONTROLLER softkey menu is displayed with an underline Setting the Trigger Mode The measurement procedures described in this chapter assume that the continuous trigger mode is selected Perform the following steps to select the continuous trigger mode 1 Press Trigger 2 Press CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS is underlined Basic Measurements Using the 43521A 5 7 1 5 Setting the Downconverter Unit On the menu change DOWNCONV on OFF to DOWNCONV ON off DwC appears at the upper left of the LCD screen Note If the 43521A is not connected the 12 Bit I O Port on the rear panel is not d connected or the 43521A is turned off trying to set to DOWNCONV ON of
7. 23 10 C Output voltage range 15 V to 0 0001 V setting 15 V x0 1 5 mV OVtOZOV aaa settingx0 1 2 mV 20 0001 V to 35 Ve setting 15 V x0 1 5 mV DO to 40 C Output voltage range 15 V to 0 0001 Vo eens setting 15 V x0 3 15 mV OV to 20 Vi ana settingx 0 3 6 mV 20 0001 V to 35 Vio ccc cnc een tenes setting 15 V x 0 38 15 mV Noise Specifications 11 5 T O Signal QUO RH 1nV VH typical 10 kHz voltage setting 15 to 0 20 to 35 V option 001 1 5nV VH x typical Setup time Error Dl lt 20 msec typical Connector cicccici nee ened ened bene nt e eens BNC female Output resistance DC II 0 a lt 10 O typical With option 001 15 to 0 20 to 35 Vi ccc cece eens lt 50 Q typical Modulation Signal Output Frequency 0 cc rrenen erruna roaro ene eee bene enn Eten Ete es 1 kHz fixed Level Open load O to 1 Vrms variable in 1 mMVrms steps Setting Accuracy Open load 23410 C oo ccc ence nen tenet eres 0 5 Im Vims Open load 0 to 40 C oo ccc cnc tenet nee ens 1 5 3mVims Harmonic Distortion 2 0 0 0 00 e nent e ne erreren lt 40 dBc typical Connector 2 nnn ete n tnt tent eet e bees BNC female Output impedance ANS AN Nominal 50 Q typical Maximum output current ooo 5mAyms typical RF Input Frequency range cciiiiiii b tenet b etter enn e ees 10 MHz to 3 GHz Input level 10 dBm
8. 2 a a ee F 2 Diagnosis for the 43521A Downconverter Unit F 4 Disgnosis of the 600 MHz output a a e F 4 Diagnosis of the power measurement function of the 43521A 2 202 F 4 Contents 20 Messages Error Messages in Alphabetical Order Messages 2 Error Messages in Numerical Order Messages 16 Index Contents 21 Figures 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 3 1 3 2 3 3 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4352B Front Bana LCD Display Tester Mode LCD Display Analyzer Mode 2 a 4352B Rear Panel Power Cable Supplied A Connecting the BNC BNC connector 0 2 eee eee Rack Mount Kits Installation aa Basic Measurement Flow 2 2 ee ee Connecting Device VCO 2 2 e Connecting Device PLL a Example of Measurement Screen RF Power Characteristics vs DC Control Malaga Example of Measurement Screen Frequency Tuning Sensitivity Characteristics vs DC Control Voltage e Example of Measurement Screen Phase Noise Characteristics vs Offset Frequentes Example of Measurement Screen Frequency Transient Characteristics Example of Measurement Screen Spectrum 0 Example of the Measurement Screen Comparison between Characteristics Obtained Under Three Different Conditions Sample measurement screen integral of ph
9. LO 2 5831 GHz MEAS 12 7 msec Figure 5 6 Sample Measurement Screen Frequency Measurement DUT VCO 5 14 Basic Measurements Using the 43521A Note The frequency measurement resolution can be changed For details see i in Chapter 7 Y Basic Measurements Using the 43521A 5 15 2 3 C N Carrier Noise Ratio Measurement DUT VCO In this section you measure the ratio of the carrier signal level to the phase noise at the specified offset frequency 1 Preparing for the measurement Perform 1 Preparations for Measurements 1 1 to 1 9 in this chapter Connect a VCO as the DUT Making sure that the modulation output is OFF Look at the parameters displayed on the LCD screen and check that OFF is displayed in the MOD column If the modulation output value is displayed in MOD perform the following steps to turn the modulation output OFF Press and MOD OUT ON off to toggle it MOD OUT on OFF Performing signal search Press Meas FREQ BAND xx xx and SIGNAL SEARCH SIGNAL FOUND x xxx GHz appears on the screen Press NOMINAL FREQUENCY and check that the value displayed on the screen is the same as the frequency of the signal search result NOMINAL FREQUENCY x xxx GHz is displayed Selecting the measurement mode Select the tester mode Press Meas INST TYPE and VCO TESTER in this order The menu whose top item is MEAS RF POWER appears Select the C N ratio measurement mode Press CA
10. PHASE NOISE Allowable Values and Defaults for Key Functions E 13 Control Block Mod Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default Modulation Output On Off Off Off Modulation Amplitude 0 to 1 Vrms O Vims O Vims FETO Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default Local Oscillator Auto Man Man Man Control Waiting for LO Oto ls 100 ms 100 ms Switching SG Type 1 2 3 4 1 1 SG Max Freq 3 KHz to 20 GHz Not Affected Not Affected Downconverter On Off Not Affected Not Affected Trigger Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default Sweep type Hold Single Continuos Continuous Continuous Trigger Source Free run External Manual GPIB Free run Free run Trigger Video 10 MHz to 3 GHz resolution 1 Hz 10 MHz 10 MHz Trigger Polarity Positive Negative Positive Positive Dc Control Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default Control Voltage On Off Off Off Output Control Voltage 0 to Max Control Voltage OV OV Min Control Voltage Oto 20 V 15 to 35 V with option 001 OV OV Max Control Voltage Oto 20 V 15 to 35 V with option 001 20 V 20 V Delay to Voltage 10 msec to 1 sec 20 msec 20 msec Change E 14 Allowable Values and Defaults for Key Functions DC Power
11. Analyzer Mode A Marker Menu AMKR DMKR ON Puts the A marker on the current position of the marker and activates the A marker mode The A marker appears as a small triangle A The X and Y coordinates of the marker and sub marker readings on the screen are the difference between the actual reading of each marker and the A marker At this time AMkr appears at the upper right corner of the screen FIXED AMKR DMKR FIX Sets a user specified fixed A marker on the current position of the marker and activates the fixed A marker mode The stimulus and amplitude values can be set arbitrarily and can be anywhere in the display area Like other markers the fixed A marker is indicated by a small triangle A and the marker stimulus and measurement values are shown relative to this point the notation FxdA is displayed at the top right corner of the GRATICULE TRACKING AMKR DMKR TRAC Makes the active marker a A marker tracking A marker activates the tracking A marker mode In this mode the A marker automatically moves the active marker position Thus it is easy to move the A marker position by moving the active marker with use of the rotary knob or SEARCH PEAK At this time TrkA appears at the upper right corner of the screen AMODE OFF DMKR OFF Turns the A marker mode OFF When this mode is OFF the marker and sub marker readings are displayed in absolute values AMKR SWP PARAM DMKRPRM lt Value gt
12. The unit in the RF power measurement can be changed For details see Chapter 7 Note If a DC voltage component TTL output etc is included in the device output i signal the measurement will not be performed accurately In this case insert Y the high pass filter between the DUT s output and the 4352B to eliminate the DC component Basic Measurement Procedures 4 15 6 4 Frequency Measurement The frequency of the carrier signal from the VCO is measured 1 Make sure that the modulation output is OFF Look at the measurement setting parameters on the screen and confirm that OFF is displayed in the MOD column If the modulation output value is displayed in MOD perform the procedure in 6 3 RF Power Measurement to turn the modulation output OFF 2 Select frequency measurement as the measurement item Press Meas FREQUENCY The measured frequency value is displayed on the screen The frequency measurement resolution can be changed For details see Chapter 7 6 5 DC Power Current Measurement The DC current through the VCO power voltage Vec terminal is measured 1 Make sure that the modulation output is OFF Look at the measurement setting parameter on the sereen and confirm that OFF is displayed in the MOD column If the modulation output value is displayed in MOD perform the procedure in 6 3 RF Power Measurement to turn modulation output OFF 2 Select DC power current measurement as the measureme
13. Verify the input level to the 4352B RF IN connector Also this message is displayed if a negative DC voltage component is included in the DUT s output signal during RF Power Level measurement In this case insert a filter between the DUT s output terminal and the 4352B RF IN connector to eliminate the DC voltage component Caution Continuously applying excessive input to the 4352B will cause failures Messages 21 Error Messages Numerical Order 19 X tal PLL Unlocked 40 MHz The 4352B s internal PLL cannot be locked Verify the reference frequency input to the EXT REF input connector on the 4352B rear panel is 10 MHz 100 Hz 80 X tal PLL Unlocked 85 6 MHz The 4352B s internal PLL cannot be locked Adjustment or repair is necessary Contact our service office or the company from which you purchased the 4352B 81 2nd PLL Unlocked The 4352B s internal 2nd PLL cannot be locked If this message is displayed during a C N ratio measurement or a phase noise measurement the following problems and the corrective action are shown below a The DUT s noise level is too large or a large level spurious component exists in the measurement range Verify the spectrum of the DUT s output signal a The DUT s output signal is being modulated in frequency Press Mod MOD OUT on OFF to stop the frequency modulation a In the case of a DUT with an oscillation frequency of 100 MHz or less a large harmonics component is in
14. When selecting the maximum frequency span 512 MHz set the frequency of the local signal external signal source so that the difference from the measured signal frequency is within a range of 256 MHz to 768 MHz The measured signal and the local signal is inputted to the mixer inside the 43521A and the mixer outputs the IF signal within a range of 256 MHz to 768 MHz which is the difference frequency This IF signal is converted by the 64 divide ratio divider and the 4 divide ratio divider inside the 4352B Its frequency is then measured by the FV converter As described above by changing the frequency of the local signal of the 43521A depending on the measured signal frequency you can specify any frequencies as the minimum and maximum frequencies while keeping the frequency span 512 MHz Frequency resolution The output of the FV converter is read by the 16 bit resolution of 1 65536 ADC Including approximately 30 of overrange the resolution of 1 40000 is ensured for the output of the FV converter Inserting a frequency divider before the FV converter expands the measurement range by its ratio but also increases the frequency resolution Therefore in any cases the frequency resolution is 1 40000 of the frequency span Table C 2 Number of frequency conversions Frequency band For 10 MHz to 3 GHz For other frequency bands Span of 2 MHz Once Twice Span of 20 MHz Once Twice Maximum span N A Once span of 512 M
15. 6 1 Specifying DC Control Voltage Specify the DC control voltage that is applied to the device under test DUT from the 4352B and its related values to protect the DUT and to perform stable measurement In the 4352B the maximum and minimum acceptable level for the DC control voltage can be specified This will prevent excessive DC control voltage from being applied to the DUT Also when the output signal from the DUT has transient fluctuations after the change in the DC control voltage the wait time required for the stabilization of the output can be specified in the 4352B If this wait time is specified the 4352B waits until the specified time elapses after the DC control voltage is changed before it starts making a measurement This can eliminate the effect of the DUT transient response 1 Press Dc Control 2 Press MAX CTRL VOLTAGE 3 Press 1 2 x1 The maximum acceptable level for the DC control voltage is set to 12 V 4 Press MIN CTRL VOLTAGE 5 Press 1 x1 The minimum acceptable level for the DC control voltage is set to 1 V Next set the wait time to eliminate the DUT transient responses caused by changing the DC control voltage 6 Press CTRL DELAY 7 Press 2 0 k m The wait time is set to 20 msec Next specify the DC control voltage 8 Press CTRL VOLTAGE 9 Press 4 x1 The DC control voltage is set to 4 V 4 14 Basic Measurement Procedures 6 2 Applying D
16. Computer Select Code us IDA GPIB Address Select Code GPIB Address 800 717 Internal GPIB Interface Select Code em mm soe em GPIB GPIB Address T 721 BASIC 5 Select Code GPIB Address TXX Select Code OOO o 2 GPIB Address Other Device 719 External Signal Source CDO000B01 Figure B 1 Single Bus Concept There are two modes in bus mode system controller mode and addressable mode System This mode allows the analyzer to control peripherals directly in a stand alone Controller environment without an external controller This mode can only be selected manually from the analyzer front panel Use this mode for operation when no computer is connected to the analyzer Addressable This is the traditional programming mode in which the external computer is involved in all peripheral access operations When the external controller is connected to the analyzer through GPIB this mode allows the external controller to control the analyzer over GPIB in the talker mode in order to send data and in the listener mode to receive commands It also allows the analyzer to take or pass control in order to plot and print Setting Addresses In communications over the GPIB each instrument on the bus is identified by an GPIB address
17. FM Deviation Calibration Menu This menu is used to perform the FM deviation calibration Press EXECUTE DEV CAL to obtain a calibration factor for the 4352B When DEV CORR ON off is selected the value obtained by multiplying the measurement value by the calibration factor is displayed on the screen Note m This calibration offers measurement accuracy of 0 8 typical under the i specified operating conditions Y Y m Perform calibration after having specified the detection bandwidth m Perform calibration again if the temperature changes more than 5 C or if the detection bandwidth is changed a The calibration factor specified in the 4352B becomes invalid if the 4352B is turned OFF or if is pressed EXECUTE DEV CAL DEVCAL Obtains and stores a calibration factor in the 4352B Note that you only need to specify a factor once unless you change measurement conditions DEV CORR on OFF DEVCORR OFF O ON 1 Selects whether to turn the FM deviation calibration ON or OFF RETURN Returns to the previous menu 7 22 Measurement Block Tester Mode Measurement Block Analyzer Mode This chapter describes each softkey which is called from its corresponding hardkey in the MEASUREMENT block when the analyzer mode is selected The keys in the MEASUREMENT block control the functions including measurement parameters control of input ports control of display averaging and compensation The block also includes keys
18. This function is designed to send a load signal to the PLL synchronously with the measurement trigger When this function is ON the logic level of the OUTPUT signal in the 24 bit I O port in this example OUTPUT1 changes with a very short delay 85 psec typical after the generation of a trigger The signal of this port is supplied to the PLL as the load signal to change its frequency Figure C 2 and Figure C 3 show the connection diagram when using the trigger detection output function Depending on whether the PLL has serial data input or parallel data input the connection to the 24 bit I O port on the 4352B s rear panel varies To 24 bit I O port on 4352B Rear Panel GND OUTPUT1 A1 AO Pin1 Pin3 Pin6 Pin5 Figure C 2 Connection diagram when using the trigger detection output function serial input PLL Technical Information C 9 Technical Information To 24 bit I O port on 4352B Rear Panel GND OUTPUT1 Pin 1 Pin 3 lt 1 o lt N 1 Lo E a External Reference Signal Figure C 3 Connection diagram when using the trigger detection output function parallel input P
19. or Analyzer Mode shown on the right of the key label are displayed only in that mode Instrument State Block 10 1 Copy PRINT STANDARD COPY ABORT COPY SKEY on OFF COPY TIME on OFF PRINT SETUP PRINT STANDARD ORIENT PORTRAIT COLOR FORM FEED ON off PRINT COLOR FIXED OPERATING PARAMETERS DPI TOP MARGIN LFT MARGIN DEFAULT SETUP RETURN PRINT STANDARD COPY ABORT COPY TIME on OFF NEXT PAGE PREV PAGE RESTORE DISPLAY CD000901 Figure 10 1 Softkey Menus Accessed from Key Copy Menu PRINT STANDARD PRINALL Prints the screen image The type of the printer selected on the Print Setup menu is displayed on the softkey label STANDARD The black and white printer is selected COLOR The color printer is selected COPY ABORT COPA Aborts the printing currently in progress COPY SKEY on OFF PRSOFT ON OFF Specifies whether to print out softkey labels by switching ON OFF 10 2 Instrument State Block Copy COPY TIME on OFF COPT OFF O ON 1 Turns the time stamp ON or OFF for a print out When you select print the time and date are printed out first then the information on the display is printed See the Clock Setup Menu for how to change the date or time of the internal clock PRINT SETUP Displays the Print Setup menu This menu allows the screen image of on screen information to be printed in graphical or tabular form ORIENT PORTRAIT LANDSCAPE Specifies t
20. 4 30 Basic Measurement Procedures 7 6 Frequency Transient Target Device PLL The PLL output frequency transients that occur after a change in the PLL frequency setting are measured This measurement requires a program in order to send the DUT PLL sythesizer data containing a request to change its frequency The program is detailed in Appendix of this manual and Frequency Transient Measurement in Chapter 12 of the 4352B GPIB Programming Manual 1 Check that the modulation output is OFF Press Mod and confirm that MOD OUT on OFF is selected 2 Select the Frequency Transient as the measurement item Press Meas RF TRANSIENT 3 Set the trigger mode to HOLD Press Trigger Press HOLD A Specify the measurement range for the frequency transient Press Sense Range TARGET FREQ Use the numeric entry keys to enter the target frequency Press TARGET POSITION Use the numeric entry keys to enter the target position value Select a frequency span from 2 MHz 20 MHz or MAX 5 Specify the sweep start time and the sweep time Press Menu Press SWEEP Use START and the entry keys to set the delay time from the measurement trigger to the start of sweeping Use SPAN and entry keys to specify the sweep time Allowable range you can specify for the delay time is 0 to 800 msec for the sweep time 12 5 psec to 10 sec 6 Send divider data to the PLL See 2 5 Sending divider data to a serial input PLL in
21. ASSIGN Hp4352 OUTPUT Hp4352 ENTER Hp4352 WRITEIO EXECUTE READIO GOTO LINE END EDIT BASIC USERKEY LETTER MENU 64K RAM 448K BASIC 128K RAM 384K BASIC 256K RAM 256K BASIC 384K RAM 128K BASIC 448K RAM 64K BASIC DONE CANCEL CHANGE YES NO HOUR MIN SEC ENTER CANCEL TIME HH MM SS DATE DD MM YY DATE MODE MonDayY ear DayMonYear RETURN 371 A BEEP DONE ON off BEEP WARN on OFF RETURN MONTH DAY YEAR ENTER CANCEL CD009003 Figure 10 4 Softkey Menus Accessed from System Key Tester Mode Instrument State Block 10 13 System IBASIC MEMORY PARTITION SET CLOCK BEEPER MENU LIMIT MENU SERVICE MENU Step Continue Run Pause Stop Edit ON KEY LABELS CAT SAVE RE SAVE GET PURGE INITIALIZE MSI SCRATCH RENumber LIST COMMAND ENTRY CLEAR I O RESET 64K RAM 448K BASIC 128K RAM 384K BASIC 256K RAM 256K BASIC 384K RAM 128K BASIC 448K RAM 64K BASIC DONE CANCEL TIME HH MM SS DATE DD MM YY DATE MODE MonDayY ear DayMonYear RETURN BEEP DONE ON off BEEP WARN on OFF RETURN LIMIT LINE on OFF LIMIT TEST on OFF BEEP FAIL on OFF EDIT LIMIT CLEAR LIMIT DATA gt LIMIT MENU RETURN CO Se al ASSIGN Hp4352 OUTPUT Hp4352 ENTER Hp4352 WRITEIO EXECUTE READIO GOTO LINE END EDIT BASIC USERK
22. MARKER MENU Displays the Marker menu RETURN Returns to the previous menu Marker Menu MKR START MKRSTAR Specifies the X coordinate value of the marker reading as the sweep parameter start value MKR STOP MKRSTOP Specifies the X coordinate value of the marker reading as the sweep parameter stop value This softkey cannot be used in frequency transient measurements MKR CENTER MKRCENT Specifies the X coordinate value of the marker reading as the sweep parameter center value This softkey cannot be used in phase noise or frequency transient measurements RETURN Returns to the previous menu Automatic Frequency Control Menu This menu controls the settings for the automatic frequency control function The automatic frequency control function can automatically and quickly set maintain the DUT output frequency to your specified target frequency It does this by controlling the internal DC control voltage and using the measurement results obtained by its internal frequency counter This function can be used only in phase noise or spectrum measurements Note The automatic frequency control function starts immediately before i measurement starts During the entire measurement the DC control voltage is Y kept constant Therefore the DC control voltage level is not changed even if the actual frequeney is shifted or changed during the measurement Be sure to take this into consideration for measurements with
23. Sets the high pass filter cutoff frequency for the FM deviation detection bandwidth to 50 Hz 300Hz DTHPF FC300HZ Sets the high pass filter cutoff frequency for the FM deviation detection bandwidth to 300 Hz LP FILTER 3kHz DTLPF FC3KHZ Sets the low pass filter cutoff frequency for the FM deviation detection bandwidth to 3 kHz 15kHz DTLPF FC15KHZ Sets the low pass filter cutoff frequency for the FM deviation detection bandwidth to 15 kHz 7 8 Measurement Block Tester Mode Bw Avg Tester Mode 20kHz DTLPF FC20KHZ Sets the low pass filter cutoff frequency for the FM deviation detection bandwidth to 20 kHz Measurement Block Tester Mode 7 9 Format Tester Mode Format POWER UNIT dBm dBy dBuY Watt Volt PEAK CONV on OFF Figure 7 5 Softkey Menus Accessed from Key Tester Mode Menu POWER UNIT dBm POWUNIT DBM Selects dBm as the unit for RF power measurement data dBV POWUNIT DBV Selects ABV as the unit for RF power measurement data dBuV POWUNIT DBUV Selects dBuV as the unit for RF power measurement data Watt POWUNIT W Selects Watt as the unit for RF power measurement data Volt POWUNIT V Selects Volt as the unit for RF power measurement data PEAK CONV on OFF PKCONV OFF O ON 1 Switches between HZrms root mean square value and Hz peak to display FM deviation Note The 4352B can only measure the
24. in this chapter the minimum and i maximum allowable levels of the DC control voltage have been set to 1 V and 8 Y V respectively Therefore you cannot enter a value out of the range between 1 V and 8 V Basic Measurements Using the 43521A 5 19 6 Specifying the number of measurement points per sweep Press Menu SWEEP and NUMBER of POINTS in this order The current setting is displayed on the screen as NUMBER OF POINTS xx Use the numeric entry keys to set the number of measurement points Example Press 5 1 and x1 7 Specifying the sweep time per sweep Press Menu SWEEP and SWEEP TIME in this order h m s is displayed Alternately press numeric entry keys and h m s to specify the hour minute and second respectively Example To specify 1 minute and 23 seconds press 0 h m s 1 h m s 2 G and 1 Note You can also specify the sweep time in seconds In the case of the sweep time i setting in seconds press SWEEP TIME use the numeric entry keys to enter Y the time in seconds and then press x1 The minimum setting time varies depending on the specified number of measurement points The maximum setting time is 1 hour 8 Performing signal search Press Meas FREQ BAND xx xx and SIGNAL SEARCH in this order SIGNAL FOUND x xxx GHz appears on the screen Press NOMINAL FREQUENCY and check that the value displayed on the screen is the same as the frequency of the signal search resul
25. 1 170 Vpower 12 180 Fmax 2 1E 8 Hz 190 Fmin 1 75E 8 Hz 200 Fref 1 8E 8 Hz 210 Start 0 second 220 Sweep time 02 second 230 240 DATA 225 235 245 255 Divider 250 FOR I 1 TO 4 260 READ Divider I Read Divider Numbers 270 NEXT I 280 290 OUTPUT 0Hp4352 PRES Preset 4352 300 OUTPUT Hp4352 HOLD Trigger HOLD 310 OUTPUT Hp4352 SGTYPE 1 Select SG TYPE 1 320 OUTPUT 0Hp4352 LOSWT Sg_wait_time Set LOCAL SG Wait Time to 0 1 second 330 OUTPUT Hp4352 LOAUTO ON Automatic Local SG Control 340 WAIT 3 Sample program using the trigger detection output function 1 2 Manual Changes A 9 350 OUTPUT 0Hp4352 VA Select Analyzer mode 360 OUTPUT 0Hp4352 MEAS TRAN Select Frequency Transient Measurement 370 EXECUTE SING Perform F V Converter Calibration 380 OUTPUT Hp4352 POSL Positive Logic 390 OUTPUT Hp4352 VPOW Vpower Set Power Voltage 400 OUTPUT Hp4352 VOUT ON Supply DC Voltage 410 OUTPUT 0Hp4352 STAR Start Set Measurement Start Time 420 OUTPUT 0Hp4352 SPAN Sweep_time Set Sweep Time 430 OUTPUT 0Hp4352 TRMAX Fmax Set MAX Measurement Frequency 440 OUTPUT 0Hp4352 TRMIN Fmin Set MIN Measurement Frequency 450 OUTPUT Hp4352 TRREF Fref Set Reference Frequency 460 OUTPUT 0Hp4352 TRGOUT ON Set Trigger Output function ON 470 OUTPUT 0Hp4352 0OUTiENVH Set OUTPUT 1 to HIGH by Trigger 480 WRITEIO 16 0 0 Initialize PORT A 490 OUTPUT Hp
26. B 1 GPIB interface 2 10 GPIB trigger wait display Bus 2 5 2 8 graphics D 3 GRAPHICS SAVDTIFF 10 7 GRATICULE COLO GRAT 7 17 8 19 H HALF INSTR HALF BASIC DISA HIHB 7 14 8 18 Hld 2 5 2 8 HP FILTER 300Hz DTHPF FC300HZ 7 8 HP FILTER 50Hz DTHPF FC50HZ 7 8 humidity 11 10 I IBASIC 10 15 IBASIC COLO IBT 7 17 8 20 incoming inspection 3 1 INITIALIZE 10 16 INITIALIZE INID 10 10 initialize 10 10 INITIALIZE DISK YeEsS 10 11 INITIALIZE DISK YES 10 11 inlet 2 10 instrument BASIC 10 15 instrument state block 1 3 10 1 instrument states and internal data D 2 INST TYPE VCO TESTER VT VCO TESTER 7 3 8 3 VCO ANALY VA VCO ANALY 8 3 INST TYPE 7 3 8 3 INTENSITY INTE lt Value gt 7 16 8 19 internal data D 2 internal reference output 11 9 internal reference output 2 9 i o port 2 10 I O port pin assignment 11 7 K keyboard 11 7 keyboard connector 2 10 im 6 2 knob 6 2 Index 4 L ORIENT PORTRAIT LANDSCAPE 10 3 LCD 11 9 LFT MARGIN LMARG 10 4 lif logical inter change format D 1 LIF logical inter change format D 1 LIMIT LINE on OFF LIMILINE OFF O 0N 1 8 17 10 20 10 22 LIMIT LINE PARAMETER COLO PARAM 7 17 LIMIT MENU 10 15 LIMIT on OFF SAVLIM OFF O 0N 1 10 8 LIMIT TEST on OFF LIMITEST OFF O ON 1 10 20 line switch 2 3 LIST 10 17 Listener B 2 loca 1 3 Local 1 3 LO CONTR
27. Clears all limit lines NO Cancels clearing of all limit lines Data Limit Menu Analyzer Mode LIMIT LINE on OFF LIMILINE OFF O ON 1 Turns the limit line function ON or OFF If limit line function is turned on the limit lines are displayed for visual comparison of the measurement data in all rectangular coordinate forms Limit line can be saved onto the disk When the limit line function is ON you can specify the limit line and save it into the disk with an instrument state DATA UPPER DATLIMU Stores the data trace as the upper limit line DATA LOWER DATLIML Stores the data trace as the lower limit line DATA UPPER EXDATLIMU Replaces the current displayed data trace with the upper limit line so that you can check measured values on the upper limit line with the marker DATA LOWER EXDATLIML Replaces the current displayed data trace with the lower limit line so that you can check measured values on the lower limit line with the marker 10 22 Instrument State Block Local Lect This key has the following two functions m One sets the 4352B to the local mode In this mode you can control the 4352B from the front panel On the other hand in the remote mode an external controller controls the 4352B When you wish to set the 4352B back to the local mode press Local m The other displays the GPIB menu and the Address menu The GPIB menu is used to set the controller
28. DUT PLL 2 ee Contents 22 2 1 2 4 2 7 2 9 3 4 3 6 3 8 4 2 4 9 4 10 4 25 4 27 4 30 4 32 4 34 4 38 4 40 4 42 4 44 5 3 5 4 5 6 5 7 5 13 5 14 5 17 5 20 5 23 5 26 5 29 5 30 5 33 5 36 6 1 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 10 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 11 1 11 2 11 3 AL A 2 AB AA AS A6 A T A 8 A9 A 10 A 11 A 12 A 13 B 1 Entry Block Softkey Menus Accessed from Meas Key Tester Mode Frequency band menu Softkey Menus Accessed from Key Tester Mode Softkey Menus Accessed from Bw Avg Key Tester Mode Softkey Menus Accessed from Format Key Tester Mode Softkey Menus Accessed from Display Key Tester Mode 1 2 Softkey Menus Accessed from Display Key Tester Mode 2 2 Display Location Softkey Menus Accessed from M Menu Key Tester Mode Cable Frequency Characteristics for Level Loss Used by the Compensation Function Softkey Menus Accessed from Meas Key Analyzer Mode Frequency band menu Softkey Menus Accessed from Sense Range Gense Range Key Analyzer Mode Softkey Menus Accessed from Bw Avg Key Analyzer Mode Specifying an Appropriate Aperture o Softkey Menus Accessed from Format Key Analyzer Mode Softkey Menus Accessed from Key Analyzer Mode 1 2 Softkey Menus Acce
29. Data Part 1 104020E 02 gt 1 220121E 02 1 This is the date when the file is saved mmm dd yyyy format 2 This line is saved when the title is defined displayed 3 This line is saved only when C N or FM deviation is selected 4 This line is saved only when C N or FM deviation is selected 5 gt denotes a tab code Data is delimited by tab codes Table D 4 Example of ASCII Data File Contents Analyzer Mode Block Names Contents Status Block 4352B REV 1 00 DATE Jun 01 1997 Data Block State TITLE This is a title MEASURE TYPE RF Power UNIT dBm RF ATT 10 dB CONTROL VOLTAGE O V POWER VOLTAGE 4 3 V MOD AMPLITUDE OFF NUMBER of POINTS 51 NOISE BAND WIDTH 1 Hz for phase noise SWEEP TIME 867 ms REF FREQ 0 Hz for frequency transient Title Line Parameter Data Memory Upper Lower 3 4 Data 0 000000000000E 00 7 586498E 01 6 687014E 01 gt 9 581785E 01 Part gt 5 589128E 01 7 999999821186E 02 7 775766E 01 gt 6 874978E 01 gt 9 772156E 01 gt 5 77372E 01 1 59999964237E 01 7 923842E 01 7 024761E 01 9 923009E 01 5 926266E 018 1 This is the date when the file is saved mmm dd yyyy format 2 This line is saved when the title is defined displayed 3 gt denotes a tab code Data is delimited by tab codes 4 This line represents types of data saved in the file Four 4 data types Dat
30. E When the 43521A Downconverter Unit is connected DOWNCONV ON off is set to ON and the frequency band is set to 10 MHz to 3 GHz 7 4 Measurement Block Tester Mode Tester Mode FREQ RES 1kHz 64kHz NOISE ATTEN FM DEV RANGE FM DEV RNG 200kHz 20kHz 2kHz RETURN cdQj0705 Figure 7 3 Softkey Menus Accessed from Sense Range Key Tester Mode Menu RF ATTEN RFATT lt Value gt Sets the input attenuator of the 4352B or the 43521A Downconverter Unit During measurement CAUTION Set RF ATT 5dB Less or CAUTION Set RF ATT 5dB More may appear In this case use one of the following methods to change the input attenuator value until the CAUTION display disappears m Press and RF ATTEN The current input attenuator value is displayed as RF ATTEN xx dB Press the key or the f key to change the input attenuator value E Press and RF ATTEN The current input attenuator value is displayed as RF ATTEN xx dB Use the numeric entry keys to change the input attenuator value in steps of 5 dB The input attenuator of the 4352B and that of the 43521A provide 0 dB to 25 dB and 0 dB to 35 dB respectively in steps of 5 dB Therefore you cannot specify a value that is not a multiple of 5 dB In the following cases the setting is applied to the input attenuator of the 4352B m When using the 4352B alone without connecting the 43521A E When the 43521A Downconverter Unit is connected DOWNCONV UN o
31. FREQUENCY TUNING SENSITIVITY PHASE FREQUENCY TUNING FREQUENCY TUNING NOISE LINEAR SPECTRUM SENSITIVITY SENSITIVITY 5 0005MHz P HASE 5 0005MHz P HASE NOISE LINEAR NOISE LINEAR FREQ BAND FREQ BAND MIDPOINT VALUE MIDPOINT VALUE SPECTRUM SPECTRUM Span Stop Start RF POWER FREQUENCY TUNING 0V RF POWER OV RF POWER SENSITIVITY PHASE NOISE LINEAR 0 to FREQUENCY TUNING FREQUENCY TUNING 10s FREQUENCY TRANSIENT SENSITIVITY 10ms SENSITIVITY 10ms Stop Start SPECTRUM FREQUENCY FREQUENCY TRANSIENT 1OMHz TRANSIENT 10MHz PHASE NOISE PHASE NOISE LINEAR SPECTRUM LINEAR SPECTRUM Sweep Type Log Linear Log Log Continued E 12 Allowable Values and Defaults for Key Functions Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default Marker On Off off off Marker On Data Mem Data Data Marker List On Off off off Continuous Marker On Off On On Sub Marker 1 4 On Off Off Delta Marker Off On Fixed Tracking Off Off Delta Mkr Swp Prm 8e9 to 8e9 0 0 Delta Mkr Value 3e9 to 3e9 0 0 Search Mode Peak Max Min Target Peak Peak Search Tracking On Off Off Off Threshold On Off Off Off Threshold Value 3e9 to 3e9 100 100 Peak Delta Value 3e9 to 3e9 1 1 Search Target 3e9 to 3e9 3 3 Search Range Mode On Off Off Off Integ Noise On Off Off Off Detection Positive Negative for Spectrum Sample for Sample Sample
32. Function Reference Describes basic operations of this instrument and the 43521A Downconverter Unit and all the functions called from the front panel keys and softkeys It also provides information on options and accessories available specifications system performance and conceptual information about the analyzer s features GPIB Programming Manual Describes basic programming to remote control this instrument and the 43521A Downconverter Unit using GPIB Also contains information on the usage of all GPIB commands the status report mechanism and the data transmission format Manual Supplement for Instrument BASIC Users Handbook Describes how Instrument BASIC works with the analyzer Instrument BASIC User s Handbook Explains the usage of Instrument BASIC including general programming examples and hints Also explains all Instrument BASIC commands This manual consists of the following three parts Instrument BASIC Programming Technique Instrument BASIC Interface Technique and Instrument BASIC Language Reference 43521A Operation Manual Describes the accessories of the 43521A Downconverter Unit connection to the 4352B VCO PLL signal analyzer configuration of the front and rear panels and specifications Details on how to operate the 43521A are described in the 4352B Function Reference If A Problem Is Suspected If any kind of failure is observed in the operation of the analyzer or in the op
33. PLL In this section you measure the transient of the output frequency when changing the frequency setting of the DUT PLL This measurement requires a program in order to send the DUT PLL sythesizer data containing a request to change its frequency The program is detailed in Appendix C of this manual and Frequency Transient Measurement in Chapter 12 of the 4352B GPIB Programming Manual 1 Preparing for the measurement Preform 1 Preparations for Measurements 1 1 to 1 9 in this chapter In this example connect a PLL as the DUT Selecting the measurement mode Select the analyzer mode Press Meas INST TYPE and VCO ANALY in this order The menu whose top item is ANALY RF POWER appears Selecting the frequency transient measurement mode Press RF TRANSIENT RF TRANSIENT is underlined Making sure that the modulation output is OFF Press Mod and check that MOD OUT on OFF is selected Setting the measurement trigger to the HOLD mode Press Trigger and HOLD in this order At the left of the screen status indication area H1d is displayed Setting the target frequency Press Sense Range and TARGET FREQ in this order The current value is displayed on the screen aS TARGET FREQUENCY xx MHz Use the numeric entry keys to enter the target frequency Example To specify 5 85 GHz press 5 8 5 and G n Setting the target position Press TARGET POSITION The current value is dis
34. of the entered target frequency TARGET FREQ and target position TARGET POSITION First select all bands that contain the target frequency from 16 measurement frequency bands in Table 8 1 and calculate the target frequency position position value in each band Compare these position values with the entered target position value xx and select the band that contains the nearest position The measurement is performed using the maximum and minimum frequencies the frequency span and the frequency resolution of the measurement frequency band see Table 8 1 Also the value calculated in the measurement frequency band is used as the target position value xx Table 8 1 Available measurement frequency bands when MAX xxxxMHz is selected Measurement frequency 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 band number Maximum frequency MHz 192 384 576 768 960 1152 1354 1536 1728 1920 2112 2304 2496 2688 2880 3000 Minimum frequency MHz 64 128 192 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 704 768 832 896 960 1024 Frequency span MHz 128 256 384 512 640 768 896 1024 1152 1280 1408 1536 1664 1792 1920 2048 Frequency resolution kHz 3 2 64 96 12 8 16 19 2 22 4 25 6 28 8 32 35 2 38 4 41 6 448 48 51 2 On the other hand if the 43521A Downconverter Unit is connected and the frequency band is set to a range other than 10 MHz to 3 GHz the frequency span is 512 MHz and the frequency resolution is 12 8 kHz The measurement maximum an
35. reference frequency REF FREQ FOR SCALE described later To measure a frequency transient of a PLL you need to prepare an IBASIC program which changes divider data setting through the 4352B s built in 24 bit I O interface and or to set 4352B so that it generates a measurement trigger upon a change of the PLL divider data setting For more information see 2 4 Setting the measurement trigger and 2 5 Sending divider data to a serial input PLL described later 2 1 Relationship between hardware and setting in transient measurement The frequency transient measurement is realized by combining the following hardware devices m Mixer for frequency conversion m Frequency divider m Frequency to voltage converter hereafter FV converter that operates within an input frequency range of 1 MHz to 3 MHz The relationship between the frequency span and the hardware is described below When using the 4352B alone or using the 43521A with the frequency band of 10 MHz to 3 GHz a When selecting the frequency span of 2 MHz When selecting the frequency span of 2 MHz set the frequency of the local signal external signal source so that the difference from the measured signal frequency is within a range of 1 MHz to 3 MHz The measured signal and the local signal is inputted to the mixer inside the 4352B and the mixer outputs an IF signal within a range of 1 MHz to 3 MHz The frequency of this IF signal is measured by the FV converter A
36. to the 43521A Downconverter Unit set this setting to ON If it is set to ON DwC appears in the status indication area at the left of the LCD screen In the following cases if you try to set this key to ON an error 61 No Downconverter Unit Connected is displayed m When the 43521A is not connected when the 12 bit I O port on the 4352B s rear panel is not connected m When the 43521A is turned off Check the connection and the power supply This setting is battery backed Therefore even if you turn off the 4352B the setting is maintained However if you turn on the 4352B with the 43521A not connected or the 43521A turned off it is automatically set to OFF If you make measurements using the 43521A with this setting OFF compensation for frequency characteristics is not performed and as a result measured values may be inaccurate When you make measurements using the 43521A be sure to set this key to ON Control Block 9 5 Trigger Tri gger Menu TRIGGER HOLD SINGLE CONTINUOUS TRIG SRC FREE RUN TRIGGER FREE RUN MEASURE RESTART EXTERNAL HP IB MANUAL VALUE For Analyzer Mode Only TRIG PLRTY POS neg RETURN CD008003 Figure 9 3 Softkey Menus Accessed from Trigger Key TRIGGER HOLD HOLD Holds the on screen information and stops the measurement and loading of data At this time Hld appears at the status display area on the left hand side of the screen This
37. 14 8 18 ALLOCAT N ALL INSTR DISA ALLI ALL INSTR 7 14 8 18 Allowable values E 1 altitude 11 10 ANALY RE POWER MEAS POWE RF POWER 8 3 approximate 11 1 AUTO FREQ CONTROL 7 19 8 22 AUTOREC 10 6 D 4 auto recall D 4 auto recall function 10 6 AUTO SCALE AUTO 8 15 AVERAGING FACTOR AVERFACT lt Value gt 7 7 AVERAGING FACTOR AVERFACT lt Value gt 8 9 averaging function ON display Avg 2 5 2 8 AVERAGING on OFF AVER OFFIOIONI1 8 9 AVERAGING on OFF AVER OFFIOIONI1 7 7 AVERAGING RESTART AVERREST 7 7 AVERAGING RESTART AVERREST 8 9 Avg 2 5 2 8 B BACKGROUND INTENSITY BACI lt Value gt 7 16 8 19 BACK SPACE 7 16 8 18 10 11 6 2 backup memory E 1 backup memory duration E 1 BASIC STATUS DISA BASS 7 14 8 18 beep 10 15 beep 10 20 beep done 10 20 BEEP DONE ON off BEEPDONE OFF O ON 1 10 20 BEEPER MENU 10 15 BEEP FAIL on OFF BEEPFAIL OFF O ON 1 10 20 beep warn 10 20 BEEP WARN on OFF BEEPWARN OFF O ON 1 10 20 Index 1 BRIGHTNESS CBRI lt Value gt 7 18 8 20 brightness 7 18 Bus 2 5 2 8 Bw Avg 1 2 7 7 8 9 C CABLE LOSS COMPEN 7 19 8 23 CANCEL 7 16 8 19 10 12 carrier frequency 2 8 CARRIER MENU 8 23 CARRIER NOISE MEAS CN 7 3 CARRIER CENTER CARRCENT 8 32 CAT 10 16 CENTER CENT lt Value gt 8 23 DATA COLO DATA 7 17 MEMORY COLO MEMO 7 17 CHANGE DIRECTORY CHAD lt Ch
38. 1792 1920 2048 Frequency resolution kHz 3 2 6 4 9 6 128 16 19 2 22 4 25 6 28 8 32 35 2 38 4 41 6 448 48 51 2 Maximum Sweep Time o 20 sec 114 Specifications T O Signal Minimum Sweep Time Resolution eeaeee rro 12 5 psec Time Base Accuracy When the 4352B isn t phase locked to the external signal source 10ppm typical When the 4352B is phase locked to the external signal source o Time base accuracy of the external signal source used Spectrum When the detection mode DETECTION is set to the positive peak POS PEAK Absolute level accuracy When 6 5 dBm is input attenuation 0 dB OLHO CC 2dBm typical Relative level accuracy Ratio of 10 dBm to 60 dBm during sweep attenuation 0 dB PAPO 0 5 dB typical 1 5 dB I O Signal VCO Power Voltage Output Voltage range 0 00 0 cece eee eee Oto 15 5 V 50 mA max variable in 1 mV steps Setting accuracy OVa LOA Co 0 2 2 mV DO to 40 Co 0 6 6 mV Noise QUO Rs 10nV VH typical Setup time QError 01 ooo lt 20 msec typical Connector 2 ee eee n rere tebe tnt eee ne BNC female Output resistance DC 2 0 cera lt 0 3 Mtypical VCO Control Voltage Output Voltage range nunana nnau 0 to 20 V 20 mA max variable in 100 uV steps Lecce eee enn neces With option 001 15 to 35 V 20 mA max variable in 100 uV steps Setting accuracy
39. 4 Integral of Phase Noise vs Offset Frequency Characteristics Measurement DUT VCO In this section you integrates the phase noise characteristic of the device with respect to the offset frequency from the carrier of the DUT VCO 1 10 11 Preparing for the measurement Preform 1 Preparations for Measurements 1 1 to 1 9 in this chapter Connect a VCO as the DUT Selecting the measurement mode Select the analyzer mode Press Meas INST TYPE and VCO ANALY in this order The menu whose top item is ANALY RF POWER appears Selecting the phase noise vs offset frequency characteristics measurement mode Press PHASE NOISE PHASE NOISE is underlined Making sure that the modulation output is OFF Press Mod and check that MOD OUT on OFF is selected Performing signal search Press Meas FREQ BAND xx xx and SIGNAL SEARCH in this order SIGNAL FOUND x xxx GHz appears on the screen Press NOMINAL FREQUENCY and check that the value displayed on the screen is the same as the frequency of the signal search result NOMINAL FREQUENCY x xxx GHz Selecting the linear sweep Press and SWEEP TYPE to select SWEEP TYPE LIN FREQ Specifying the offset frequency sweep range Press and SWEEP in this order The current setting is displayed on the screen as CENTER xxx MHz Press CENTER and use the numeric entry keys to enter the sweep center value Example To specify 1 MHz press 1 and M The
40. 6 RE SAVE 10 16 RE SAVE FILE RESAVD lt Character String gt 10 6 RES BW BW lt Value gt 8 10 RESET 10 17 RESET COLOR RSCO 7 18 8 20 RESTORE DISPLAY RESD 10 5 RF ATTEN RFATT lt Value gt 7 5 8 5 RF IN 2 3 RF LO 1 3 9 1 9 3 RF TRANSIENT MEAS TRAN 8 3 RF TRANS REF FREQ TRREF lt Value gt RE ve MENU TRTARG lt value gt 8 6 Run 10 16 RUN CONT input 11 9 run cont input 2 9 S SAVE 10 16 SAVE ASCII SAVDASC 10 8 SAVE BINARY D 2 SAVE BINARY SAVDDAT lt Character String gt 10 8 SAVE COLORS SVCO 7 16 8 19 SAVE FILE 10 6 Save Recall 1 3 SCALE DIV SCAL lt Value gt 8 16 SCALE FOR DATA SCAF DATA MEMO 8 16 SCALE REFERENCE 8 15 scan speed of 31 5 kHz 2 10 SCRATCH 10 17 screen display 2 4 2 7 SEARCH LEFT SEAL 8 30 SEARCH PEAK SEAM PEAK 8 29 SEARCH RANGE 8 30 SEARCH RIGHT SEAR 8 31 second IF input connector 2 10 second IF input output connector 2 10 second IF output connector 2 10 SELECT LETTER 10 11 SELECT LETTER 7 16 8 18 SENS APERTURE SENSAPER lt Value gt 8 10 Sense Range 1 2 7 5 8 5 SENSITIVITY AFCSENS lt Value gt 7 20 8 25 SENS PLRTY POS neg SENSPOL POS NEG 8 6 serial number A 2 service function 10 15 SERVICE MENU 10 15 service mode connector 2 10 service mode display 2 5 2 8 SET ADDRESSES 10 23 SET CLOCK 10 15 SG MAX FREQ 9 4 SG TYPE SGTYPE lt
41. 66 No Signal Found is displayed Check the setting of the frequency band Meas FREQ BAND xx xx again If you cannot enter the nominal frequency NOMINAL FREQ for example you do not know the oscillation frequency of the DUT you can find out the nominal frequency using this search function In the following cases this function is not required and therefore invalid m When using the 4352B alone without connecting the 43521A E When the 43521A Downconverter Unit is connected DOWNCONV ON off is set to ON and the frequency band is set to 10 MHz to 3 GHz NOMINAL FREQ NOMFREQ lt value gt Pressing this key displays the current setting as NOMINAL FREQUENCY x xxxxx GHz Enter an approximate oscillation frequency nominal frequency of the DUT using the numeric entry keys Enter the value with a resolution of 200 MHz You can enter the nominal frequency within the specified frequency band Meas FREQ BAND xx xx Setting the nominal frequency realizes correct measurements If you cannot enter the nominal frequency for example you do not know an approximate oscillation frequency of the DUT use the signal search function SIGNAL SEARCH described above to find out the nominal frequency The carrier frequency detected by the signal search is automatically set as the nominal frequency In the following cases this function is not required and therefore invalid m When using the 4352B alone without connecting the 43521A
42. 8 DATA ON off SAVDAT OFFIO ON 1 VA 10 8 MEM on OFF SAVMEM OFF O ONI1 108 LIMIT on OFF SAVLIM OFF O 0N 1 Analyzer Mode Ce OB RETURN cc e 10 8 File Utilities Menu PP 10 9 PURGE FILE PURG lt Character String gt Lo 10 9 Contents 14 CREATE DIRECTORY CRED lt Character String gt 10 9 CHANGE DIRECTORY CHAD lt Character String gt 10 9 COPY FILE FILC aoaaa a 10 10 INITIALIZE INT a a A 10 10 FORMAT LIF DISF LIF DISF DOS 10 10 STOR DEVL C STODDISK STODMEMO 04 10 10 RETURN 2 ww a a a 10 10 File Select Mena 10 10 PREV FILES ll a a a a a a 10 10 NEXT FILES cl a a a 10 10 STOR DEVI CSTODDISK STODMEMO 048 10 10 Initialize YES NO Menu 2 1 we ee 10 11 INITIALIZE DISK YES 2 ee 10 11 DO 10 11 Delete YES NO Menu 2 1 we 10 11 PURGE YES 2 1 kk a a a a 10 11 DO 10 11 Character Input Menu 2 a 10 11 SELECT LETTER cc e 10 11 SPACE ll e 10 11 BACK SPACE 2 1 a a a 10 11 ERASE TITLE cc a a a 10 11 DONE 2 10 12 STOR DEV STODDISK STODMEMO 0 4 10 12 CANCEL 2 0 ww e 10 12 e 10 13 Menu 1 we a 10 15 IBASIC cl e 10 15 MEMORY PARTITION e 10 15 SET CLOCK lccllll a e 10 15 BEEPER MENU e 10 15 LIMIT MENU Analyzer Mode e 10 15 SERVICE MENU 10 15 Instrument BASIC Menu 2 2 ee 10 16 Step 2 10 16 Continue 2 6 a a
43. Adjustment menu Note Select MORE to display a softkey menu for other options if you wish to change i the color of on screen information other than those given above Y TEXT MARKER COLO TEXT Selects text for example softkey labels other than measurement data its color and displays the Second Color Adjustment menu MORE Displays the Color Change MORE menu RETURN Returns to the previous menu Color Change MORE Menu IBASIC COLO IBT Selects text on the IBASIC screen to change the color and displays the Second Color Adjustment menu PEN1 COLO PEN1 Selects pen 1 to change the color and displays the Second Color Adjustment menu Measurement Block Tester Mode 7 17 Tester Mode PEN2 COLO PEN2 Selects pen 2 to change the color and displays the Second Color Adjustment menu PEN3 COLO PEN3 Selects pen 3 to change the color and displays the Second Color Adjustment menu PEN4 COLO PEN4 Selects pen 4 to change the color and displays the Second Color Adjustment menu PEN5 COLO PEN5 Selects pen 5 to change the color and displays the Second Color Adjustment menu PEN6 COLO PEN6 Selects pen 6 to change the color and displays the Second Color Adjustment menu RETURN Returns to the previous menu Second Color Adjustment Menu TINT TINT lt Value gt Adjusts the tint of the selected on screen information BRIGHTNESS CBRI lt Value gt Adjusts the brightness of the color be
44. Appendix C to learn how to send the divider data to the PLL via the 24 bit I O port 7 Send a load strobe signal to the PLL See 2 5 Sending divider data to a serial input PLL in Appendix C to know how to generate a measurement trigger and send a load signal to the PLL 8 Optimize the display scale for the measurement data Press Display Press AUTO SCALE to optimize the display scale for the measurement data Basic Measurement Procedures 4 31 RF Transient 166 kHz REF 186 8 MHz ATN 54E TARG 150 8MHz Sox of 178 80 181 8MHz REF O He START sec FSPAN 2 MHz Lo 182 8 MHz SPAN 5 msec Figure 4 7 Example of Measurement Screen Frequency Transient Characteristics 9 Read the measurement value Press Menu MARKER to display the marker The measurement value at the marker is displayed on the screen If the measurement value does not match your expected value check that the DC outputs are ON DC appears if the DC outputs are OFF and that the modulation output is OFF For more information about other useful features for this measurement see Chapter 8 for the averaging and marker functions 10 Specify the reference frequency RF REF if you need more digits to display the measurement value Press Sense Range Use REF FREQ FOR SCALE and entry keys to enter the reference frequency Note For more detailed information about frequency transient measurements see i Frequency Transie
45. Carrier and Harmonic FM Deviation Levels Comparison Between Characteristics C N Ratio Obtained Under Three or Four Different Conditions S N Ratio Integral of Phase Noise vs Offset Frequency Characteristics Tuning Sensitivity Measurement With 7 11 Post tuning Drift Characteristics Two Measurement Points 7 12 Observation of FM Signal Waveform After Demodulation Figure 4 1 Basic Measurement Flow 4 2 Basic Measurement Procedures Basic Measurement Items Available in Tester Mode RF Power Measures the level of the carrier signal generated by the VCO Frequency Measures the frequency of the carrier signal generated by the VCO DC Power Current Measures the DC current provided to the VCO s power voltage Vec terminal FM Deviation Measures the VCO s FM deviation caused by the FM modulation signal C N Ratio Measures the ratio of the VCO s carrier power to the noise power at your specified offset frequency Advanced Measurement Items in Tester Mode See Advanced Measurement Items in Tester Mode for more details S N Ratio Is expressed as the ratio of the FM deviation under a specific condition and a measured residual FM o Tuning Sensitivity Is expressed as the ratio of difference in the carrier frequenciy to difference in tuning voltage level Those difference values are obtained through the measurement of the carrier frequencies f n 1 2 at specified tuning control
46. Contents 13 OPERATING PARAMETERS OPEP 00084 10 3 Print Setup Menu o 10 3 PRINT STANDARD PRIS Ce E e 10 3 COLOR PRIC So e 10 3 PRNT COLOR FIXED PRICFIXE PRICVARI o 10 3 DRI DPI 2 10 4 TOP MARGIN CTMARG 2 1 ee ee 10 4 LET MARGIN LMARG 2 1 ee 10 4 DEFAULT SETUP DFLT aaa aa aa 10 4 RETURN 2 2 e 10 4 Screen Menu Cl L 10 4 PRINT STANDARD PRINALL Vl a 10 4 COPY ABORT COPA o e 10 4 COPY TIME on OFE COPT OFF 1010811 Ca a a a a aa a a 10 4 NEXT PAGE NEXP 2 1 ee ee 10 4 PREV PAGE PREP 2 1 1 ee ee 10 5 E EBD css cs creo 10 5 ER 06 Ena Rea Mena 10 6 SAVE FILE e 6 ww e a a a a a a aa a a 10 6 RE SAVE FILE RESAVD lt Character String gt 10 6 RECALL FILE a a a a a aa aa 10 6 FILE UTILITIES a 10 7 STOR DEV STODDISK STODMENO e 10 7 Save File Menu o 10 7 STATE SAVDSTA lt Character String PPP 10 7 DATA ONLY SAVDDAT lt Character String gt 10 7 GRAPHICS SAVDTIFF ee ee 10 7 43524 STATE SAVDSTAC lt string gt 08 10 7 FILE UTILITIES o 10 7 STOR DEV STODDISK STODMENO e 10 7 Data Only Menu Ce 10 8 SAVE BINARY SAVDDAT lt Character String PP 10 8 SAVE ASCII SAVDASC 2 ee 10 8 DEFINE SAVE DATA PPP 10 8 STOR DEV STODDISK STODMEMO Vl A 10 8 Save Data Definition Menu CA 10
47. DATLIMU 8 17 10 22 date display format 10 18 DATE MM DD YY SETCDATE lt MM DD YY gt 10 18 DATE MODE MonDayYear MONDYEAR 10 19 DayMonYear DAYMYEAR 10 19 DE Contra 1 3 9 1 9 8 DC CONTROL 2 3 DE Power 1 3 9 1 9 10 DO POWER 2 3 DC POWER CURRENT MEAS CURR 7 3 DEFAULT COLORS DEFC 7 16 8 19 DEFAULT GAIN amp OFS DEFGO 7 13 8 15 defaults E 1 DEFAULT SETUP DFLT 10 4 DEFINE SAVE DATA 108 DEF TRACE DATA 8 15 AMKR DMKR ON 8 28 AMKR SWP PARAM DMKRPRM lt Value gt 8 28 AMODE MENU 8 26 AMODE OFF DMKR OFF 8 28 DEV CORR on OFF DEVCORR OFFIO ONI1 7 22 dimensions 11 11 directory 10 9 disk capacity D 1 disk drive non operating condition 11 10 disk drive operating condition 11 10 disk format D 1 Display 1 2 7 11 8 13 DISPLAY DATA DISP DATA DATA 7 12 display 2 4 2 7 11 9 DISPLAY DATA DISP DATA 8 17 display format display 2 4 2 7 D amp M SCALE COUPLE SCAC OFFIOIONI1 8 16 DONE 7 16 8 18 10 12 10 18 DOWNCONV ON off DNCONV OFF O ON 1 9 5 DPI DPI 10 4 E Edit 10 16 EDIT LIMIT 10 21 edit program 10 16 emc 11 11 END EDIT 10 18 ENTER 10 21 entry block 1 2 entry block 6 1 6 2 ERASE TITLE 7 16 8 18 10 11 error message Messages 1 DATA LOWER EXDATLIML 8 17 10 22 DATA UPPER EXDATLIMU 8 17 10 22 EXECUTE CTRLV CAL CTRLVCAL 9 9 EXECUTE DEV CAL DEVCAL 7
48. DEVIATION CARRIER NOISE Instrument Type VT VA Not Affected VT Frequency Band 10M 3G 10M 6 6G 10M 9 0G 10M 12 6G Not Affected Not Affected Nominal Frequency Range of Frequency Band Not Affected Not Affected Sense Range Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power On Default RF Attenuator 0 5 10 15 20 25 dB 10 dB 10 dB Frequency Resolution 1 kHz 64 kHz 1 kHz 1 kHz Noise Attenuator 0 10 20 30 40 dB 10 dB 10 dB FM Deviation Range 2 20 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz Bw Avg Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power On Default Averaging On Off Off Off Averaging Factor 1 to 999 or 1 2 4 40961 16 16 Noise Bandwidth 1 Hz to 1 MHz 1 Hz 1 Hz Offset Frequency 100 Hz to 10 MHz 10 kHz 10 kHz HPF Cutoff 50 Hz 300 Hz 300 Hz 300 Hz LPF Cutoff 3 kHz 15 kHz 20 kHz 3 kHz 3 kHz 2nd PLL Bandwidth 200 Hz 1 kHz 200 Hz 200 Hz 1 Varies depending on the measurement mode selected E 2 Allowable Values and Defaults for Key Functions Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power On Default Unit dBm dBV dBuV Watt Volt dBm dBm Peak Conversion On Off Off Off Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power On Default Display Data Memory Data amp Memory Data Data Data Hold Off Max Min Off Off Display Allocation All Instrument Half amp Half All BASIC BASIC Status
49. Hz V m The maximum value of the control voltage is too small Press Menu AUTO FREQ CONTROL MAX CTRL VOLTAGE and the entry keys to specify a maximum value larger than the current setting Be careful not to set a value that exceeds the DUT s maximum acceptable value The math measurement repeat count is too low Press Menu AUTO FREQ CONTROL MAX ITERATION and the entry keys to specify a value larger than the current setting An effect of the high value capacitor included with the DUT s power voltage Vec terminal Press Menu AUTO FREQ CONTROL CTRL DELAY and the entry keys to specify a value larger than the current setting 102 ANALYZER TYPE MISMATCH Indicates an invalid function was selected in the present measurement item Change the measurement item or select a different function 13 BACKUP DATA LOST Data checksum error on the battery backup memory has occurred Wait until the battery is re charged approximately 10 minutes after turning the 4352B on 160 Block data error The 4352B detected an invalid syntax in a block data element 168 Block data not allowed A legal block data element was encountered but was not allowed by the 4352B at this point in parsing 51 Calibration Aborted The FM deviation calibration in progress was aborted This was probably caused by changing the measurement parameters during the FM deviation calibration Perform the FM deviation calibration again Messages 3 Err
50. Input 4 1 0 Port O O 14 2ND IF Output Connector 13 KEYBOARD a O C C C c c c c O 2ND IF Input o Connector E 12 24 a 1 0 PORT em voeo gt 40MHz Output 19 EEE ED a o Connector 1 External Trigger 7 External Monitor nput Output 8 Parallel Interface 5 Inlet 9 24 BIT I O Interface 6 GPIB Interface 10 mini DIN Keyboard Connector CD000202 Figure 2 4 4352B Rear Panel 1 External Reference Input Connects an external frequency reference signal to the 4352B The 4352B is phase locked to the external frequency reference signal for improvement of frequency accuracy The external frequency reference function is automatically enabled when an external signal is input to this connector When the external frequency reference signal is no longer present the 4352B automatically switches back to the internal reference frequency 2 Internal Reference Output Connects to the frequency reference input terminal of an external instrument to phase lock it to the 4352B 3 External Program RUN CONT Input Externally triggers execution Of RUN or CONT of the Instrument BASIC program The trailing edge of a pulse more than 2
51. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed Warning Dangerous voltages capable of causing death are present in this b instrument Use extreme caution when handling testing and adjusting this instrument Typeface Conventions Bold Italics Computer HARDKEYS SOFTKEYS vi Boldface type is used when a term is defined For example icons are symbols Italic type is used for emphasis and for titles of manuals and other publications Italic type is also used for keyboard entries when a name or a variable must be typed in place of the words in italics For example copy filename means to type the word copy to type a space and then to type the name of a file such as filet Computer font is used for on screen prompts and messages Labeled keys on the instrument front panel are enclosed in Softkeys located to the right of the LCD are enclosed in Certification Agilent Technologies certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Agilent Technologies further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology to the extent allowed by the Institution s calibration facility or to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members Documentation Warranty The material contained in this document is provided as is and is subj
52. Level cc rr rr 6 dBm to 16 dBm typical Input Impedance o 50 Q nominal Connector ccccc ee ene ebb ee bbb tte b bees BNC female Internal reference output Frequency cc 10 MHz 100 Hxz typical Level ara tenes 2 5 dBm typical Output impedance ooo ooo 50 Q nominal Connector ccccc EE nee ened EE tenn EES BNC female External trigger input Level e TTL level Pulse width Tp cccc corro gt 2 us typical Polarity cce Positive negative selectable Connector ccccc EE nee ened EE tenn EES BNC female External program RUN CONT input Connector ooo EE nee ened EE tenn EES BNC female Level e TTL level Positive Trigger Signal Negative Trigger Slgnal Figure 11 3 Trigger Signal External monitor output Connector ccc aa D SUB 15 pin HD Display resolution nnana ttt teen neces 640 x 480 VGA LCD Size Type cc a 8 4 inch color LCD Resolution cccc ooo 640 x 480 Specifications 11 9 Operation Conditions Effective Display Area 0 00006 Parallel interface Interface cc rr Printer control language 160 mm x 115 mm 600 x 430 dots RE Centronics standard compliant HP PCL3 Printer Control Language Table 11 3 Supported Printers and Printing Modes Printer Monochrome Printing Fixed Color Printing Variable Color Printing HP DeskJet 340 J J HP DeskJet 505 HP DeskJet 560C HP DeskJet 850C HP DeskJet 1
53. MKRVCTRL 9 8 MKR LEFT RNG SEARSTRL 8 31 MKR RIGHT RNG SEARSTRR 8 31 MKR STOP MKRSTOP 8 24 MKR THRESHOLD MKRTHRE 8 31 MKR START MKRSTAR 8 24 m p 6 2 mm K RAM nn K BASIC 10 18 Mod 1 3 9 1 9 2 MOD AMPLITUDE MODAMP lt Value gt 9 2 MODIFY COLORS 7 16 8 19 MOD OUT 2 3 MOD OUT on OFF MODO OFF O ON 1 9 2 MORE 7 13 8 16 8 20 MSI INTERNAL 10 17 N NEXT FILES 10 10 NEXT PAGE NEXP 10 4 NEXT PEAK LEFT SEANPKL 8 30 NEXT PEAK RIGHT SEANPKR 8 30 NO 10 11 10 18 10 22 NOISE ATTEN NATT lt Value gt 7 6 8 6 NOISE BW CNBW lt Value gt 7 7 8 10 NOISE PLL AUTO wide CNPLL AUTO WIDE 7 8 8 10 nominal 11 1 NOMINAL FREQ NOMFREQ lt value gt 7 4 8 4 non operation condition 11 10 nonvolatile memory E 1 notations 2 5 2 8 NUMBER of POINTS POIN lt Value gt 8 24 numeric keypad 6 2 O OFFSET DATOVAL lt Value gt 7 13 8 15 OFFSET FREQ CNOFREQ lt Value gt 7 8 OPERATING PARAMETERS OPEP 10 3 operation condition 11 10 option 102 2 9 OUTPUT on OFF VOUT OFF O ONI 1 9 9 9 10 P parallel interface 2 10 Parallel interface 11 10 LIMIT LINE PARAMETER COLO PARAM 8 19 PARAMS ON off PARM OFFIO ON 1 7 14 PART SRCH on OFF PARS OFFIOION 1 8 31 pass fail 2 8 PASS FAIL 2 8 Pause 10 16 PEAK SEAM PEAK 8 30 PEAK SEANPK 8 30 PEAK CONV on OFF PKCONV OFF O ON 1 7 10 PEAK DEF AY PKDL
54. Not Affected All Instrument Title Up to 53 characters No Title No Title Data Math Data Data Mem Data Mem Data Mem Data Data Intensity Oto 100 Not Affected 83 Background Intensity O to 100 Not Affected 0 Data color Not Affected Yellow Memory color Not Affected Green Parameter color Not Affected Light blue Graticule color Not Affected Gray Warning color Not Affected Red Text color Not Affected White IBASIC text color Not Affected Green Pen 1 color Not Affected White Pen 2 color Not Affected Red Pen 3 color Not Affected Yellow Pen 4 color Not Affected Green Pen 5 color Not Affected Light blue Pen 6 color Not Affected Blue Allowable Values and Defaults for Key Functions E 3 Mens Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default Auto Frequency On Off Off Off Control Target Frequency 10 MHz to 3 GHz 10 MHz 10 MHz Tolerance 2 kHz to 2 MHz 100 kHz 100 kHz Sensitivity 1 GHz V to 100 Hz V and 100 Hz V to 1 10 MHz V 10 MHz V GHz V Min Control Voltage 0 to 20 V 15 to 35 V with option 001 OV OV Max Control Voltage Oto 20 V 15 to 35 V with option 001 20 V 20 V Control Delay 10 msec to 1 sec 20 msec 20 msec Max Iteration 1 to 999 10 10 Cable Loss On Off Off Off Compensation Loss Specification 0 to 20 dB GHz 0 dB GHz 0 dB GHz Loss at DC 20 dB to 20 dB 0 dB 0 dB E 4 Allowable Values
55. Order 4 Set RF ATT 5 dB Less Press Sense Range RF ATTN and the entry keys to set a value 5 dB lower than the current setting 42 Set RF ATT 5 dB More Press Sense Range RF ATTN and the entry keys to set a value 5 dB higher than the current setting 221 Settings conflict A legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed due to the current device state See IEEE 488 2 6 4 5 3 and 11 5 1 1 5 150 String data error This error as well as errors 151 and 158 are generated when analyzing the syntax of a string data element This error message might be displayed if the 4352B detects an unknown problem 158 String data not allowed A string data element was encountered but was not allowed by the 4352B at this point in parsing 130 Suffix error This error as well as errors 131 through 139 are generated when parsing a suffix This error message might be displayed if the 4352B detects an unknown problem 138 Suffix not allowed A suffix was encountered after a numeric element that does not allow suffixes 134 Suffix too long The suffix contained more than 12 characters see IEEE 488 2 7 7 3 4 102 Syntax error An unrecognized command or data type was encountered For example a string was received when the 4352B was not expecting to receive a string 310 System error Some error termed system error by the 4352B has occurred 59 Target Freq Out Of
56. PASS FAIL Parameters Figure 2 3 LCD Display Analyzer Mode 1 Measurement Item Displays the measurement item selected by Meas 2 DIV REF Displays the value per division DIV on the trace along the Y axis and the value REF pointed to by the small triangle shown on the left hand side of the scale 3 Marker Reading Displays the marker reading in units appropriate to the current measurement The value on top represents the Y coordinate reading value The value below the Y coordinate reading value represents the X coordinate reading value Front and Rear Panel 2 7 4 Softkey Labels Displays the menu labels that define the function of the softkeys close to the right of the label 5 PASS FAIL Displays the limit test result pass fail using limit lines 6 Carrier Frequency Displays the carrier frequency This frequency is displayed only when phase noise is selected as the measurement item 7 Measurement Parameters The measurement conditions for the measurement item are displayed 8 Status Notations Displays the current status of various functions The following notations are used DwC The 43521A Downconverter Unit is connected and RE LO DOWNCONV ON off is set to ON Measurement condition change Measurement data in doubt under the current conditions DCI DC power and control voltages are not output ExR Displayed when the external reference signal is being input to the external reference input
57. POWER VOLTAGE VPOW lt Value gt Specifies the DC power voltage level in V OUTPUT on OFF VOUT OFF O ON 1 Turns the DC power voltage ON or OFF Note When OUTPUT ON off is selected the DC control voltage is automatically i turned ON Y 9 10 Control Block 10 Instrument State Block This chapter describes all the functions available that are not related to measurements These functions include those used for setting the controller mode GPIB addresses real time clock Instrument BASIC beeper printer outputs and 4352B status It also describes functions used for saving measurement data onto disks and resetting the 4352B to defaults The following list describes the function of each key Ga Save Recall Ger os fra Prints the screen image and displays operating parameters Saves the 4352B settings and or measurement data to and recalls them from the internal RAM disk memory or the floppy disk It also can initialize the disk Controls Instrument BASIC Changes the internal memory area Adjusts the time on the internal real time clock This clock is used to print the current time and date at the upper section of hard copies Turns the beeper ON or OFF Specifies limit lines Displays the service menu See the Service Manual for details Selects the GPIB mode and specifies addresses Resets the 4352B to the defaults preset state In the following pages those keys with Tester Mode
58. Partial integration 4 41 7 11 Post tuning Drift Characteristics oa aoa e e a a a e 4 42 7 12 Observation of FM Signal Waveform After Demodulation 4 44 Measurement Technique 1 ee ee 4 45 Setting the Automatic Frequency Control Function 2 2 4 45 Setting Cable Loss Compensation Function 00 4 48 Basic Measurements Using the 43521A Introduction 2 a a a a a 5 1 Measurement Items Available in Tester Mode 4 2 5 1 Measurement Items Available in Analyzer Mode 5 1 1 Preparations for Measurements 1 ee ee ee 5 2 1 1 Connecting Devices 2 1 k a a a 5 2 1 2 Power ON aoaaa 5 5 1 3 Connecting a DUT aa aa a a a 5 5 14 Initial Setup o aaa 5 7 Verifying GPIB Controller Mode PP 5 7 Setting the Trigger Mode oaa a a a a a 5 7 1 5 Setting the Downconverter Unit a a e a a a a 5 8 1 6 Setting the External Signal Source and Frequency Band o 5 8 Setting the GPIB Address 5 8 Setting the External Signal Source Automatic Setting Function 5 8 Setting the Type of the External Signal Source and the Frequency Change Wait Time 6 a 5 8 Setting the Maximum Frequency of the External Signal Source 5 9 Setting the Frequency Band o 5 9 Setting NOMINAL FREQ o 5 10 1 7 Specifying DC Power Voltage en os 5 10 1 8 Specifying DC Control Voltage and Wait Time 2 2 5 10 1
59. RANGE FM Deviation Range Menu FM DEV RNG 200kHz DEVRNG DV200KHZ FM DEV RNG 20kHz DEVRNG DV20KHZ Contents 4 5 28 5 29 5 32 5 35 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 7 2 7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 7 4 7 4 7 5 7 5 7 5 7 5 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 FM DEV RNG 2kHz DEVRNG DV2KHZ 2 2 7 6 Bw Avg e 4 Em Avg Menu Ce a a e a a ea a a 7 7 AVERAGING RESTART AVERREST en 7 7 AVERAGING on OFF AVEROFFIOJON 1 0 7 7 AVERAGING FACTOR AVERFACT lt Value gt 04 7 7 NOISE BW CNBW lt Value gt 2 o 7 7 OFFSET FREQ CNOFREQ lt Value gt 2 2 4 7 8 NOISE PLL AUTO wide CNPLL AUTOIWIDE 2 2 7 8 FM DETECTION a 7 8 FM Deviation Detection Band Menu Cl ee 7 8 HP FILTER 50Hz DTHPF FCDOHZ a 80484 7 8 300Hz DTHPF FC300HZ e 7 8 LP FILTER 3kHz DTLPF FC3KHZ o 7 8 15kHz DTLPF FC15KHZ e 7 8 20kHz DTLPF FCQOKEZ e 7 9 Format o e a a a A 7 10 Format Menu LO POWER UNIT dBm POWUNIT DBM PPP 7 10 dBV POWUNIT DBV 2 ee a 7 10 dBuV POWUNITDBUV 2 2 2 eee 7 10 Watt POWUNITW clic 7 10 Volt POWUNITV e 7 10 PEAK CONV on OFF PKCONV OFF 1010811 e 7 10 Display o e a a a A 7 11 Display Menu Cera ee a a eee fd DISPLAY DATA DISP DATA LL 7 12 MEMORY DISP M
60. SS gt 10 18 time stamp 10 4 time stamp 10 2 TINT TINT lt Value gt 7 18 8 20 tint 7 18 TITLE TITL lt Character String gt 8 18 title 2 6 2 8 TITLE TITL lt Character String gt 7 14 TOLERANCE AFCTOL lt Value gt 7 20 8 25 TOP MARGIN TMARG 10 4 TRACKING AMKR DMKR TRAC 8 28 Trigger 1 3 9 1 TRIGGER CONTINUGUS CONT 9 6 TRIGGER HOLD HOLD 9 6 trigger hold display Hld 2 5 2 8 trigger input 2 10 TRIGGER SINGLE SING 9 6 TRIG PLRIY POS neg TRGP POS NEG 9 7 TRIG SRC EXTERNAL TRGS EXT 9 7 TRIG SRC FREE RUN 9 6 TRIGGER FREE RUN TRGS INT 9 7 TRIG SRC GPIB TRGS BUS 9 7 TRIG SRC MANUAL TRGS MAN 9 7 typical 11 1 Index 7 U UPPER LIMIT 10 21 Vv VALUE TRGS VAL 9 7 VCO ANALY VA 7 3 VGA 11 9 VIDEO BW VBW lt Value gt 8 9 Index 8 video output terminal 2 10 video signal 2 10 POWER UNIT Volt POWUNIT V 7 10 W warm up time 11 1 warm up time 11 10 WARNING COLO WARN 7 17 8 20 weight 11 11 REGIONAL SALES AND SUPPORT OFFICES For more information about Agilent Technologies test and measurement products applications services and for a current sales office listing visit our web site http www agilent com find tmdir You can also contact one of the following centers and ask for a test and measurement sales representative 11 29 99 United States fax 61 3 9272 0749 Agilent Technologies tel 0 800 7
61. This address code must be different for each instrument on the bus These addresses are not affected by Preset key or by turning the instrument off GPIB Function Specification B 5 Technical Information This appendix provides additional information listed below for measurement items described in Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 1 C N ratio measurement tester mode and phase noise vs offset frequency characteristics measurement analyzer mode 1 1 Effect of noise of the VCO control voltage source on VCO phase noise 1 2 Evaluating estimating errors in phase noise characteristics measurement 1 3 Measured values when there is a spurious component 2 Frequency transient measurement 2 1 Mechanism to determine the measurement frequency band the frequency span and the frequency resolution 2 2 Incorrect measurement during early stages of the transient when high resolution is selected 2 3 Setting the reference frequency REF FREQ FOR SCALE 2 4 Setting the measurement trigger 2 5 Setting divider data of PLL and sending the load signal 2 6 IBASIC sample program of the frequency transient measurement 3 Notes on measurement 3 1 Eliminating components that affect measurements Reading the information in this appendix will help you make accurate measurements 1 C N ratio measurement tester mode and phase noise vs offset frequency characteristics measurement analyzer mode 1 1 Effect of noise of the VCO control volta
62. Value Trigger mode ON 40 OUTPUT QHp4352 TRGVAL Ft Set Trigger frequency to Ft 50 OUTPUT Hp4352 TRGP POS Select Positive Trigger Polarity 60 OUTPUT Hp4352 OUT1L Set OUTPUT 1 to LOW Insert program to send PLL divider data 1 80 OUTPUT Hp4352 OUT1H Set Divider Data 1 to PLL OUTPUT1 to High 90 OUTPUT Hp4352 OUT1L Set OUTPUT 1 to LOW again 100 OUTPUT Hp4352 SING Trigger Wait State Insert program to send PLL divider data 2 120 OUTPUT Hp4352 OUT1H Set Divider Data 2 to PLL OUTPUT1 to High 130 END CDOOCOS Figure C 6 Program flow of the value trigger function Figure C 7 shows the relationship between the measurement trigger and the transient when using the value trigger function Frequency with Divider Data 2 Trigger Frequency Ft Frequency with Divider Data 1 Send Divider Data 2 to PLL Measurement Trigger to 4352S CDOOCO6 Figure C 7 Measurement trigger and transient when using the value trigger function Note In the value trigger function you cannot specify fr outside the range between i the minimum and maximum frequencies Y Notice that if you measure a DUT in the heterodyne mode that has frequency changes exceeding the above range an unexpected trigger may be generated because the frequency is folded over Technical Information C 13 Technical Information 2 5 Sending divider data to a serial input PLL This section describes a program to sent the divider data di
63. Value gt 10 24 RETURN 2 1 1 fe a a a a 10 24 e 10 25 Contents 17 11 Specifications Measurement Items Tester Mode e RF Power 2 A Frequency cccccll a a DC Current Consumption a a a a e a e a e a a FM Deviation 2 aa A C N Ratio Measurement Items Analyzer Mode a RF Power Characteristics against DC Control Voltage 2 20 Frequency Tuning Sensitivity Characteristics against DC Control Voltage Phase Noise Characteristics against Offset Frequency Frequency Transient o a a a a a A Spectrum oaoa a a A DO Signal oaa a VCO Power Voltage Output 2 VCO Control Voltage Dutra Modulation Signal Output o a a RF Input aaa a Instrument BASIC Related Specifications a a a a a a e General Characteristics a a a a a a I O Characteristics a a a a a a Operation Conditions Non operation Conditions Ce Others 2 2 Ce A Manual Changes Introduction a a a o Cl ee Manual Changes Ce A Serial Number cccclll Change l 2 A Changes of softkeys under the key common to tester mode and analyzer mode 1 Deletion 2 6 ee A Changes of softkeys under the key only for analyzer mode Addie Renaming 2 6 a Deletion 2 6 ee A Changes of softkeys under the key only for analyzer mode Deletion 2 6 ee A Changes of softkeys under the key only for analyze
64. Value gt 9 4 SIGNAL SEARCH SIGSRCH 7 4 8 4 SLOPE SLOPE lt Value gt 7 21 8 33 softkey menu 2 2 SPACE 7 16 8 18 10 11 SPAN SPAN lt Value gt 8 23 specifications 11 1 SPECTRUM MEAS SPEC 8 3 SRCH TRACK on OFF TRACK OFF O ON 1 8 29 START STAR lt Value gt 8 23 START PARAM 10 21 state 10 7 STATE D 2 STATE SAVDSTA lt Character String gt 10 7 status notations 2 5 2 8 Step 10 16 step key 6 2 Stop 10 16 STOP STOP lt Value gt 8 23 STOP PARAM 10 21 storage device 10 10 storage devices D 1 STOR DEVE STODDISK STODMEMO 10 10 STOR DEV STODDISK STODMEMO 10 7 10 8 10 12 SUB MKR 8 26 8 30 8 31 SUB MKR 1 SMKR1 OFF O 0N 1 8 27 SUB MKR 2 SMKR2 OFF O 0N 1 8 27 SUB MKR 3 SMKR3 OFF O 0N 1 8 27 SUB MKR 4 SMKR4 OFFIO ON 1 8 27 Svc 2 5 2 8 SWEEP 8 22 SWEEP TIME SWET lt Value gt 8 24 rem 1 3 SYSTEM CONTROLLER 10 23 system controller B 3 B 5 T talker B 2 TARGET AFCTARG lt Value gt 7 20 8 25 TARGET SEAM TARG 8 29 TARGET SEATARG lt Value gt 8 30 TARGET FREQ TRTARG lt value gt 8 6 TARGET POSITION TRIPOS lt value gt 8 8 temperature 11 10 temperature gt 11 10 terminator key 6 2 test set I O interface 2 10 TEXT MARKER COLO TEXT 7 17 8 20 THRESHOLD on OFF PKTHRE OFFIOIONI1 8 31 THRESHOLD VALUE PKTHVAL lt Value gt 8 31 TIME HH MM SS SETCTIME lt HH MM
65. a a a a a a a 8 10 NOISE BW CNBW Value o Cora a a a a a aa 8 10 NOISE PLL AUTO wide CNPLL AUTO WIDE Cora a a a a a aa 8 10 SENS APERTURE SENSAPER lt Value gt Loe ee ee ee 8 10 Definition of Tuning Sensitivity a and 1 Specifying Aperture Ce 8 10 Format era Cera 812 Format Menu Ce e ee ee 812 POWER UNIT dBm POWUNIT DBM AN 8 12 dBY POWUNIT DBV 2 0 02 eee 8 12 dBuV POWUNITDBUV 2 2 0 2 0 02222 2G 8 12 Watt POWUNITW 2 2 8 12 Volt POWUNITV 2 L 8 12 mena I I I II 8 15 AUTO SCALE AUTO oaoa aa ee 8 15 SCALE REFERENCE 2 ee ee 85 DEF TRACE DATA o 85 DATA HOLD DHOLD OFF IMAX IMIN o 85 DATA MATH MATH DATA DPLM DMNM DDVM 2 8 15 MORE 2 2 A 8 16 Scale Menu ww we a 8 16 AUTO SCALE Loe ee a 8 16 SCALE DIV SCAL eValue gt o 8 16 REFERENCE POSITION REFP lt Value gt cc 8 16 REFERENCE VALUE REFV lt Value gt 0 8 16 MKR REFERENCE MKRREF 2 ee ee ee ee ee 8 16 SCALE FOR DATA SCAF DATAIMEMO 0 8 16 D amp M SCALE COUPLE SCAC OFFIOJONI1 2 2 2 222 8 16 RETURN 2 2 A 8 16 Define Trace Menu a 8 17 DISPLAY DATA DISP DATA o 8 17 Contents 8 MEMORY DISP MEMO lclcccccl ee 8 17 DATA and MEMORY DISP DATM o 8 17 DATA MEMORY DATMEM ccccllcl a 8 17 DATA LIMIT MENU a 8 17 RETURN 2 0 kk e
66. a value larger than the current setting 49 RF Freq Out Of Range The DUT s output frequency is not within the measurement range of the 4352B The measurement range is set to 10 MHz to 3 GHz when the 4352B is used alone or set to the selected frequency band when used with 43521A Downconverter Unit Verify the DUT s output frequency 50 Invalid Dev Cal The correction coefficient of the FM deviation calibration is not proper Adjustment or repair is necessary Contact our service office or the company from which you purchased the 4352B 51 Calibration Aborted The FM deviation calibration in progress was aborted This is probably caused by changing the measurement parameters during the FM deviation calibration Perform the FM deviation calibration again 52 DC Output On Required in AFC The automatic frequency control function was set on however power or control voltage is not being applied to the DUT Verify that the power control voltages output is set to ON on the LCD information the measurement setting parameter display or the status notations If the power control voltage output is turned OFF press DC Power or DC Control and OUTPUT ON off 53 FM Deviation Range Overload The DUT s FM deviation is out of the measurement range Press Sense Range FM DEV RANGE and select a measurement range larger than the current setting FM deviation over 200 kHz cannot be measured Messages 18 Error Messages Num
67. and Defaults for Key Functions Control Block Mod Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default Modulation Output On Off Off Off Modulation Amplitude 0 to 1 Vrms O Vims O Vims 10 Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default External Signal Auto Man Not Affected Not Affected Generator Control Waiting for LO Otols Not Affected Not Affected Switching SG Type 1 2 3 4 Not Affected Not Affected SG Max Freq 3 KHz to 20 GHz Not Affected Not Affected Downconverter On Off Not Affected Not Affected Trigger Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default Sweep type Hold Single Continuos Continuous Continuous Trigger Source Free run External Manual GPIB Free run Free run Dc Control Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default Control Voltage On Off Off Off Output Control Voltage 0 to Max Control Voltage OV OV Min Control Voltage 0 to 20 V 15 to 35 V with option 001 OV OV Max Control Voltage 0 to 20 V 15 to 35 V with option 001 20 V 20 V Delay to Voltage 10 msec to 1 sec 20 msec 20 msec Change Allowable Values and Defaults for Key Functions E 5 DC Power Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default Power Voltage Output On Off Off Off Power Voltage Oto 16 V OV OV E 6 Allowable Values and Defaults for Key F
68. between Pb recorded in the previous section and Pa is 2 dB or less Fault Diagnosis for the 4352S Measurement System F 5 Error Message This section lists the error messages that are displayed on the 4352B display or transmitted by the instrument over GPIB Each error message is accompanied by an explanation and suggestions are provided to help in solving the problem Where applicable references are provided to the related chapter of the appropriate manual When displayed error messages are preceded with the word CAUTION That part of the error message has been omitted here for the sake or brevity Some messages without the CAUTION are for information only and do not indicate an error condition The messages are listed first in alphabetical order because the displayed messages do not contain the message number The messages are then listed in numerical order to make them easier to find if they are read over the GPIB In addition to error messages The 4352B s status is indicated by status notations in the left margin of the display Examples are Cor and P Sometimes these appear together with error messages A complete listing of status notations and their meanings is provided in Chapter 2 Errors with a negative number are errors that occurred when the 4352B was being controlled with GPIB commands over the GPIB Messages 1 Error Messages Alphabetical Order Error Messages in Alphabetical Order 45 1s
69. control voltage level specified with CTRL VOLTAGE is ignored if it is beyond the level specified with this softkey In this case the DC control voltage level is automatically set at the maximum level CTRL DELAY CTRLDLY lt Value gt Specifies a wait time for the 4352B that corresponds to the response time of the device The 4352B remains in the wait state until the RF output is stabilized after the DC control voltage is changed Caution You cannot use CIRL DELAY to specify a time interval below 10 ms CTRLV CAL Option 001 only Displays the DC Control Voltage Calibration menu used for calibrating DC control voltage OUTPUT on OFF VOUT OFF O ON 1 Turns the DC control voltage ON or OFF Note When BUTPUT ON off is selected the DC power voltage is also turned ON Y DC Control Voltage Calibration Menu Option 001 only EXECUTE CTRLV CAL CTRLVCAL Performs calibrating DC control voltage calibration The calibration is applied only to the expanded DC control voltage range with the option 001 You should perform the calibration each time the instrument is powered for it loses effect after powering OFF CTRLV CORR on OFF CTRLVCORR OFF 0 ON 1 Enables or disables the compensation obtained from the DC control voltage calibration RETURN Returns to the previous menu Control Block 9 9 Dc Power POWER VOLTAGE OUTPUT on OFF Figure 9 6 Softkey Menus Accessed from Key DC Power Menu
70. dB MATH 38 dB RBH 106 Hz YBH 166 Hz SHP 2 164 sec ATH CENTER 1 MHz LO 2 5797 GHz SPAN 168 kHz Figure 5 12 Sample Measurement Screen Partial Integration of Phase Noise vs Offset Frequency Characteristics Measurement DUT VCO 5 30 Basic Measurements Using the 43521A Note Alternatively you can set the position of the vertical line by moving the marker to the desired frequency with the rotary knob and pressing Y MKR LEFT RNG or MKR RIGHT RNG Note For information on the auto frequency control function the averaging i function the marker function and the noise attenuator function see Y Chapter 8 Note In this measurement the sweep time can not be specified Only the query is available When the automatic frequency control function is ON the carrier frequency is automatically adjusted before the sweep The time required for the adjustment is not included in the sweep time If the external signal source needs to be set again the setting is first made and after the frequency change time elapses the sweep starts This time is not included in the sweep time also Note You can set the DC control voltage level for phase noise or spectrum measurement using the auto frequency control function For details see Setting the Automatic Frequency Control Function in Chapter 4 in Chapter 4 Measurement Technique Basic Measurements Using the 43521A 5 31 3 5 Frequency Transient Measurement DUT
71. disk drive or RAM disk memory as the storage device When DISK is displayed the floppy disk is selected as the storage device When MEMORY is displayed the RAM disk memory is selected as the storage device Note This setting does not change if the instrument is turned off or even if Preset is i pressed Y RETURN Returns to the previous menu File Select Menu This menu displays the names of files that can be saved recalled or deleted You need to press the softkey that corresponds to the desired file to save recall or delete that file PREV FILES Displays the previous page of the file name list displayed in softkey labels NEXT FILES Displays the next page of the file name list displayed in softkey labels STOR DEV STODDISK STODMEMO Selects the floppy disk drive or RAM disk memory as the storage device When DISK is displayed the floppy disk is selected as the storage device When MEMORY is displayed the RAM disk memory is selected as the storage device 10 10 Instrument State Block Save Recall Note This setting does not change if the instrument is turned off or even if Preset is i pressed Y Initialize YES NO Menu INITIALIZE DISK YES Initializes the floppy disk or RAM disk memory When DISK is displayed in the softkey the floppy disk is initialized When MEMORY is displayed in the softkey the RAM disk memory is initialized Note Note that the analyzer can inita
72. edition is printed Minor corrections and updates that are incorporated at reprint do not cause the date to change The manual part number changes when extensive technical changes are incorporated June 1997 coccion First Edition part number 04352 90040 September 1998 icciiiiii anaana aaaea Second Edition part number 04352 90050 February 1999 ccciicii corr Third Edition part number 04352 90060 July 1999 ecc Fourth Edition part number 04352 90070 December 1999 cccciici a Fifth Edition part number 04352 90070 January 2001 0 ci Sixth Edition part number 04352 90070 December 2001 00 00 0 0 cece cece eens Seventh Edition part number 04352 90080 July 2003 nananana cr Eighth Edition part number 04352 90090 Safety Summary The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this instrument Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific WARNINGS elsewhere in this manual may impair the protection provided by the equipment In addition it violates safety standards of design manufacture and intended use of the instrument The Agilent Technologies assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements Note 4352B comply with INSTALLATION CATEGORY II and POLLUTION DEGREE 2 i in IEC1010 1 4352B are INDOOR USE product Y Note LEDs in 4352B are Class 1 in accordance with IEC825 1 i CLASS 1 L
73. factor for the phase noise measurement Press AVERAGING FACTOR Use the numeric entry keys to enter the averaging factor Press AVERAGING on OFF to toggle it AVERAGING ON off 8 Adjust the scale for measurement trace Press Display Press AUTO SCALE The scale is adjusted automatically 9 Set the noise integration measurement Press Menu and MARKER Press INTG NOISE on OFF to toggle it INTG NOISE ON off Basic Measurement Procedures 4 39 As shown in Figure 4 10 the measurement result is displayed on the screen and at the lower left of the screen the result of the noise integration is displayed Intg Noise xxxx dBc This value is the integral of the entire span trace Note The minimum measurable value in a phase noise measurement is restricted i by the phase noise characteristics and spurious characteristics of the external Y signal source you use Note When the CAUTION 2nd PLL Unlocked appears on the LCD screen follow i the steps below to alter the bandwidth of the 2nd PLL inside the 4352B to Y WIDE a Press Bw Avg b Press NOISE PLL AUTO wide to toggle it NOISE PLL auto WIDE For the difference between AUTO and WIDE see the Bw Avg section in Chapter 7 phase Noise 5 dBf REF 96 dBc 119 75 dBc 1 05 MHZ CARR 842 571 MHz amp THB dB NATH 16 dB RBH 166 Hz YBH 1660 Hz SHP 2 164 se ENTER 1 MHz LO 818 7 MHz SPAN 166 kH op Figure 4 10
74. frequency Enter the frequency from which you want to start the integration using the numeric entry keys Example To specify 975 kHz press 9 7 5 and k m The display changes to MARKER 975 kHz 3 Setting the partial integration start frequency Press MKR LEFT RNG A vertical line appears in the left half of the screen and the measured noise value at 975 kHz is displayed at the upper right of the screen At this time the noise integration value displayed at the lower left of the screen is the integral of the range to the right of the vertical line 4 Entering the partial integration stop frequency Enter the frequency at which you want to stop the integration using the numeric entry keys Example To specify 1 025 MHz press 1 Q 2 5 and M z The display changes to MARKER 1 025 MHz 5 Setting the partial integration stop frequency Press MKR RIGHT RNG A vertical line appears in the right half of the screen The measured noise value at 1 025 MHz is displayed at the upper right of the screen 6 Reading the value of the partial integration The measurement result as shown in Figure 5 12 is displayed and the lower left of the screen shows the result of the partial noise integration for the frequency range between 975 kHz and 1 025 MHz like Intg Noise 75 515 dBc Duc Phase Noise 5 dBf REF 72 dBc 102 98 dBc 1 25 MHZ 75 615 dBc Intg Moise O E SS SO SS E SE
75. frequency transient measurement is generated When you switch f from fr to fy fr lt fa be sure to set fr at a level slightly higher than that of fz This allows a measurement to be initiated immediately after a frequency change request has been sent to the DUT Follow the steps below 1 Turn ON the value trigger function Press Trigger VALUE 2 Specify the frequency fr to generate the trigger for the frequency transient measurement Use the numeric keys and x1 to specify fr 3 Specify the direction of change for the PLL output frequency Press TRIG PLRIY POS neg Specify the timing to actually generate a trigger for the frequency transient measurement when PLL output frequency f increases and reaches fr TRIG PLRTY POS neg or when it decreases and reaches fr TRIG PLRIY pos NEG C 12 Technical Information Technical Information 4 Generate a measurement trigger The 4352B is in the trigger wait state while measuring the PLL output frequency f until the frequency fr specified in step 2 is reached 5 Send a load signal to the PLL The PLL output frequency is changed and when it reaches your specified frequency fr a frequency transient measurement starts immediately Figure C 6 shows the program flow using the value trigger function Sample Program for Measuring PLL Lock Up Time with Value Trigger Function 10 ASSIGN Hp4352 TO 800 20 OUTPUT Hp4352 HOLD Trigger HOLD 30 OUTPUT Hp4352 TRGS VAL Set
76. generator maintains the specified frequency Thus the 4352B automatic control function does not operate the external signal generator during the measurement Note that this is not the case for the frequency tuning sensitivity measurements in the analyzer mode Be sure to take this into consideration for measurements that have long measurement time conditions For example the specified averaging factor might be a problem due to the DC power control voltage fluctuations LO SWICH TIME LOSWT lt Value gt Specifies the time that the 4352B waits to elapse for the external signal generator to stabilize at a specific frequency This softkey can be used when LO CONTROL AUTO man is selected The duration of the wait time varies depending on the external signal generator SG TYPE SGTYPE lt Value gt Specifies the external signal generator type with a number from 1 to 4 Type No External Signal Generator 1 8643A 8644B 8664A 8665A 8665B 2 8642 A B 8656B 8657B 8662A 8663A 3 8648B C ES241A ES244A ES251A E8254A 4 See the description on the next page Table 9 1 lists GPIB commands used for external signal generators Table 9 1 GPIB Commands Used to Set Up the External Signal Generators Type No Frequency Amplitude RF Output ON OFF Reset 1 FREQ XXXMHz AMPL XXXDBM AMPL STAT ON RST 2 FR XXXMZ AP XXX DM R3 ON R2 OFF CLEAR 7XX 3 FREQ CW XXXMHZ POW AMPL XXXDBM OUTP STAT ON RST Select 4
77. have long measurement time conditions For example the specified averaging factor might be a problem due to the DC power control voltage fluctuations Basic Measurement Procedures 4 47 Setting Cable Loss Compensation Function The 4352B can compensate for he RF power level loss of the cable connecting the DUT output terminal and the 4352B RF IN connector when measuring RF power The following conditions must be set in the 4352B to use the cable loss compensation function m Frequency Characteristics of the Cable Level Loss Slope of curve loss frequency in dB GHz a Level Loss at DC 0 Hz To enter these conditions perform the following steps 1 2 3 4 5 Press Menu Press SLOPE and entry keys to enter the frequency characteristics of the level loss Press LOSS and entry keys to enter the level loss at DC 0 Hz Press COMPEN on OFF to toggle it COMPEN ON off Press Return See Cable Loss Compensation Menu in Chapter 7 for more information on cable loss compensation 4 48 Basic Measurement Procedures Basic Measurements Using the 43521A Introduction This chapter introduces basic VCO and PLL measurement procedures at higher frequencies available with the system in which the 43521A Downconverter Unit is combined with the 4352B and the external signal source The overall flow of the description is almost the same as that of Chapter 4 previous chapter This instrument offers 2 measurement
78. is the integral of the entire trace 950 kHz to 1050 kHz Note The minimum measurable value in a phase noise measurement is restricted i by the phase noise characteristics and spurious characteristics of the external Y signal source you use Note When the CAUTION 2nd PLL Unlocked message appears on the LCD screen i follow the steps below to alter the bandwidth of the 2nd PLL inside the 4352B Y to WIDE 1 Press Bw Avg 2 Press NOISE PLL AUTO wide to toggle it NOISE PLL auto WIDE Duc Phase Noise 5 dBf REF 72 dBc 183 45 dBc 1 MHz ExR RING dB NATN 35 dB RE 199 He VEN 1889 Hz SUP 2 164 sec CENTER 1 MHz LO 2 5787 GHz SPAN 108 kHz Figure 5 11 Sample Measurement Screen Integral of Phase Noise vs Offset Frequency Characteristics Measurement DUT VCO Partial Integration of the Phase Noise vs Offset Frequency Characteristics Measurement The result of the noise integration shown in Figure 5 11 Intg Noise 72 392 dBc is the integral of the entire trace 950 kHz to 1050 kHz Next using the partial integration function you integrate the trace range between 975 kHz and 1025 kHz Basic Measurements Using the 43521A 5 29 1 Setting the partial integration to ON Press Menu MKR SEARCH and SEARCH RANGE Press PART SRCH on OFF to toggle it PART SRCH ON off Small triangles are displayed at the lower left and lower right of the screen 2 Entering the partial integration start
79. kHz is too narrow to cover the high phase noise of the device When NOISE PLL auto WIDE is selected the bandwidth of the built in 2nd PLL is constantly set at 1 kHz regardless of the variations in the offset frequency Therefore the 4352B can make the proper measurement for a device with high phase noise even when the offset frequency is below 5 kHz Note however that the measurement data at an offset frequency below 5 kHz is only used as reference data if the noise bandwidth is set to WIDE SENS APERTURE SENSAPER lt Value gt Specifies the aperture for tuning sensitivity measurements Definition of Tuning Sensitivity and Specifying Aperture The tuning sensitivity is a differential curve of the F V output carrier frequency vs DC control voltage characteristic The 4352B determines tuning sensitivity based on the slope of the frequency curve It uses frequency data to calculate frequency deviation Af at the center of the specified DC control voltage aperture Av From this deviation it obtains the approximate value of a rate of change in frequency as a function of DC control voltage 8 10 Measurement Block Analyzer Mode Analyzer Mode This approximate value represents tuning sensitivity on the assumption that the rate of change in frequency within the range of Av is a linear function If the rate of change in frequency is not quite linear changing DC control voltage steps can change the tuning sensitivity In t
80. long measurement time conditions For example the specified averaging factor might have problems due to the DC power control voltage fluctuation 8 24 Measurement Block Analyzer Mode Analyzer Mode AFC on OFF AFC OFF O 0N 1 Turns the automatic frequency control function ON or OFF TARGET AFCTARG lt Value gt Specifies the target frequency in Hz TOLERANCE AFCTOL lt Value gt Specifies the tolerance limits between the target frequency and the actual measured frequency in Hz SENSITIVIY AFCSENS lt Value gt Specifies the approximate tuning sensitivity of the DUT in Hz V AFC MAX CTRL VOLT AFCMAXV lt Value gt AFC MIN CTRL VOLT AFCMINV lt Value gt These two softkeys specify the maximum and minimum DC control voltage levels for use with the automatic frequency control function Note that the value specified with MAX CTRL VOLTAGE MIN CTRL VOLTAGE available under DC Control has priority over the value specified with AFC MIN CTRL VOLT MAX ITERATION AFCITER lt Value gt Maximum iteration for the DC control voltage setting loop cycles The measurement and calculation is repeated attempting to determine the optimum control voltage level for the target frequency until the number of this loop cycles reaches the value specified here A value from 1 to 999 can be entered RETURN Returns to the previous menu Measurement Block Analyzer Mode 8 25 Analyzer Mode MARKER MENU MARKE
81. math function is turned ON MEMORY DISP MEMO Displays the memory data When MEMORY is pressed and no data is stored in the memory a warning message is displayed DATA and MEMORY DISP DATM Displays both the measurement data and memory data when the data math function is turned OFF The calculation result is displayed instead of the measurement data when the data math function is turned ON DATA MEMORY DATMEM Stores the current measurement data into the memory The stored data will be used for calculation This memory data becomes invalid when you change the measurement items In this case only the measurement data is displayed DATA HOLD DHOLD OFF MAX MIN The data hold function is used to keep the maximum or minimum value obtained in the continuous measurement mode displayed on the screen The following three softkeys are displayed HOLD OFF Data hold function OFF MAX Holds the maximum value obtained during measurements MIN Holds the minimum value obtained during measurements 7 12 Measurement Block Tester Mode Tester Mode DATA MATH MATH DATA DPLM DMNM DDVM Displays the following softkeys used to select the data math type and also displays the gain amp offset definition keys The selected type appears in the bracket 1 of the softkey label For example DATA appears if DATA is selected DATA Turns OFF all data math functions DATA MEM Adds the data in the memory to the cur
82. more than twelve characters see IEEE 488 2 7 7 1 4 148 Character data not allowed A legal character data element was encountered where prohibited by the 4352B 150 String data error This error as well as errors 151 and 158 are generated when analyzing the syntax of a string data element This error message might be displayed if the 4352B detects an unknown problem 151 Invalid string data A string data element was expected but was invalid for some reason see IEEE 488 2 7 7 5 2 For example an END message was received before the terminal quote character 158 String data not allowed A string data element was encountered but was not allowed by the 4352B at this point in parsing 160 Block data error The 4352B detected the invalid syntax of a block data element 161 Invalid block data A block data element was expected but was invalid for some reason see IEEE 488 2 7 7 6 2 For example an END message was received before the length was satisfied 168 Block data not allowed A legal block data element was encountered but was not allowed by the 4352B at this point in parsing 200 Execution error This is the generic syntax error that the 4352B displays when it cannot detect more specific errors This code indicates only that an execution error as defined in IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 5 has occurred 210 Trigger error A trigger related error occurred This error message might be dis
83. named AUTOREC in the floppy disk If it is found the file is automatically read recalling the 4352B settings and measurement data Notes on Correct Use To prevent voltage from being erroneously applied to the DUT the DC power and control 10 6 Instrument State Block Save Recall voltage levels are recalled as OFF regardless of their settings before they were saved Also the FM deviation calibration data is recalled as OFF regardless of their settings before they were saved because there is no guarantee that the operating conditions remained constant FILE UTILITIES Displays the File Utilities Menu used to initialize a new disk and delete files from the disk STOR DEV STODDISK STODMEMO Selects the floppy disk drive or RAM disk memory as the storage device When DISK is displayed the floppy disk is selected as the storage device When MEMORY is displayed the internal RAM disk memory is selected as the storage device This setting does not change if the instrument is turned off or even if is pressed Save File Menu STATE SAVDSTA lt Character String gt Stores the 4352B settings and internal data array DATA ONLY SAVDDAT lt Character String gt Displays the Save File Menu GRAPHICS SAVDTIFF Specifies the file format for saving the screen currently displayed as the TIFF format The colors to be used in a saved image are controlled by your setting in the Print Setup Menu which provides t
84. returns to the previous softkey menu Time Setup Menu TIME HH MM SS SETCTIME lt HH MM SS gt Displays the current time on the active input area and displays the Time menu to set the time DATE MM DD YY SETCDATE lt MM DD YY gt Displays the current date on the active input area and displays the Date menu to set the date 10 18 Instrument State Block DATE MODE MonDayYear MONDYEAR Changes the date display format to month day year DayMonYear DAYMYEAR Changes the date display format to day month year RETURN Returns to the previous menu Time Menu HOUR Enables changing the Hour setting with the rotary knob or numeric keys After you change the hour setting press ENTER to restart the clock MIN Enables changing the Minute setting with the rotary knob or numeric keys After you change the minute setting press ENTER to restart the clock SEC Enables changing the Second setting with the rotary knob or numeric input keys After you change the second setting press ENTER to restart the clock ENTER SETCTIME Restarts the internal clock CANCEL Returns to the previous menu Pressing this key does not change the internal clock setting Date Menu MON Enables changing the Month setting with the rotary knob or numeric input keys After you change the month setting press ENTER to restart the clock DAY Enables changing the Day setting with the rot
85. the 43521A 9 Setting the averaging to ON Press Bw Avg and AVERAGING on OFF to toggle it AVERAGING ON off The measured value of the C N ratio is displayed on the LCD screen as shown in Figure 5 7 Duc Corrier Noise ExR Ava E 102 3 dBe RF ATT O dB CTRL 2 V NS ATT 10 dB POWER 5 V NS BW 1 Hz MOD OFF OFST 100 kHz LO 2 5797 GHz MEAS 143 1 msec Figure 5 7 Sample Measurement Screen Carrier Noise Ratio Measurement DUT VCO Note i Y If the CAUTION Set Noise ATT 10 dB Less or CAUTION Set Noise ATT 10 dB More message appears on the screen use one of the following methods to change the ATT value until the CAUTION display disappears You can change the ATT from 0 dB to 40 dB in steps of 10 dB Press and NOISE ATTEN The current ATT value is displayed on the screen as NOISE ATTEN xx dB Press the J key or the f key to change the ATT value m Press and NOISE ATTEN The current ATT value is displayed on the screen as NOISE ATTEN xx dB Use the numeric entry keys to change the ATT value in steps of 10 dB Note When measuring phase noise using the C N ratio measurement function in the tester mode a measurement around a spurious component may show a larger value than an actual phase noise This occurs because the level of the spurious component is significant enough to affect the measurement In this case the value differs from the measurement at the same offset frequency obtained through the
86. the clock signal to Al To send variable X starting from LSB replace line 110 with FOR I 0 TO 7 STEP 1 To check the binary equivalent of an integer X you can convert X into binary notation using IVAL X 2 Figure C 10 shows the timing chart for the above description Technical Information C 15 Technical Information X Divider 01010010 Al Clock OUTPUT1 ENABLE LOAD Line 120 Line 140 Line 130 CD00CO7 Figure C 10 Timing chart of the trigger detection output function Note For information on the specifications of the 24 bit I O port see appendix D i Functional Specifications of the I O Port in 4352B Programming Manual Y C 16 Technical Information 3 Notes on measurements 3 1 Eliminating components that adversely affect measurements If undesired components come into the connection between a DUT and this instrument you cannot obtain correct measurement results When connecting a DUT take the following measures as necessary This instrument employs the peak detection method to measure RF power Therefore the presence of higher harmonics in the measured signal makes it extremely difficult to correctly measure RF power In such cases connect a low pass filter to the RF output terminal of the DUT to eliminate them The output impedance of the DC power and control voltage outputs at RF can affect the output characteristics of the measured DUT particularly frequency or RF power If
87. the external signal source is inappropriate Set a correct nominal frequency Meas FREQ BAND xx xx NOMINAL FREQ or execute the signal search CMeas FREQ BAND xx xx SIGNAL SEARCH to set the nominal frequency to the 4352B The oscillation frequency of the external signal source is adjusted properly 66 No Signal Found This message appears when the carrier signal cannot be found out in the signal search function Meas FREQ BAND xx xx SIGNAL SEARCH The frequency of the carrier signal may not be within the specified frequency band Meas FREQ BAND xx xxGHz Check again to see if the specified range of the frequency band matches with the carrier signal frequency Generally if the DUT does not generate the carrier signal the error message CAUTION Insufficient RF Level appears first As shown in this example if another error message has been displayed already this error message does not appear even if you execute the signal search Messages 20 Error Messages Numerical Order 710 A D Overload The input level to the 4352B s internal A D converter is too large Adjustment or repair is necessary Contact our service office or the company from which you purchased the 4352B 11 A D Overload in Downconverter Unit An overflow occurred in the A D converter of the 43521A Downconverter Unit If this error occurs often the 43521A may be at fault and need repair Contact our service office or the company fro
88. the following message is displayed use RF ATTEN to reduce the attenuation by 5 dB smaller than it is CAUTION Set RF ATT 5 dB Less Note The DC control voltage level specified in the analyzer mode at Step 7 1 is applicable when the phase noise measurement or the spectrum measurement is performed In other measurement items the DC control voltage specified within the range defined with SWEEP as the sweep parameter is used and it is applied to the DUT See the description on later pages Note that if the maximum and minimum acceptable voltage levels are specified using MAX CTRL VOLTAGE and MIN CTRL VOLTAGE any DC control voltage without the allowable range is not applied to the DUT In the analyzer mode you can specify the DC control voltage level for phase noise or spectrum measurements using the automatic frequency control function See Setting the Automatic Frequency Control Function for details Basic Measurement Procedures 4 23 7 3 RF Power Characteristic vs DC Control Voltage Target Device VCO The RF power characteristic vs the DC control voltage is measured 1 Check that the modulation output is OFF Press Mod and confirm that MOD OUT on OFF is selected 2 Select the RF Power Characteristic vs DC Control Voltage as the measurement item Press Meas RF POWER 3 Specify the DC control voltage sweep range Press Menu Press SWEEP Perform one of the following two procedures to ente
89. the measurement conditions for C N ratio measurements and the detection bandwidth for FM deviation measurements In the analyzer mode it is used to specify the video bandwidth the resolution bandwidth the noise bandwidth for phase noise measurements and the aperture for tuning sensitivity measurements Format in the tester mode displays a menu used to select the unit in which to display measurement data for RF power or FM deviation measurements In the analyzer mode it displays a menu used to select the display unit for RF power measurements and spectrum measurements Display displays menus used to specify the 4352B display settings In the tester mode it provides menus for adjusting the color of on screen information and displaying titles In the analyzer mode it provides menus for not only adjusting selecting the on screen 1 2 Introduction information color and displaying titles but also for selecting the trace to be displayed storing the data trace with the memory trace function and so on Menu displays menus used to perform advanced measurements functions In the tester mode it provides menus for the automatic frequency control cable loss compensation and FM deviation calibration function The analyzer mode provides in addition to the automatic frequency control function and the measurement cable loss compensation function the sweep function linear sweep and log sweep and the marker function Switching ON OFF the noise in
90. the numeric entry keys to change the value Values you can set follow the 1 3 stepping rule and range from 1 Hz to 3 kHz When an input value does not follow the rule it is rounded to the nearest valid value If this bandwidth is changed the video bandwidth VIDED BW may change automatically NOISE BW CNBW lt Value gt Specifies the converted noise bandwidth for phase noise measurements For the noise measurement internally performed in the 4352B the resolution band width is automatically determined based on each offset frequency specified with SWEEP menu and cannot be changed by the user The noise level used for phase noise measurement is a converted value to the noise level at your specified range by multiplying the value which you set with NOISE BW NOISE PLL AUTO wide CNPLL AUTO WIDE Selects AUTO to reduce the bandwidth 200 Hz automatically or WIDE to maintain the wide bandwidth 1 kHz if an offset frequency below 5 kHz in phase noise measurements Note When measuring a DUT with high phase noise and the offset frequency i lt 5 kHz the message 2nd PLL Unlocked might be displayed on the screen Y This message indicates that 4352B is unable to make measurements This condition occurs because the 2nd PLL in the 4352B is designed to automatically set the bandwidth to 1 kHz and 200 Hz respectively when the offset frequency is above and below 5 kHz However the 200 Hz bandwidth selected at the offset frequency lt 5
91. this menu are applicable in RF power and spectrum measurements only POWER UNIT dBm POWUNIT DBM Selects dBm as the display unit for Power measurement data dBV POWUNIT DBV Select ABV as the display unit for Power measurement data dBuV POWUNIT DBUV Selects dB V as the display unit for Power measurement data Watt POWUNIT W Selects Watt as the display unit for Power measurement data Volt POWUNIT V Selects Volt as the display unit for Power measurement data 8 12 Measurement Block Analyzer Mode Analyzer Mode AUTO SCALE SCALE REFERENCE DEF TRACELDATA DATA HOLDLOFF DATA MATHLDATA MORE Display gt AUTO SCALE SCALE DIV REFERENCE POSITION REFERENCE VALUE MKR gt REFERENCE SCALE FOR DATA D amp M SCALE COUPLE RETURN DISPLAY DATA MEMORY DATA and MEMORY DATA gt MEMORY DATA gt LIMIT MENU RETURN HOLD OFF MAX MIN RETURN DATA MATH DATA DATA MEM DATA MEM DATA MEM DEFAULT GAIN amp OFS OFFSET GAIN RETURN ALLOCAT N ALL INSTR HALF INSTR HALF BASIC ALL BASIC BASIC STATUS TITLE ADJUST DISPLAY RETURN LIMIT LINE on OFF DATA gt UPPER DATA gt LOWER DATA gt UPPER DATA LOWER RETURN gt SELECT LETTER SPACE BACK SPACE ERASE TITLE DONE CANCEL r BACKGROUND INTENSITY INTENSITY MODIFY COLOR
92. to 20 dBm CN N female Input impedance ooo 50 9 SWR lt 1 3 MMS DQEAZ SWR lt 1 2 11 6 Specifications Instrument BASIC Related Specifications Instrument BASIC Related Specifications Keyboard coo PS 2 style 101 english keyboard Connector 26 renare enore oeaan een edb nent ene nes mini DIN T O port Connector cr D SUB 15 pin Level cc TTL level I O A 4 bit input 8 bit output port DI 09000000 0000000 a 5012033 Figure 11 1 I O Port Pin Assignment 24 bit I O Interface Connector anaana ene raare eerror D SUB 36 pin DS Cn TTL I O e aaa EEEE EEEa 8 bit input 16 bit output Figure 11 2 24 bit I O Interface Pin Assignment Specifications 11 7 General Characteristics Table 11 2 Signal Source Assignment Pin No Signal Name Signal Standard 1 GND OV 2 INPUT1 TTL level pulse input pulse width lus or above 3 OUTPUT1 TTL level latch output 4 OUTPUT2 TTL level latch output 5 OUTPUT PORT AO TTL level latch output 6 OUTPUT PORT Al TTL level latch output 7 OUTPUT PORT A2 TTL level latch output 8 OUTPUT PORT A3 TTL level latch output 9 OUTPUT PORT A4 TTL level latch output 10 OUTPUT PORT A5 TTL level latch output 11 OUTPUT PORT A6 TTL level latch output 12 OUTPUT PORT A7 TTL level latch output 13 OUTPUT PORT BO
93. to check the frequency and power of the 600 MHz signal outputted from the 43521A If the frequency is 600 MHz 30 kHz and the power is 8 dBm or more the 43521A operates normally If the values are out of the limits the 43521A is at fault Repair it 1 Connect the attached N N cable 43521 61638 between the LO OUT connector on the 43521A and the RF IN connector on the 4352B Connect the attached cable 41951 61602 between the RF output connector on the external signal source and the LO IN connector on the 4352B 3 Make rear panel connections between the 4352B and the 43521A as shown in Figure 5 2 4 Press and then DOWNCONV on OFF to toggle it DOWNCONV ON off The 43521A outputs the 600 MHz signal Press and FREQ BAND xx xx in this order and then press a key other than FREQ BAND 10M 36 on the frequency band menu The selected frequency band softkey is underlined Press and then DOWNCONV ON off to toggle it DOWNCONV on OFF While keeping the 600 MHz signal from the 43521A you can use the measurement functions of the 4352B Press Meas INST TYPE INST TYPE VCO TESTER and FREQUENCY in this order FREQUENCY is underlined which indicates that the frequency measurement in the tester mode is selected Check that the measured value on the 4352B s screen is 600 MHz 30 kHz 9 Press MEAS RF POWER MEAS RF POWER is underlined which indicates that the RF 10 11 power measurement in the t
94. to create a program was unsuccessful A reason for the failure might include not enough memory 282 Illegal program name The name used to reference a program was invalid For example redefining an existing program deleting a nonexistent program or in general referencing a nonexistent program 283 Illegal variable name An attempt was made to reference a nonexistent variable in a program 284 Program currently running Certain operations dealing with programs may be illegal while the program is running For example deleting a running program might not be possible 285 Program syntax error Indicates that a syntax error appears in a downloaded program The syntax used when parsing the downloaded program is device specific 286 Program runtime error A program runtime error of the Instrument BASIC has occurred To get more specific error information use the ERRM or ERRN command Instrument BASIC 310 System error Some error termed system error by the 4352B has occurred 311 Memory error An error was detected in the 4352B s memory 330 Self test failed The self test failed Either contact our service office or see the Service Manual 350 Queue overflow A specific code entered into the queue instead of the code that caused the error This code indicates that there is no room in the queue and an error occurred but was not recorded 400 Query error This is the generic query
95. trace Display the data and memory traces Press DATA and MEMORY Two traces are displayed Change the center stimulus value to the third harmonics frequency Press Menu CARRIER MENU Press 3xCARR CENTER Measure the third harmonics level Press Trigger SINGLE Select a memory trace carrier to be applied for the marker value Press Menu MARKER Press MKR ON DATA to toggle it MKT ON MEMORY Use the marker to search the trace for the carrier level In this case the carrier level must be maximum in full span Press RETURN Press MKR SEARCH Press MAX Display the A marker at the marker reading position and fix it in position Press RETURN Press MARKER Press AMKR MENU Press FIXED AMKR Select the data trace third harmonics to be applied for the marker value Basic Measurement Procedures 4 35 Press RETURN Press MKR ON MEMORY to toggle it MKR ON DATA 11 Use the marker to search the trace for the third harmonics level In this case the third harmonic level must be maximum in full span Press RETURN Press MKR SEARCH Press MAX At this time the difference in level between the carrier and the third harmonics is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen Also perform the following steps to check the absolute level of the third harmonics Press RETURN Press MARKER Press AMKR MENU Press AMODE OFF 4 36 Basic Measurement Procedures 7 9 Compa
96. using the marker If the measurement value is not your expected value check that the DC outputs are ON DC appears if the DC outputs are OFF and that the modulation output is OFF For more information about the additional features for this measurement see Chapter 8 for the frequency resolution selection averaging marker and tuning sensitivity aperture functions Basic Measurement Procedures 4 27 Note The sweep starts when the time specified with CTRL DELAY under i elapses This delay time is intended to wait until the DC control voltage Y becomes stable before sweep This delay time is not included in the sweep time and is applicable only to the first measurement point To provide delay time for the other points you need to specify a proper sweep time 4 28 Basic Measurement Procedures 7 5 Phase Noise Characteristics vs Offset Frequency Target Device VCO or PLL The phase noise characteristic at an offset frequency from the carrier is measured The measurement value is negative though the measurement value of the C N Carrier Noise ratio in the tester mode is positive 1 Check that the modulation output is OFF Press Mod and confirm that MOD OUT on OFF is selected 2 Select the Phase Noise Characteristics vs Offset Frequency as the measurement item Press Meas PHASE NOISE 3 Specify the offset frequency sweep range Press Menu Press SWEEP Press START and entry keys to enter the sweep start
97. value Then press STOP and entry keys to enter the sweep stop value The center or span value entry method cannot be used because the 4352B only employs the logarithm sweep of an offset frequency for this measurement Allowable value you can specify is one of the values 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz and 10 MHz 4 Specify the converted noise bandwidth for noise measurement Press Bw Avg Use NOISE BW and entry keys to specify the converted noise bandwidth Generally use 1 Hz preset value of this instrument 5 Specify the averaging factor for noise measurement Press AVERAGING FACTOR Use entry keys to enter the averaging factor Press AVERAGING on OFF to toggle it to AVERAGING ON off 6 Optimize the display scale for the measurement data Press Display Press AUTO SCALE to optimize the display scale for the measurement data Note The minimum measurable value in a phase noise measurement is restricted i by the phase noise characteristics and spurious characteristics of the signal Y generator you use Note When the message CAUTION 2nd PLL Unlocked appears on the LCD follow i the steps below to alter the bandwidth of the 2nd PLL in the 4352B to WIDE Y Y a Press Bw Avg b Press NOISE PLL AUTO wide to toggle it NOISE PLL auto WIDE Basic Measurement Procedures 4 29 See Bw Avg in Chapter 7 where AUTO and WIDE are compared in their usage Phase Noise 10 0B REF 50 dBe Ex
98. very short time several hundred kHz in several tens of ms Verify the DUT s frequency stability a The automatic frequency control function was ON and the target frequency was 50 MHz or less Set the acceptable frequency deviation to 4 or less of the target frequency 41 Set Noise ATT 10 dB More Press Sense Range NOISE ATTN and the entry keys to set a value 10 dB higher than the current setting 48 AFC Out Of Loop The automatic frequency control function could not follow the fluctuation in the measurement condition and did not converge on the target frequency Possible causes and countermeasures are shown below Messages 17 Error Messages Numerical Order m The tuning sensitivity is improperly set Press Menu AUTO FREQ CONTROL SENSITIVITY and the entry keys to specify a proper tuning sensitivity the unit is Hz V a The maximum value of the control voltage is too small Press Menu AUTO FREQ CONTROL MAX CTRL VOLTAGE and the entry keys to specify a maximum value larger than the current setting Be careful not to set a value that exceeds the DUT s maximum acceptable value m The math measurement repeat count is too low Press Menu AUTO FREQ CONTROL MAX ITERATION and the entry keys to specify a value larger than the current setting mw An effect of the high value capacitor included with the DUT s power voltage Vec terminal Press Menu AUTO FREQ CONTROL CTRL DELAY and the entry keys to specify
99. voltage levels E n 1 2 Basic Measurement Items Available in Analyzer Mode RF Power Characteristics vs DC Control Voltage Measures RF power characteristics by sweeping the DC control voltage Frequency Tuning Sensitivity Characteristics vs DC Control Voltage Measures output carrier frequency and tuning sensitivity characteristics by sweeping the DC control voltage Phase Noise Characteristics vs Offset Frequency Measures phase noise characteristics at your specified offset frequency range from the carrier frequency Frequency Transient Measures frequency fluctuation characteristic over time Spectrum Measures spectrum characteristics Carrier spurious and harmonics levels can be obtained Advanced Measurement Items in Analyzer Mode See Advanced Measurement Items in Analyzer Mode for more details Comparison between Carrier and Harmonic Levels Compares the carrier level with the harmonic level using markers O Comparison between Characteristics Obtained under three or four Different Conditions Compares the measurement results under three or four different conditions on the same display format o Integral of phase noise vs offset frequency characteristics Obtains a power ratio of the phase noise within any range o Post tuning drift characteristics Measures the long term change characteristics of the carrier frequency after the change of the DC control voltage o Observation of FM signal wavef
100. 0 us wide in the HIGH state triggers RUN or CONT The signal is TTL compatible Front and Rear Panel 2 9 4 VO Port When you use this instrument by connecting it to the 43521A Downconverter Unit use this port for connection to I O PORT on the 43521A s rear panel This port is also used for connection to external equipment such as handlers in production lines See 4352B GPIB Programming Manual also for details 5 Inlet with fuse box Connects the power cable to this inlet To replace the fuse please see Replacing the Fuse in Chapter 3 6 GPIB Interface Comnects the 4352B to an external controller and other instruments in an automated system This connector is also used when the 4352B itself is the controller of compatible peripherals See What is GPIB in Appendix B 7 External Monitor Terminal This terminal outputs measurement results to an external color monitor Color monitors supporting VGA scan speed of 31 5 kHz can be connected to this terminal 8 Parallel Interface Connector This interface enables the output of displayed results to a printer It complies with the Centronics parallel interface standard See Table 11 3 for supported printers 9 24 Bit I O Interface Connects to external equipment such as a handler on a production line See 4352B GPIB Programming Manual for additional information 10 mini DIN Keyboard Connector Connects to the mini DIN keyboard that is usually used with Instrumen
101. 10 100 mHz RBW 30 300 mHz RBW 100 1 Hz RBW 300 3 Hz RBW 1k 10 H RBW 3k RES Bandwidth 1 Hz 3 Hz 10 Hz 30 Hz 100 Hz 300 Hz 1 3 kHz kHz 3 kHz Noise Bandwidth 1 Hz to 1 MHz 1 Hz 1 Hz Sensitivity Aperture 0 1 to 20 of span 1 1 2nd PLL Bandwidth 200 Hz 1 kHz 200 Hz 200 Hz For mat Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default Unit dBm dBV dBuV Volt Watt dBm dBm E 10 Allowable Values and Defaults for Key Functions Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default Define Trace Data Memory Data amp Memory Data Data Data Hold Off Max Min Off Off Math Type Data D M D M D M Data Data Math Gain 100 to 100 1 1 Math Offset 10e9 to 10e9 0 0 Disp Allocation ALLI HIHB ALIB BASS ALLI ALLI Scale Div Scale Reference 0 1 to 20 RF POWER 1 kHz to 3 GHz FREQUENCY TUNING SENSITIVITY 1 kHz to 3 GHz FREQUENCY TRANSIENT 0 1 to 20 PHASE NOISE SPECTRUM 10 200kHz 200kHz 10 10 Reference Value 150 to 30 RF POWER 1 kHz to 15 GHz FREQUENCY TUNING SENSITIVITY 1kHz to 15GHzGHz FREQUENCY TRANSIENT 150 to 0 PHASE NOISE 150 to 30 SPECTRUM 0 1 GHz 640 MHz or Midpoint of Frequency Band 0 0 Reference Position 0 to 10 RF POWER FREQUENCY TUNING SENSITIVITY FREQUENCY TRANSIENT PHASE NOISE SPECTRUM 5 5 5 10 10 Scale Couple On Off On RF POWER On RF POWER FREQUENCY FREQUENCY TR
102. 10 16 Run cc 10 16 Pause cc 10 16 Stop 2 a 10 16 Edit 2 10 16 ON KEY LABELS 10 16 CA 10 16 SAVE cc a 10 16 Contents 15 GE 10 16 PURGE lc 10 16 INITIALIZE 2 10 16 MSI INTERNAL 2 ee aa 10 17 SCRATCH 20 L 10 17 RENumber 6 10 17 LIST 10 17 COMMAND ENTRY ccccccl 10 17 CLEAR 1 0 2 0 10 17 RESET 0g aa 10 17 BASIC Edit Menu 2 a 10 17 ASSIGN Hp4352 aoaaa 10 17 OUTPUT 0Hp4352 ww 10 17 ENTER Hp4352 2 1 1 e 10 17 WRETEIO 2 2 a a a a a a 10 17 EXECUTE 2 6 1 kk a a a a a 10 17 READID e e a a a 10 18 GOTO LINE 2 a a a 10 18 END EDIT 2 2 a a a a 10 18 Memory Partition Menu 2 ee 10 18 mm K RAM nn K BASIC 1 ee o 10 18 DONE 2 1 10 18 CANCEL 2 a a a a a a 10 18 Partition Change YES NO Menu 2 ee ee ee 10 18 CHANGE YES cc a a a 10 18 NO cc 10 18 Time Setup Menu A 10 18 TIME HH MM SS SETCTIME lt HH MM SS gt 10 18 DATE MM DD YY SETCDATE lt MM DD YY gt 10 18 DATE MODE MonDayYear MONDYEAR 2 10 19 DayMonYear DAYMYEAR ee ee ee ee ee ee 10 19 RETURN 2 1 ee a a a a 10 19 Time Menu ww A 10 19 HOUR 2 1 1 10 19 MIN 20 10 19 SEC cc 10 19 ENTER SETCTIME cccccllll ee 10 19 CANCEL 2 a a a a a 10 19 Date Menu lclclclll 10 19 MON 2 1 10 19 DAY 6 10 19 YEAR cc 10 19 Contents 16 ENTER SETCDATE e 10 20 CANCEL o 10 20 B
103. 200 HP DeskJet 1600CM i NS SSS S Operation Conditions Temperature Disk drive non operating condition Disk drive operating condition Humidity wet bulb temperature lt 29 C without condensation Disk drive non operating condition Disk drive operating condition Altitude cc Warm up time a oa rarere AN 0 C to 40 C Lecce teen ete eee eee 10 C to 40 C o 15 to 95 RH o 15 to 80 RH o O to 2000 meters AN 30 minutes Non operation Conditions Temperature cce Humidity wet bulb temperature lt 45 C without condensation Altitude coco 11 10 Specifications TN 20 C to 60 C ON 15 to 95 RH AN 0 to 4572 meters Operation Conditions Others EMC Complies with CISPR 11 1990 EN 55011 1991 Group 1 Class A Complies with IEC 1000 3 2 1995 EN 6100 3 2 1995 Complies with IEC 1000 3 3 1994 EN 6100 3 3 1995 Complies with IEC 1000 4 2 1995 EN 50082 1 1992 4 kV CD 8kV AD Complies with IEC 801 3 1984 EN 50082 1 1992 3 V m Complies with IEC 1000 4 4 1995 EN 50082 1 1992 1 kV Main 0 5kV Signal Line Note Note The 4352B meets the specifications for C N ratio and phase noise over the entire immunity test frequency range between 27 to 1000 MHz when tested at 3V m in compliance with IEC 801 3 1984 Note however that this does not appl
104. 22 Ext 2 5 2 8 extension D 3 external input 11 9 external monitor output 11 9 external monitor terminal 2 10 external program run cont input 2 9 external program RUN CONT input 11 9 external reference input 11 9 external reference input 2 9 external trigger input 11 9 external trigger input 2 10 external trigger wait display Ext 2 5 2 8 F factory settings E 17 fault diagnosis method F 1 features 1 2 file name D 3 file structure D 5 FILE UTILITIES 10 7 FIXED AMKR DMKR FIX 8 28 FIXEDAMKR VALUE DMKRVAL lt Value gt 8 28 flexible disk drive 2 3 FM DETECTION 7 8 FM DEV CAL 7 19 FM DEVIATION MEAS FMDEV 7 3 FM DEV RANGE 7 6 FM DEV RNG 200kHz DEVRNG DV200KHZ 7 6 FM DEV RNG 20kHz DEVRNG DV20KHZ 7 6 FM DEV RNG 2kHz DEVRNG DV2KHZ 7 6 format 10 10 Format 1 2 7 10 8 12 FORMAT display 2 4 2 7 FORMAT LIF DISF LIF DISF DOS 10 10 FORM FEED ON off FORMFEED ON OFF 10 3 FREQ BAND 10M 3G FBAND lt value gt 7 3 8 3 64kHz FCOUN RES64KHZ 64kHz 8 6 FREQ RES 1kHz FCOUN RES1KHZ 1kHz 8 6 FREQ RES 1kHz FCOUN RES1KHZ 7 5 FREQ SPAN 2MHz TRSPAN TS2MHZ 8 7 FREQUENCY MEAS FREQ 7 3 8 3 front panel 2 1 Fuse Selection 3 5 G GAIN DATGAIN lt Value gt 7 13 8 15 general characteristics 11 9 GET 10 16 s n 6 2 GPIB B 2 Index 3 GPIB address 10 23 GPIB address B 5 GPIB Function Specification
105. 3 3 Rack Mount Kits Installation Option 1CN Handle Kit Option 1CN is a handle kit containing a pair of handles and the necessary hardware to attach them to the instrument Installing the Handle 1 Remove the adhesive backed trim strips from the left and right front sides of the analyzer 2 Attach the front handles to the sides using the screws provided 3 Attach the trim strips to the handles 3 8 Installation and Setup Guide Option 1CM Rack Mount Kit Option 1CM is a rack mount kit containing a pair of flanges and the necessary hardware to mount them to the instrument in an equipment rack with 482 6 mm 19 inches horizontal spacing Mounting the Rack 1 Remove the adhesive backed trim strips from the left and right front sides of the analyzer Attach the rack mount flange Q to the left and right front sides of the analyzer using the screws provided Remove all four feet lift bar on the inner side of the foot and slide the foot toward the bar Option 1CP Rack Mount amp Handle Kit Option 1CP is a rack mount kit containing a pair of flanges and the necessary hardware to mount them to an instrument which has handles attached in an equipment rack with 482 6 mm 19 inches spacing Mounting the Handle and Rack 1 Remove the adhesive backed trim strips from the left and right front sides of the analyzer Attach the front handle G and the rack mount flange together on the left a
106. 352B was beyond the highest possible measurement frequency Note however that RF Input Under Trans Min Freq message No 57 may erroneously appear even when the above problem is present if the 4352B is operating in the heterodyne mode and if the difference between input signals from the device and the external signal generator is larger than 40 MHz Verify that the DUT generates the proper signal and inputs it to the 4352B RF IN connector If the signal is generated check its frequency Press Sense Range MAX TRANS FREQ or MIN TRANS FREQ and the entry keys to change the detection bandwidth if required 59 Target Freq Out Of Range Indicates the 2nd or 3rd harmonic target frequency is not within the 4352B measurement range The measurement range is set to 10 MHz to 3 GHz when the 4352B is used alone or set to the selected frequency band when used with 43521A Downconverter Unit when 2xCARR CENTER or 3 x CARR CENTER is selected in spectrum measurements At this time the previous measurement conditions still remain any of the sweep parameters start stop center or span values are not changed Check the DUT s output frequency Messages 19 Error Messages Numerical Order 61 No Downconverter Unit Connected This message appears in the following cases When you try to set DOWNCONY on OFF to ON with the 43521A Downconverter Unit disconnected m When you try to set DUWNCONV on OFF to ON with the 43521
107. 372 sec ATN 6 dB HAIN a0 dB MEN E START 169 Hz Lo 2 5796 GHz STOP 18 Mhz Figure 5 10 Sample Measurement Screen Phase Noise vs Offset Frequency Characteristics Measurement DUT VCO 12 Reading the measurement values Press and MARKER to display the marker You can read the value of each measurement point using the marker Note If the measurement value is not your expected value check that the DC i outputs are ON DC appears if the DC outputs are OFF and that the Y modulation output is OFF 5 26 Basic Measurements Using the 43521A For the automatic frequency control function the averaging function the marker function and the noise attenuator function see Chapter 8 Y Note In this measurement the sweep time can not be specified Only the query is i available When the automatic frequency control function is ON the carrier frequency is automatically adjusted before the sweep The time required for the adjustment is not included in the sweep time If the external signal source needs to be set again the setting is first made and after the frequency change time elapses the sweep starts This time is not included in the sweep time also you can set the DC control voltage level for phase noise or spectrum measurement using the automatic frequency control function See Setting the Automatic Frequency Control Function in Chapter 4 for details Basic Measurements Using the 43521A 5 27 3
108. 38 378 New Zealand Test and Measurement Call Center fax 64 4 802 6881 P O Box 4026 Englewood CO 80155 4026 Asia Pacific tel 1 800 452 4844 Agilent Technologies 24 F Cityplaza One 1111 King s Road Canada Taikoo Shing Hong Kong Agilent Technologies Canada Inc tel 852 3197 7777 5150 Spectrum Way fax 852 2506 9284 Mississauga Ontario L4W 561 tel 1 877 894 4414 Europe Agilent Technologies Test amp Measurement European Marketing Organization P O Box 999 1180 AZ Amstelveen The Netherlands tel 31 20 547 9999 Japan Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd Call Center 9 1 Takakura Cho Hachioji Shi Tokyo 192 8510 Japan tel 81 426 56 7832 fax 81 426 56 7840 Latin America Agilent Technologies Latin American Region Headquarters 5200 Blue Lagoon Drive Suite 4950 Miami Florida 33126 U S A tel 305 267 4245 fax 305 267 4286 Australia New Zealand Agilent Technologies Australia Pty Ltd 347 Burwood Highway Forest Hill Victoria 3131 tel 1 800 629 485 Australia
109. 4352 0PC Verify Operation Completed 500 ENTER 0Hp4352 0pc DISP CONNECT DEVICE and PRESS CONTINUE PAUSE DISP MEASUREMENT I FOR I 1 TO 4 OUTPUT Hp4352 0UT1L Set OUTPUT 1 to LOW X Divider I FOR J 7 TO O STEP 1 WRITEIO 16 0 BIT X J Send Divider Data via PORT A WRITEIO 16 0 BIT X J 2 WRITEIO 16 0 BIT X J NEXT J EXECUTE SING Single Sweep NEXT I 1 DISP MEAS END 1 END Figure A 13 Sample program using the trigger detection output function 2 2 A 10 Manual Changes Sample program using the value trigger function 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 File Name F1G12_34 TXT IBASIC SAMPLE PROGRAM for Frequency Transient Measurement with Value Trigger Function ASSIGN Hp4352 TO 800 Sg_wait_time 1 second Vpower 12 Volt Fmax 2 1E 8 Hz Fmin 1 7E 8 Hz Fref 1 8E 8 Hz Start 0 second Sweep_time 02 second 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 OUTPUT Hp4352 PRES Preset 4352 OUTPUT Hp4352 HOLD Trigger HOLD OUTPUT Hp4352 SGTYPE 1 Select SG TYPE 1 OUTPUT 0Hp4352 LOSWT Sg_wait_time Set LOCAL SG Wait Time to 0 1 second OUTPUT Hp4352 LOAUTO ON Automatic Local SG Control WAIT 3 OUTPUT Hp4352 VA Select Analyzer mode OUTPUT Hp4352 MEAS TRAN Select Frequency Transient Measurement EXECUTE SING Perform F V Converter Calibration OUTPUT 0Hp4352 POSL Positive Logic OUTPUT Hp4352 VPO
110. 8 17 Data Limit Menu a 8 17 LIMIT LINE on OFF LIMILINE OFF O 0N 1 A 8 17 DATA UPPRER DATLIMU 2 2 2 0 0 ee eee eee 8 17 DATA LOWER DATLIML 0 000 e ee 8 17 DATA UPPER EXDATLIMU 2 02000 eee 8 17 DATA LOWER CEXDATLIML 0 0 8 0 000004 8 17 Display MORE Menu Ve 8 18 ALLOCAT N ALL INSTR DISA ALLI Ce A 8 18 HALF INSTR HALF BASIC DISA HTHB e 8 18 ALL BASIC DISA ALLB ee 8 18 BASIC STATUS DISA BASS 2 ee ee 8 18 TITLE TITL lt Character String gt 40 4 8 18 ADJUST DISPLAY 2 2 a a a a 8 18 RETURN e 8 18 Character Input Menu 0 o ee ed 8 18 SELECT LETTER 2 6 1 1 ke ee ee 8 18 SPACE calls a a a a a a a a a a a 8 18 BACK SPACE cao a a a a a a a aa 8 18 ERASE TITLE cce a a a a a aa aa 8 18 DONE 2 a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa 8 18 CANCEL e 8 19 Display Adjustment Menu 0 0 o ee 8 19 INTENSITY INTE lt Value gt 0 0 0 02 00 00 080004 8 19 BACKGROUND INTENSITY BACI lt Value gt 04 8 19 MODIFY COLORS cc a a a a aa aa 8 19 DEFAULT COLORS DEFC 2 ee ee ee ee 8 19 SAVE COLORS SVCO e 8 19 RECALL COLORS RECC aooaa a a a 8 19 RETURN e 8 19 First Color Adjustment Menu Ce 8 19 DATA COLO DATA aaa a a a a 8 19 MEMORY COLO MEM PPP 8 19 LIMIT LINE PARAMETER COLO PARAM Ca a a e 8 19 GRATICULE COLO GRAT
111. 8 27 CLEAR SUB MKRS CLRSMKRS 2 2 2 2 20004 8 27 RETURN 2 2 2 A 8 27 A Marker Menu 1 2 L 8 28 AMKR DMKR ON 0 L 8 28 FIXED AMKR DMKR FIX 2 20200 00 004 8 28 TRACKING AMKR DMKRTRAC 0 005028 8 28 AMODE OFF DMKR OFF 2 2 eee L 8 28 AMKR SWP PARAM DMKRPRM lt Value gt 0 2 2 00 0 8 28 FIXEDAMKR VALUE DMKRVAL lt Value gt 2 00 8 28 RETURN 2 2 2 A 8 28 Marker Search Menu Ce a 8 29 SEARCH PEAK SEAM PEAK VE e 8 29 MAX SEAMMAX 2 2 8 29 MIN SEAMMIN 2 2 ee 8 29 TARGET SEAM TARG e 8 29 SRCH TRACK on OFF TRACK OFF 1010811 e 8 29 SEARCH RANGE 2 aoaaa 8 30 SUB MKR 2 ww ww a a a aa a a a a 8 30 RETURN 2 2 2 A 8 30 Peak Menu CA 8 30 PEAK SEAM PEAK Ve e 8 30 NEXT PEAK SEANPK aoaaa 8 30 NEXT PEAK LEFT SEANPKL o o o 8 30 Contents 11 NEXT PEAK RIGHT SEANPKR L 8 30 PEAK DEF MENE 8 30 SUB MKR aoaaa 8 30 RETURN aoaaa a 8 30 Target Menu Ce 8 30 TARGET SEATARG lt Value gt e 8 30 SEARCH LEFT SEAL ee ee ee 8 30 SEARCH RIGHT SEAR 2 1 e ee ee 8 31 SUB MKR 2 ww a a a a a a a aa 8 31 RETURN e 1 a 8 31 Search Range Menu Ce 8 31 PART SRCH on OFF PARS OFF O ONI1 e 8 31 MKRA SEARCH RNG SEARSTR e o 8 31 MKR LEFT RNG SEARSTRL 1 ee ee ee ee ee 8 31 MKR RIGHT RNG SEARS
112. 9 Applying Power Voltage and Control Voltage 5 11 2 Measurements in Tester Mode o 5 12 Contents 3 2 1 RF Power Measurement DUT VCO 2 2 Frequency Measurement DUT VCO o 2 3 C N Carrier Noise Ratio Measurement DUT VCO 3 Measurements in Analyzer Mode 3 1 RF Power vs DC Control Voltage Characteristics Measurement DUT VCO 3 2 Frequency Tuning Sensitivity vs DC Control Voltage Characteristics Measurement DUT VCO 3 3 Phase Noise vs Offset Frequency Characteristics Measurement DUT VCO 3 4 Integral of Phase Noise vs Offset Frequency Characteristics Measurement DUT VCO Partial Integration of the Phase Noise vs Offset Frequency Characteristics Measurement 3 5 Frequency Transient Measurement DUT PLL 3 6 Spectrum Measurement DUT PLL 6 Entry Block Numeric Keypad Terminator Keys Knob Daag Enty On 7 Measurement Block Tester Mode e Menu VCO Tester Menu MEAS RF POWER MEAS POWE FREQUENCY MEAS FREQ DC POWER CURRENT MEAS CURR FM DEVIATION MEAS FMDEV CARRIER NOISE MEAS CN FREQ BAND 10M 3G FBAND lt value gt INST TYPE Instrument Type Menu INST TYPE VCO TESTER VT VCO ANALY VA SIGNAL SEARCH SIGSRCH NOMINAL FREQ NOMFREQ lt value gt ca Range Sense Range Menu RF ATTEN RFATT lt Value gt FREQ RES 1kHz FCOUN RES1KHZ 64kHz FCOUN RES64KHZ NOISE ATTEN NATT lt Value gt FM DEV
113. A turned off E When you turn off the 43521A with DOWNCONV ON off set to ON E When you recall the setting to use the 43521A with DOWNCONV on OFF set to OFF Connect the 43521A correctly and turn on the power Notice that if DOWNCONV on OFF is OFF you cannot recall the setting to use the 48521A 62 Correction Data Lost in Downconverter Unit The correction data in the EEPROM of the 43521A Downconverter Unit is lost You cannot use the product Repair the faulty hardware 63 Can t Use 12 Bit I O Port This message appears if you execute an IBASIC or GPIB command to operate the 12 Bit I O Port with DOWNCONV ON off set to ON If DOWNCONV ON off is set to ON the 12 Bit I O Port is connected to the 43521A Therefore you cannot use this kind of commands 64 Command Ignored Invalid Freq Band This message appears if you execute the TRMIN or TRMAX GPIB command when DOWNCONV ON off is set to ON and a frequency band other than 10 MHz to 3 GHz high frequency band is selected The command is ignored The TRMIN and TRMAX commands are available only in the following cases m When you use the 4352B alone not connecting it to the 43521A E When you connect the 4352B and the 43521A Downconverter Unit set DOWNCONV ON off to ON and set the frequency band to 10 MHz to 3 GHz 65 No Downconverter RF Output Do Signal Search This message appears when RF OUT of the 43521A Downconverter Unit outputs no signal because the frequency setting of
114. AND xx xx m Frequency band menu MEAS RF POWER FREQUENCY DC POWER CURRENT FM DEVIATION CARRIER NOISE INST TYPE ANALY RF POWER FREQUENCY TYPE VCO TESTER PHASE NOISE VCO ANALY RETURN SPECTRUM INST TYPE RF TRANSIENT Figure A 2 Softkey menu called from the Meas key for serial number JP1KE A 2 Manual Changes MEAS RF POWER FREQUENCY DC POWER CURRENT FM DEVIATION CARRIER NOISE FREQ BAND 10M 3G INST TYPE INST TYPE VCO TESTER VCO ANALY RETURN ANALY RF POWER FREQUENCY PHASE NOISE RF TRANSIENT SPECTRUM FREQ BAND 10M 3G INST TYPE gt Frequency Band Menu cd00602 Figure A 3 Softkey menu called from the Meas key current Frequency Band Menu FREQ BAND 10M 3G FREQ BAND 10M 3G FREQ BAND 10M 3G FREQ BAND 10M 3G 2 5 3 6G 2 5 3 6G 2 4 6 6G 3 1 6 6G SIGNAL SEARCH NOMINAL FREQ RETURN 3 1 6 6G 5 4 9 0G SIGNAL SEARCH NOMINAL FREQ 5 4 12 6G SIGNAL SEARCH NOMINAL FREQ RETURN RETURN SG MAX FREQ lt 4 2GHz 4 2 GHz S SG MAX FREQ lt 6 0 GHz 6 0 GHz lt SG MAX FREQ cd00603 Figure A 4 Frequency band menu current Changes of softkeys under the Sens Range key only for analyzer mode Make the following changes in Figure A 6 to adapt it to Figure A 5 Addition m RF TRANS MAX FREQ T
115. ANGE The softkey menu used to select the measurement range is displayed Press the softkey that corresponds to the measurement range to be selected Press RETURN The measured value is displayed in rms Press Format PEAK CONV on OFF to toggle it PEAK CONV ON off if you need to display this value with its units converted from rms to peak 6 When you need even higher accuracy 0 8 typical under the conditions given in the specification perform FM deviation calibration Press Menu Press FM DEV CAL Press EXECUTE DEV CAL The calibration factor is stored in the 4352B Press DEV CORR on OFF to toggle it DEV CORR ON off Note a If the ambient temperature changes by more than 5 after FM deviation i calibration or if the detection bandwidth is changed you need to perform Y FM deviation calibration again a The calibration factor obtained by the FM deviation calibration is canceled if the 4352B is turned OFF or if Preset is pressed Basic Measurement Procedures 4 17 6 7 C N Ratio Carrier Noise The ratio of the carrier power to the noise power at the specified offset frequency is measured 1 Make sure that the modulation output is OFF Look at the measurement setting parameter on the screen and confirm that OFF is displayed in the MOD column If the modulation output value is displayed in MOD perform the procedure in 6 3 RF Power Measurement to turn the modulation signal output OFF 2 Sele
116. ANSIENT PHASE TRANSIENT PHASE NOISE SPECTRUM NOISE SPECTRUM Off FRE Off FRE QUENCY TUNING QUENCY TUNING SENSITIVITY SENSITIVITY Scale For Data Memory Data Data Allowable Values and Defaults for Key Functions E 11 Mens Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default Sweep Time Min sweep time to 1 Hr RF POWER FREQUENCY TUNING SENSITIVITY Min sweep time Number of Points 2 to 801 RF POWER FREQUENCY TUNING 51 RF POWER 51 RF POWER SENSITIVITY FREQUENCY TRANSIENT FREQUENCY TUNING FREQUENCY TUNING SENSITIVITY SENSITIVITY 801 PHASE NOISE 801 PHASE NOISE FREQUENCY FREQUENCY TRANSIENT TRANSIENT Start OV to Max control voltage RF POWER OV RF POWER FREQUENCY TUNING SENSITIVITY 100 Hz FREQUENCY TUNING to 1 MHz 10n PHASE NOISE 0 to 800 SENSITIVITY 1kHz ms FREQUENCY TRANSIENT FREQ BAND PHASE NOISE 0s MIN to FREQ BAND MAXIMUM SPECTRUM FREQUENCY TRANSIENT Center 5MHz SPECTRUM Stop OV to Max control voltage RF POWER OV RF POWER OV RF POWER FREQUENCY TUNING SENSITIVITY 1 kHz to FREQUENCY TUNING FREQUENCY TUNING 10 MHz 10n PHASE NOISE FREQ BAND SENSITIVITY SENSITIVITY MINIMUM MINIMUM SPAN to FREQ BAND 10MHz P HASE 10MHz P HASE MAX SPECTRUM NOISE Cen NOISE Cen ter 5MHz SPECTRUM ter 5MHz SPECTRUM Center Stop Start 2 RF POWER OV RF POWER OV RF POWER
117. ATICULE COLO GRAT e 7 17 WARNING COLOWARN 2 2 Ce e e a 7 17 TEXT MARKER COLO TEXT e 7 17 MORE clic e 7 17 RETURN Ce e e 7 17 Color Change MORE Menu 2 eee a o 7 17 IBASIC COLO IBT e 7 17 PEN COLO PEN1 2 e 7 17 PEN2 COLO PEND 2 e 7 18 PEN3 COLO PEN3 2 o 7 18 PEN4 COLO PEN4 Ce e e a 7 18 PENS COLO PENS e 7 18 PENG COLO PENE 7 18 RETURN cc e 7 18 Second Color Adjustment Menu 00 002 2 eee ee 7 18 TINT TINT AUR 7 18 BRIGHTNESS CBRI lt Value gt o 7 18 COLOR COLOR lt Value gt e 7 18 RESET COLOR RSCO o 7 18 RETURN e 7 18 e 7 19 TAN 7 19 AUTO FREQ CONTROL e eo 7 19 CABLE LOSS COMPEN e 7 19 Contents 6 FM DEV CAL Automatic Frequency Control Menu AFC on OFF AFC OFF O ONI 1 TARGET AFCTARG lt Value gt TOLERANCE AFCTOL lt Value gt SENSITIVIY AFCSENS lt Value gt AFC MAX CTRL VOLT AFCMAXV lt Value gt AFC MIN CTRL VOLT AFCMINV lt Value gt MAX ITERATION AFCITER lt Value gt RETURN o Cable Loss Compensation Menu o COMPEN on OFF LCOMP OFF OION 1 SLOPE SLOPE lt Value gt LOSS LOSS lt Value gt RETURN o FM Deviation Calibration Menu o EXECUTE DEV CAL DEVCAL DEV CORR on OFF DEVCORR OFFIOIONI1 RETURN Measurement Bloc
118. Analyzer Mode Menu RF ATTEN RFATT lt Value gt Sets the input attenuator of the 4352B or the 43521A Downconverter Unit During measurement CAUTION Set RF ATT 5dB Less or CAUTION Set RF ATT 5dB More may appear In this case use one of the following methods to change the input attenuator value until the CAUTION display disappears m Press and RF ATTEN The current input attenuator value is displayed as RF ATTEN xx dB Press the key or the f key to change the input attenuator value E Press and RF ATTEN The current input attenuator value is displayed as RF ATTEN xx dB Use the numeric entry keys to change the input attenuator value in steps of 5 dB The input attenuator of the 4352B and that of the 43521A provide 0 dB to 25 dB and 0 dB to 35 dB respectively in steps of 5 dB Therefore you cannot specify a value that is not a multiple of 5 dB In the following cases the setting is applied to the input attenuator of the 4352B m When using the 4352B alone without connecting the 43521A E When the 43521A Downconverter Unit is connected DOWNCONV ON off is set to ON and the frequency band is set to 10 MHz to 3 GHz If DOWNCONV ON off is set to ON and the frequency band is set to a range other than 10 MHz to 3 GHz the setting is applied to the input attenuator of the 43521A If you try to make a setting of 0 dB the message MAXIMUM RF INPUT POWER IS 19dBm FOR OdB ATTEN CONTINUE may appear After checking that the R
119. C Voltages Apply the DC power voltage and DC control voltage to the DUT 1 Press Dc Power or Dc Control If the above keys have already been pressed in the setup you do not need to press them again 2 Press OUTPUT on OFF to toggle it OUTPUT ON off The DC power voltage and DC control voltage are applied to the DUT Note m OUTPUT on OFF can be selected in either DC Control or DC Power i No matter which key is used the DC control voltage and DC power voltage Y are both simultaneously applied to the device A message that reads as follows may be displayed on the LCD In this case press Sense Range RF ATTEN and the entry keys to set the RF attenuation value according to the instruction Example If the following message is displayed use RF ATTEN to set the attenuation 5 dB less than its current value CAUTION Set RF ATT 5 dB Less 6 3 RF Power Measurement The level of the carrier signal from the VCO is measured 1 Make sure that the modulation signal output is OFF Look at the measurement setting parameters on the screen and confirm that OFF is displayed in the MOD column If the modulation output value is displayed in MOD perform the following steps to turn the modulation signal output OFF Press Mod Press MOD OUT ON off to toggle it to MOD OUT on OFF 2 Select RF power measurement as the measurement item Press Meas RF POWER The measured RF power value is displayed on the screen
120. Changes the X coordinate of the fixed A marker reading FIXEDAMKR VALUE DMKRVAL lt Value gt Changes the Y coordinate of the fixed A marker reading RETURN Returns to the previous menu 8 28 Measurement Block Analyzer Mode MARKER SEARCH MENU MKR_ SEARCH gt SEARCH PEAK MAX MIN TARGET SEARCH TRK on OFF SEARCH RANGE SUB MKR RETURN PEAK NEXT PEAK NEXT PEAK LEFT NEXT PEAK RIGHT PEAK DEF MENU SUB MKR RETURN TARGET SEARCH LEFT SEARCH RIGHT SUB MKR Analyzer Mode THRESHOLD on OFF THRESHOLD VALUE MKR THRESHOLD PEAK DEF AY RETURN SUB MKR 1 RETURN PART SRCH on OFF MKRA gt SEARCH RNG MKR gt LEFT RNG MKR gt RIGHT RNG RETURN CLEAR SUB MKRS RETURN Figure 8 11 Softkey Menus Accessed from Menu Key Analyzer Mode 3 3 Marker Search Menu SEARCH PEAK SEAM PEAK Moves the marker to the maximum minimum peak and displays the Peak menu used to search for the next peak The peak search function searches for the peak that matches the definition specified in the Define Peak menu See the Define Peak menu for details on peak definitions MAX SEAM MAX Moves the marker to the maximum Y coordinate value on the trace MIN SEAM MIN Moves the marker to the minimum Y coordinate value on the trace TARGET SEAM TARG Moves the marker to the specified target point on the trace and displays the Ta
121. DUT Output voltage range Without option 001 0 to 20 Vdc With Option 001 15 to 35 Vde 8 MOD OUT Modulation Signal Output Connector Provides the modulation signal to the DUT 9 Built In Flexible Disk Drive Stores the measurement data instrument status and Instrument BASIC programs The applicable disk formats are LIF logical interchange format and DOS disk operating system format 10 LINE Switch Controls ac power to the 4352B is on O is OFF Front and Rear Panel 2 3 Screen Display Tester Mode The measured value and measurement information for the current selected parameter is displayed on the LCD For each item of information displayed on the LCD its display location is indicated with a label in Figure 2 2 and each item is explained below The screen can also be used as the Instrument BASIC display Instrument BASIC uses either a full screen display or a half screen display below the measurement display as a text screen When the graphic function is used in Instrument BASIC select the full screen display 1 Measurement Item 2 Auto Freq Control ON OFF 3 Softkey Labels 11 Title 10 Message HPA Ea Area 9 Status Notations 8 Measured T Value 7 Memory A Content TAR Ji 5 Measurement 4 Measurement 6 LO Frequency Para
122. EARCH LEFT SEAL Searches left for the next target value on the trace 8 30 Measurement Block Analyzer Mode Analyzer Mode SEARCH RIGHT SEAR Searches right for the next target value on the trace SUB MKR Displays the Sub marker menu used to put the sub marker on the present marker position RETURN Returns to the previous menu Search Range Menu PART SRCH on OFF PARS OFF O ON 1 Turns the partial search function ON or OFF The search range is defined by two small triangles A at the bottom of the GRATICULE If no search range is defined the search range is the entire trace MKRA SEARCH RNG SEARSTR Specifies the range between the marker and the A readings as the partial search range MKR LEFT RNG SEARSTRL Specifies the current marker position as the left hand boundary of the partial search range MKR RIGHT RNG SEARSTRR Specifies the current marker position as the right hand boundary of the partial search range RETURN Returns to the previous menu Define Peak Menu THRESHOLD on OFF PKTHRE OFF 0 0N 1 Turns the threshold ON or OFF When the threshold is ON the 4352B searches only peaks whose levels are higher than the threshold value THRESHOLD VALUE PKTHVAL lt Value gt Specifies the threshold value MKR THRESHOLD MKRTHRE Specifies the Y coordinate of the current marker position as the threshold value PEAK DEF AY PKDLTY lt Value gt Specifies the peak AY value u
123. ED PRODUCT Ground The Instrument To avoid electric shock hazard the instrument chassis and cabinet must be connected to a safety earth ground by the supplied power cable with earth blade DO NOT Operate In An Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable gasses or fumes Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard Keep Away From Live Circuits Operating personnel must not remove instrument covers Component replacement and internal adjustments must be made by qualified maintenance personnel Do not replace components with the power cable connected Under certain conditions dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cable removed To avoid injuries always disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them DO NOT Service Or Adjust Alone Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present DO NOT Substitute Parts Or Modify Instrument Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards do not install substitute parts or perform unauthorized modifications to the instrument Return the instrument to a Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained Dangerous Procedure Warnings Warnings such as the example below precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual
124. EMA 6 15P 250V 6A Plug SEV Type 12 250V 10A Cable 8120 0698 Cable 8120 2104 OPTION 912 Denmark OPTION 917 India Republic of S Africa Plug SR 107 2 D 250V 10A Plug IEC 83 B1 250V 10A Cable 8120 2956 Cable 8120 4211 OPTION 918 OPTION 920 Argentina Plug JIS C 8303 125V 12A Plug Argentine Resolution 63 Annex IV 250V 10A Cable 8120 4753 Cable 8120 6870 OPTION 921 OPTION 922 Plug CEI 23 16 250V 10A Plug GB 1002 250V 10A Cable 8120 6978 Cable 8120 8376 NOTE Each option number includes a family of cords and connectors of various materials and plug body configurations straight 90 etc OPTOXXE Figure 3 1 Power Cable Supplied 3 4 Installation and Setup Guide NReplacing Fuse Fuse Selection Select proper fuse according to the Table 3 2 Table 3 2 Fuse Selection Fuse Rating Type Fuse Part Number UL CSA type 2110 0030 For ordering the fuse contact your nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office Replacing Fuse LINE Fuse 280 va 118 Vo 50 60 Hz 300 VA Max Lever a small minus screwdriver to dismount the fuse holder above the AC line receptacle on the rear panel To check or replace the fuse pull the fuse holder and remove the fuse To reinstall the fuse insert a fuse with the proper rating into the fuse holder Caution Use the prope
125. EMO 712 DATA and MEMORY DISP DATM 712 DATA MEMORY DATMEM o 712 DATA HOLD CDHOLD OFF MAX MIN 7 12 DATA MATH MATH DATA DPLM DMNM DDVM 713 MORE Cc 7 13 Display MORE Menu Ve 7 14 ALLOCAT N ALL INSTR DISA ALLI Ce e ee 7 14 HALF INSTR HALF BASIC DISA HTHB e 7 14 ALL BASIC DISA ALLB o 7 14 BASIC STATUS DISA BASS ee 7 14 PARAMS ON off PARMOFFIOION 1 7 14 TITLE TITL lt Character String gt 40 4 7 14 ADJUST DISPLAY 2 2 a a a a 7 14 RETURN Ce e 7 14 Status Notation of the Program Execution Ce 7 15 Contents 5 Character Input Menu ccccclll 7 16 SELECT LETTER 7 16 SPACE ll e 7 16 BACK SPACE 22 4 Cc e 7 16 ERASE TITLE o 7 16 DONE o 7 16 CANCEL 2 ee eee e 7 16 Display Adjustment Menu Ce 7 16 INTENSITY INTE lt Value gt Ce e e a 7 16 BACKGROUND INTENSITY BACI lt Value gt 02 7 16 MODIFY COLORS 22 e 7 16 DEFAULT COLORS DEFC e 7 16 SAVE COLORS SVCO 2 e 7 16 RECALL COLORS RECC e 7 16 RETURN Ce e e 7 16 First Color Adjustment Menu Ce 7 17 DATA COLO DATA e 7 17 MEMORY COLO MEMO 2 2 e 7 17 LIMIT LINE PARAMETER COLO PARAM 2 2 40 7 17 GR
126. ENT Z oA AHL AHF e E E VAY 7 CONTROL E Z ta Ez Ca Cz 2 E AeA G DUT INTERFACE MOD OUT DO CONTROL DG POWER 9 Built in Flexible Disk Drive 10 LINE Switch 8 MOD OUT Connector CD000201 5 RF Input Connector 6 DC POWER OUTPUT Connector 4 LO Input Connector 7 DC CONTROL Output Connector Figure 2 1 4352B Front Panel Front and Rear Panel 2 1 1 Front Panel Keys and Softkeys Some of the front panel keys change instrument functions directly and others provide access to additional functions available in softkey menus Softkey menus are lists of up to eight related functions that can be displayed in the softkey label area at the right hand side of the display The eight keys to the right of the LCD are the softkeys Pressing one of the softkeys selects the adjacent menu function This either executes the labeled function makes it active to select the status and to entry numeric value displays 4352B status information or presents another softkey menu There are two types of menus thos
127. EY LETTER MENU CHANGE YES NO HOUR MIN SEC ENTER CANCEL MONTH DAY YEAR ENTER CANCEL START PARAM UPPER LIMIT LOWER LIMIT STOP PARAM UPPER LIMIT LOWER LIMIT ENTER RETURN CLEAR YES NO LIMIT LINE on OFF DATA UPPER DATA gt LOWER DATAUPPER DATA LOWER RETURN CD009004 Figure 10 5 Softkey Menus Accessed from System Key Analyzer Mode 1014 Instrument State Block Menu IBASIC Displays the Instrument BASIC menu used to operate Instrument BASIC MEMORY PARTITION Displays the Memory Partition menu used to specify the size of the memory areas for Instrument BASIC and the RAM disk SEI CLOCK Displays the Timer Setup menu used to set the internal real time clock BEEPER MENU Displays the Beeper menu used to set the beeper LIMIT MENU Analyzer Mode Displays the Limit menu SERVICE MENU Displays the Service menu Instrument State Block 10 15 Instrument BASIC Menu Step Executes one program line at a time This is very useful during debugging Continue Resumes program execution from the point where it paused Run Executes a program from the beginning Pause Pauses program execution after the current program line is executed Stop Stops program execution at the current line Edit Enters into the EDIT mode and displays the BASIC edit menu ON KEY LABELS Displays the user keys defined with BASIC Us
128. Error Messages Numerical Order 133 LIF DOS COPY NOT ALLOWED Indicates that you tried to copy a file between different formatted disks For example if you try to copy a file between the RAM disk and the flexible disk when the format of the RAM disk is different from the format of the flexible disk this message is displayed 134 NO STATE DATA FILES ON MEMORY There are no files with extensions _D or _S for LIF format or STA or DTA for DOS format in the RAM disk memory 135 DUPLICATE FILE EXTENSION The extension name entered is already used for other file types Use a different extension name 137 NO DATA TRACE DISPLAYED Indicates that SCALE FOR DATA was pressed when no data trace is displayed 138 NO MEMORY TRACE DISPLAYED Indicates that SCALE FOR MEMORY was selected when no memory trace is displayed 144 CAN T CHANGE NUMBER OF POINTS The number of points in the spectrum measurement cannot be to change manually except in zero span 159 INSUFFICIENT Memory If a lot of tasks are executed at the same time memory might be insufficient for a while For example running Instrument BASIC program printing a screen and sending or receiving data array by GPIB are requested at the same time Wait until finishing some tasks then execute the next task 160 WRONG I O PORT DIRECTION The direction setting for the I O port input or output is incorrect Verify that a signal from an external instrumen
129. F The word off is capitalized showing that averaging is currently OFF Softkeys that Show Status Indications in Brackets Some softkey labels show the current status of a function in brackets These softkeys only display status For example the type of the data holding function is indicated in the brackets of DATA HOLDI 2 GPIB REMOTE Indicator Lights when the 4352B is in the remote state 2 2 Front and Rear Panel 3 key Returns the 4352B to a known standard preset state A complete listing of the 4352B preset conditions is provided in Appendix E 4 LO IN LO Input Connector Receives the output signal from the external signal generator If you use this instrument by connecting it to the 43521A Downconverter Unit use this connector for connection to the LO OUT terminal of the 455214 5 RF IN RF Input Connector Receives the RF output signal from the device under test DUT If you use this instrument by connecting it to the 43521A Downconverter Unit use this connector for connection to the RF OUT terminal of the 43521A INSTALLATION CATEGORY I Caution N Do not exceed the operating input power voltage and current level Y and signal type appropriate for the instrument being used refer to your instrument s function reference 6 DC POWER Power Voltage Output Connector Provides the DC Power voltage to the DUT N 7 DC CONTROL Control Voltage Output Connector Provides the DC Control voltage to the
130. F input is 19 dBm or less press Yes Measurement Block Analyzer Mode 8 5 Analyzer Mode If it is greater than 19 dBm press no If you enter a value larger than 19 dBm when the input attenuator is set O dB the 4352B or the 43521A may be damaged SENS PLRIY POS neg SENSPOL POS NEG Sets the polarity gradient df dv of the frequency vs control voltage characteristics of the DUT If the frequency increases as the control voltage increases select POS if it decreases select NEG There are 2 purposes of setting the polarity m To decrease the number of times the frequency of the external signal source is changed during measurement to shorten the measurement time a To grasp the measurement frequency correctly to make correct measurement If you use the 4352B alone not using the 43521A or if you use the 43521A within the frequency band of 10 MHz to 3 GHz this polarity setting is valid only when the frequency vs control voltage characteristics measurement is performed and the frequency resolution FREQ RES is set to 1 kHz If the frequency resolution FREQ RES is set to 64 kHz this polarity setting is not used If the 43521A Downconverter Unit is used and the frequency band is not the range of 10 MHz to 3 GHz this polarity setting takes effect regardless of the frequency resolution setting for the RF power vs control voltage characteristics measurement and the frequency vs control voltage characteristics measurement T
131. Handbook Manual Supplement Manual Supplement for Instrument BASIC Users Handbook ae 2 The number indicated by x in the part number of each manual is allocated for numbers increased by one each time a revision is made The latest edition comes with the product Power Requirements The 4352B requires the following power source Voltage 90 to 132 Vac 198 to 264 Vac Frequency 47 to 63 Hz Power 300 VA maximum Power Cable In accordance with international safety standards this instrument is equipped with a three wire power cable When connected to an appropriate ac power outlet this cable grounds the instrument frame The type of power cable shipped with each instrument depends on the country of destination Refer to Figure 3 1 for the part numbers of the power cables available 3 2 Installation and Setup Guide Warning For protection from electrical shock the power cable ground must not be defeated A The power plug must be plugged into an outlet that provides a protective earth ground connection Installation and Setup Guide 3 3 OPTION 900 q United Kingdom OPTION 901 Australia New Zealand Plug BS 1363 A 250V 10A Plug AS3112 250V 10A Cable 8120 1351 Cable 8120 1369 OPTION 902 Continental Europe OPTION 903 U S Canada Plug CEE 7 Standard Sheet VII 250V 10A Plug NEMA 5 15P 125V 10A Cable 8120 1689 Cable 8120 1378 OPTION 904 U S Canada OPTION 906 Switzerland Plug N
132. Hz 2 2 Responses out of the measurement range Consider the setting in which the frequency conversion by the mixer is performed see Table C 2 If the measurement signal frequency approaches and then exceeds the local frequency the same IF frequency is obtained again In this case if you observe the IF frequency only you cannot find out whether the measurement signal frequency is higher or lower than the local frequency If there is a confusion about this a contrary calculation addition or subtraction is performed and a wrong frequency is displayed If the measurement signal frequency goes out of the range between the minimum and maximum measurement frequencies this problem may occur When measuring the time required to reach the end frequency for example in PLL transient measurement this problem does not occur because the end frequency is known However for example when you observe the signal during a transient you must notice this problem because the measured signal may go out of the range between the minimum and maximum measurement frequencies To check to see if the frequency measurement is performed accurately change the target frequency by 100 kHz and perform measurement again If the measured frequency value does not change the measurement is performed correctly If the displayed frequency is shifted by 200 kHz the measurement is wrong The following example explains this phenomenon assuming that you measure a fre
133. IBASIC status information under the measurement screen Three status lines are located under the measurement screen TITLE TITL lt Character String gt Displays the Character Input menu A title can be specified for each measurement item ADJUST DISPLAY Displays the Display Adjustment menu RETURN Returns to the previous menu Character Input Menu SELECT LETIER Selects the on screen character pointed to by the arrow 7 You can use the rotary knob to move the arrow Use f and J to switch character sets on the screen SPACE Inserts a space into the title BACK SPACE Deletes the last character entered ERASE TITLE Deletes the entire title DONE Terminates the title entry and returns to the Display MORE menu 8 18 Measurement Block Analyzer Mode Analyzer Mode CANCEL Cancels the entry of title and returns to the Display MORE menu without any changes Display Adjustment Menu INTENSITY INTE lt Value gt Specifies the display intensity as a percentage of the highest brightness level BACKGROUND INTENSITY BACI lt Value gt Specifies the background display intensity as a percentage of white level MODIFY COLORS Displays the First Color Adjustment menu DEFAULT COLORS DEFC Resets all color settings to the default settings factory settings SAVE COLORS SVCO Stores the modified version of the color settings into the backup memory RECALL COLORS RECC Recalls the previo
134. If the signal is generated check its frequency Press Sense Range MAX TRANS FREQ or MIN TRANS FREQ and the entry keys to change the detection bandwidth if required 18 RF Level Overload The input level to the 4352B RF IN connector is too high 20 dBm or more Verify the input level to the 4352B RF IN connector Also this message is displayed if a negative DC voltage component is included in the DUT s output signal during RF Power Level measurement In this case insert a filter between the DUT s output terminal and the 4352B RF IN connector to eliminate the DC voltage component Caution Continuously applying excessive input to the 4352B will cause failures 128 SAVE ERROR A serious error occurred when the file was being saved For example this is displayed when the disk surface is physically damaged 27 SG not on not connect wrong address Indicates that the external signal generator did not respond when the 4352B tried to control the external signal generator via GPIB Verify the external signal generator is turned ON the GPIB cable connection is proper the GPIB address setting for the external signal generator is proper etc 330 Self test failed The self test failed Either contact our service office or see the Service Manual 47 Set Noise ATT 10 dB More Press Sense Range NOISE ATTN and the entry keys to set a value 10 dB higher than the current setting Messages 13 Error Messages Alphabetical
135. Item 1 a a a 2 4 2 Automatic Frequency Control ON OFF 0 0 2 2 48 2 4 3 Softkey Labels 2 4 4 Measurement Time 2 1 1 a a 2 5 5 Measurement Parameters 2 5 6 LO Frequency oaoa a A 2 5 7 Memory Content 1 A 2 5 8 Measured Value 2 1 1 A 2 5 9 Status Notations 2 a 2 5 10 Message Area 2 ww ww a 2 6 ll Title 22 2 a a 2 6 Screen Display Analyzer Mode 2 ee ee ee 2 7 1 Measurement Item 1 a a a 2 7 2 DIVREF 2 ww 2 7 3 Marker Reading 2 7 4 Softkey Labels aa 2 8 5 PASS FAIL lcclll 2 8 6 Carrier Frequency llcccllll a 2 8 7 Measurement Parameters 1 1 a a 2 8 8 Status Notations 2 a a a 2 8 9 Message Area 1 A 2 8 Contents 1 10 Title 2 A 2 8 Rear Panel 2 ww a 2 9 1 External Reference Input 2 9 2 Internal Reference Output 2 2 0 a a 2 9 3 External Program RUN CONT Input 2 0 2 9 4 Port 2 e 2 10 5 Inlet with fuse box 2 10 6 GPIB Interface 2 10 7 External Monitor Terminal a aaa ee 2 10 8 Parallel Interface Connector o oao a a e a 2 10 9 24 Bit I O Interface 2 2 2 10 10 mini DIN Keyboard Connector k a a a ee eee 2 10 11 External Trigger Input 2 10 12 40 MHz Output Connector oaoa a a a 2 10 13 and 14 Second IF Input Output Connectors 2 10 3 Installation and Setup Guide Incoming Inspection ccccclcll a 3 1 Co
136. Japan Dec 15 2000 Moda AMAS r Date Name Koichi Yanagaw uality Engineering Manager For further information please contact your local Agilent Technologies sales office agent or distributor Herstellerbescheinigung GERAUSCHEMISSION LpA lt 70 dB am Arbeitsplatz normaler Betrieb nach DIN 45635 T 19 Manufacturer s Declaration ACOUSTIC NOISE EMISSION LpA lt 70 dB operator position normal operation per ISO 7779 Agilent 4352B VCO PLL Signal Analyzer Function Reference SERIAL NUMBERS This manual applies directly to instruments that have the firmware revision 2 x For additional information about firmware revisions see in Appendix A o Agilent Technologies Agilent Part No 04352 90090 Printed in JAPAN July 2003 Eighth Edition Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written consent of the Agilent Technologies Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd Component Test PGU Kobe 1 3 2 Murotani Nishi ku Kobe shi Hyogo 651 2241 Japan Copyright 1997 1998 1999 2001 2003 Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd Manual Printing History The manual s printing date and part number indicate its current edition The printing date changes when a new
137. KER to display the marker You can read the value of each Basic Measurements Using the 43521A 5 23 measurement point using the marker The tuning sensitivity characteristic is displayed on the memory trace Therefore to read tuning sensitivity values at measurement points using the marker press and press MKR ON xxx to toggle it MKR ON MEMORY Note If the measurement value is not your expected value check that the DC i outputs are ON DC appears if the DC outputs are OFF and that the Y modulation output is OFF Note For the frequency resolution selection function the averaging function the i marker function and the tuning sensitivity aperture function see Chapter 8 Y Note To eliminate the effect of the transient of the DC control voltage before sweep sweep starts after the time specified with CTRL DELAY under Dc Control elapses The delay time is not included in the sweep time and is applicable only to the Ist measurement point To provide delay time for 2nd and later measurement points you need to specify a proper sweep time 5 24 Basic Measurements Using the 43521A 3 3 Phase Noise vs Offset Frequency Characteristics Measurement DUT VCO In this section you measure the phase noise characteristic with respect to the offset frequency from the carrier of the DUT VCO Unlike the C N Carrier Noise ratio measurement in the tester mode the measurement value is negative 1 Preparations for m
138. LL The program flow of Figure C 4 shows a concrete procedure For details on each command see 4352B GPIB Programming Manual C 10 Technical Information Technical Information 100 ASSIGN Hp4352 TO 800 Insert a program to set measurement parameters 180 OUTPUT Hp4352 TRGOUT ON Turn ON Trigger Detection Output Function 190 OUTPUT Hp4352 0UTIENVH Perform Setting OUTPUT 1 HIGH Synchronously with Measurement Trigger Insert a program to set the instrument 350 OUTPUT Hp4352 0UT1L Set DUTPUTi to LOW Insert program to send PLL divider data 1 430 OUTPUT Hp4352 0UT1H Set Divider Data 1 to PLL 440 OUTPUT Hp4352 0UT1L Set OUTPUT1 to LOW Insert program to send PLL divider data 2 490 EXECUTE SING Set Divider Data 2 to PLL on Measurement Start Figure C 4 Program flow for the PLL frequency transient measurement 1 TRGOUT ON in line 180 sets the trigger detection output function 2 Line 190 sets OUT1ENVH in advance This command causes OUTPUT of the 24 bit I O port on the 4352B s rear panel to go HIGH when a measurement trigger is generated This signal is supplied to the load terminal of the PLL 3 Line 350 causes OUTPUT of the 24 bit I O port on the 4352B s rear panel to LOW This resets the PLL load terminal The next HIGH sets the load terminal and causes the divider data divide ratio signal that has been sent to the data terminals to be acquired into the PLL 4 Next
139. Modulation Signal Amplitude NOISE BW Setting only during C N or phase noise measurement Offset Frequency only during C N measurement in tester mode Detection Bandwidth Low Frequency Cutoff Frequency only during FM deviation measurement in tester mode o Detection Bandwidth High Frequency Cutoff Frequency only during FM deviation measurement in tester mode Sweep time only in analyzer mode Number of measurement points only in analyzer mode Reference frequency only in frequency transient measurement in analyzer mode m Title Line The title line shows the name of the data saved in an ASCII file The data name saved is explained in a following section a Data Part The data part includes the values of data or memory Table D 3 and Table D 4 shows an example of ASCII data file saved in the tester and analyzer modes respectively Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data D 5 ASCII File Structure Table D 3 Example of ASCII Data File Contents Tester Mode Block Names Contents Status Block 4352B REV1 00 DATE Jun 01 1997 Data Block State TITLE This is a title MEASURE TYPE Carrier Noise UNIT dBc RF ATT 10 dB CONTROL VOLTAGE 2 V POWER VOLTAGE 4 3 V MOD AMPLITUDE 0 5 Vrms NOISE BAND WIDTH 1 Hz for C N or DETECTION HPF 300 Hz for FM deviation C N OFFSET 10 kHz for C N or DETECTION LPF 3 kHz FM deviation Title Line Data Memory
140. N CENELEC EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd Manufacturer s Address 1 3 2 Murotani Nishi ku Kobe shi Hyogo 651 2241 Japan Declares that the product Product Name VCO PLL Signal Analyzer Model Number 4352B Product Options This declaration covers all options of the above product Conforms with the following product standards EMC Standard Limit IEC 61326 1 1997 A1 1998 EN 61326 1 1997 A1 1998 CISPR 11 1997 EN 55011 1998 AS NZS 2064 1 2 Group 1 Class AM IEC 61000 4 2 1995 EN 61000 4 2 1995 A1 1998 4kV CD 4 kV AD IEC 61000 4 3 1995 EN 61000 4 3 1996 A1 1998 3 Vim 80 AM 80 1000 MHz IEC 61000 4 4 1995 EN 61000 4 4 1995 0 5 kV signal lines 1 kV power lines IEC 61000 4 5 1995 EN 61000 4 5 1995 0 5 kV line line 1 kV line ground IEC 61000 4 6 1996 EN 61000 4 6 1996 3 V 80 AM 0 15 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 11 1994 EN 61000 4 11 1994 1 cycle 100 Canada ICES 001 Safety IEC 61010 1 1990 A1 1992 A2 1995 EN 61010 1 1993 A2 1995 CAN CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 92 Conformity Supplementary Information The product herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC including 93 68 EEC and carries the CE marking accordingly European Union LEDs in this product are Class 1 in accordance with EN 60825 1 1994 fi The product was tested in a typical configuration with Agilent Technologies test systems Kobe
141. NTS POIN lt Value gt 2 242 8 24 SWEEP TIME SWET lt Value gt e 8 24 MARKER MENU 2 1 a a a aaa aa 8 24 RETURN e 8 24 Marker Menu 2 2 2 ee 8 24 MKR START MKRSTAR aaa 8 24 MKR STOP MKRSTOP 2 ee ee ee ee 8 24 MKR CENTER MKRCENT 2 2 1 eee eee ee 8 24 RETURN 2 en o 8 24 Automatic Frequency Control Menu 2 2 a 8 24 AFC on OFF AFCOFFIOJONI1 Ca ea ea ea a 8 25 TARGET AFCTARG lt Value gt Ce 8 25 Contents 10 TOLERANCE AFCTOL lt Value gt a a 8 25 SENSITIVITY AFCSENS lt Value gt 2 a eee es 8 25 AFC MAX CTRL VOLT AFCMAXV lt Value gt 8 25 AFC MIN CTRL VOLT CAFCMINV lt Value gt 0 8 25 MAX ITERATION AFCITER lt Value gt 0 8 25 RETURN 2 2 2 A 8 25 Marker Menu 2 A 8 26 SUB MKR ww A 8 26 AMKR MENU tee ee 826 INTG NOISE on OFF MEATNOIS OFF lo 10N11 CINTGNOIS Ce 826 PRESET MKRS PRSMKRS 2 ee ee eee 8 26 MKR ON MKRO DATA MEMO 2 826 MKR CONT MKRCONTOFFIOIONI1 8 27 MKR LIST on OFF MKRLOFFIJOION 1 827 RETURN 2 2 2 A 8 27 Sub marker Menu a 8 27 SUB MKR 1 SMKR1 OFFJOJON 1 o 8 27 2 SMKR2 OFFIOIONI1 2 2 A 8 27 3 SMKR3 OFFIOIONI1 2 2 A 8 27 4 SMKR4 OFFIOION 1 2 2 o
142. O Note The unit to display the RF power can be changed For details see in i Chapter 7 Y Basic Measurements Using the 43521A 5 13 2 2 Frequency Measurement DUT VCO In this section you measure the frequency of the carrier signal outputted from the VCO 1 Preparing for the measurement Perform 1 Preparations for Measurements 1 1 to 1 9 in this chapter Connect a VCO as the DUT Making sure that the modulation output is OFF Look at the parameters displayed on the LCD screen and check that OFF is displayed in the MOD column If the modulation output value is displayed in MOD perform the following steps to turn the modulation output OFF Press Mod Press MOD QUT ON off to toggle it MOD OUT on OFF Performing signal search Press Meas FREQ BAND xx xx and SIGNAL SEARCH SIGNAL FOUND x xxx GHz appears on the screen Press NOMINAL FREQUENCY and check that the value displayed on the screen is the same as the frequency of the signal search result NOMINAL FREQUENCY x xxx GHz Selecting the measurement mode Select the tester mode Press Meas INST TYPE and VCO TESTER in this order The menu whose top item is MEAS RF POWER appears Select the frequency measurement mode Press FREQUENCY The measured value of the frequency is displayed on the LCD screen as shown in Figure 5 6 Dut Frequency ExR 5 783275 GHz RF ATT O dB CTRL 2 V POWER 5 Y MOD OFF FREQ RES 1 kHz
143. OFF together with ALL BASIC BASIC STATUS DISA BASS Displays the IBASIC status information under the measurement screen Three status lines are located under the measurement screen PARAMS ON off PARM OFF O ONI 1 Selects whether to display measurement setting parameters Selecting OFF can reduce the measurement time because the overhead time required for displaying the measurement setting parameters is eliminated Note also that you further reduce the measurement time by selecting ALL BASIC together with PARAMS on OFF TITLE TITL lt Character String gt Displays the Character Input menu The specified title is common and displayed for all measurement items ADJUST DISPLAY Displays the Display Adjustment menu RETURN Returns to the previous menu 7 14 Measurement Block Tester Mode Tester Mode Instrument Area Instrument Area hstrument Area 60 colums gt Print Out Area 11 lines Display Line Keyboad Input Line System Display Line RUN LIGHT RUN LIGHT ALL INSTRUMENT HALF INSTR HALF BASIC EC EC 60 colums gt 23 lines Print Out Area Instrument Area Display Line Display Line Keyboad Input Line Keyboad Input Line System Display Line 5 7 System Display Line RUN LIGHT RUN LIGHT ALL BASIC BASIC STATUS CD000601 Figure 7 8 Display Location The list below indicates the row
144. OISE RF TRANSIENT SPECTRUM FREQ BAND 10M 3G INST TYPE Frequency Band Menu cd00602 Figure 7 1 Softkey Menus Accessed from Meas Key Tester Mode Frequency Band Menu FREQ BAND 10M 3G Y FREQ BAND 10M 3G 2 5 3 6G 3 1 6 6G SIGNAL SEARCH NOMINAL FREQ RETURN FREQ BAND 10M 3G 2 5 3 6G 3 1 6 6G 5 4 9 0G SIGNAL SEARCH NOMINAL FREQ RETURN FREQ BAND 10M 3G 2 4 6 6G 5 4 12 6G SIGNAL SEARCH NOMINAL FREQ RETURN SG MAX FREQ lt 4 2GHz 4 2 GHz SG MAX FREQ lt 6 0 GHz 6 0 GHz lt SG MAX FREQ cd00603 Figure 7 2 Frequency band menu 7 2 Measurement Block Tester Mode Meas Tester Mode Meas Menu VCO Tester Menu MEAS RF POWER MEAS POWE Selects RF power as the measurement item FREQUENCY MEAS FREQ Selects frequency as the measurement item DC POWER CURRENT MEAS CURR Selects DC power current as the measurement item FM DEVIATION MEAS FMDEV Selects FM deviation as the measurement item CARRIER NOISE MEAS CN Selects C N ratio as the measurement item FREQ BAND 10M 3G FBAND lt value gt Lets you select the frequency band when you use the 43521A Downconverter Unit and have set DOWNCONV ON off under to ON Pressing this FREQ BAND xx xx key displays the frequency band menu that lets you select the frequency band used for your measurement example 3 1 6 6G Whe
145. OL auto MAN LOAUTO OFF OJON 1 9 3 LOIN 2 3 LOSS LOSS lt Value gt 7 21 8 33 LO SWICH TIME LOSWT lt Value gt 9 4 LOWER LIMIT 10 21 LP FILTER 15kHz DTLPF FC15KHZ 7 8 LP FILTER 20kHz DTLPF FC20KHZ 7 9 LP FILTER 8kHz DTLPF FC3KHZ 7 8 M Man 2 5 2 8 manual changes A 1 manual trigger wait display Man 2 5 2 8 MARKER 8 23 marker reading 2 7 MARKER MENU 8 24 MAX SEAM MAX 8 29 MAX CTRL VOLTAGE MAXVCTRL lt Value gt 9 9 MAX ITERATION AFCITER lt Value gt 7 20 8 25 MAX xxxxMHz TRSPAN TSMAX 8 7 Meas 1 2 7 2 8 2 MEAS RF POWER MEAS POWE RF POWER 7 3 measurement block 1 2 Measurement Block 7 1 8 1 Measurement Block 7 1 8 1 measurement items analyzer mode 11 4 measurement items in analyzer mode 11 4 measurement items in tester mode 11 1 measurement items tester mode 11 1 MEASURE RESTART REST 9 6 MEM on OFF SAVMEM OFF O 0N 1 10 8 memory D 2 MEMORY DISP MEMO 8 17 DISPLAY MEMORY DISP MEMO 7 12 MEMORY COLO MEM 8 19 MEMORY PARTITION 10 15 Menu 1 3 7 19 8 22 menu 2 2 message area 2 6 2 8 MIN SEAM MIN 8 29 MIN CTRL VOLTAGE MINVCTRL lt Value gt 9 8 MKR CONT MKRCONT OFF O 0N 1 8 27 MKRA SEARCH RNG SEARSTR 8 31 MKR LIST on OFF MKRL OFF O ON 1 8 27 MKR ON DATA MKRO DATA MEMO 8 26 MKR REFERENCE MKRREF 8 16 MKR SEARCH 8 23 MKR CENTER MKRCENT 8 24 MKR CTRL VOLT
146. ON POS PEAK E NEG PEAK E SAMPLE E INTG NOISE on OFF START STOP CENTER SPAN NUMBER of POINTS SWEEP TIME MARKER gt MENU MKR gt START RETURN MKR gt STOP R AFC on OFF MKR gt CENTER TARGET RETURN TOLERANCE SENSITIVITY Menu AFC MAX CTRL VOLT Menu AFC MIN CTRL VOLT SWEEP MAX ITERATION AUTO FREQ CONTROL RETURN MARKER MARKER MENU MKR SEARCH MARKER SEARCH MENU CARRIER MENU CARRIER CENTER CABLE LOSS COMPEN 2x CARR CENTER 3x CARR gt CENTER RETURN gt COMPEN on OFF SLOPE LOSS RETURN Figure A 7 Softkey menu called from the Menu key for serial number JP1KE Manual Changes A 5 START STOP CENTER SPAN NUMBER of POINTS SWEEP TIME MARKER MENU MKR gt START RETURN MKR STOP MKR gt CENTER AFC on OFF RETURN TARGET TOLERANCE Menu SENSITIVITY AFC MAX CTRL VOLT AFC MIN CTRL VOLT SWEEP MAX ITERATION SWEEP TYPE LOG FREQ RETURN AUTO FREQ CONTROL MARKER gt MARKER MENU MKR SEARCH gt MARKER SEARCH MENU DETECTION SAMPLE CARRIER MENU CABLE LOSS COMPEN CARRIER CENTER 2 x CARR CENTER 3 x CARR CENTER RETURN DETECTION POS PEAK NEG PEAK SAMPLE RETURN COMPEN on OFF SLOPE LOSS RETURN cd0j0702 Figure A 8 Softkey menu called from the Menu key current MARKER MENU
147. Provides a tutorial guide for measuring VCOs and PLLs with the 4352B Chapter 5 Explains basic procedures to measure VCOs and PLLs using the 4352B and the 43521A Downconverter Unit Chapter 6 Explains the functions accessible via the ENTRY block Chapter 7 Explains the functions accessible via the MEASUREMENT block when the analyzer operates in the tester mode Chapter 8 Explains the functions accessible via the MEASUREMENT block when the analyzer operates in the analyzer mode Chapter 9 Explains the functions accessible via the CONTROL block Chapter 10 Explains the functions accessible via the INSTRUMENT STATE block Chapter 11 Lists the specifications of the 4352B Appendix A Contains the information required to adapt this manual to earlier versions or configurations of the analyzer than the current printing date of this manual Appendix B Provides an overview of GPIB and its functions available with the 4352B Appendix C Provides additional information on the phase noise vs offset frequency measurements and frequency transient measurements Appendix D Contains an overview of the save recall function and the information required when you use a data file stored with the save function Appendix E Lists input ranges preset values and power ON default settings Appendix F Helps you perform a quick guide diagnosis of your 4352B Document Guide Please utilize the following manuals when using the analyzer
148. R ah hl sie A Hla GARA 290 092 MHz PY ATN 5 dB NBW 1 Hz SWP 8 421 sec START 1 kHz Lo 224 MHz STOP 10 MHz Figure 4 6 Example of Measurement Screen Phase Noise Characteristics vs Offset Frequency 7 Read the measurement value Press Menu MARKER to display the marker The measurement value at the marker is displayed on the screen If the measured value does not match your expected value check that the DC outputs are ON DC appears if the DC outputs are OFF and that the modulation output is OFF For more information about the additional features for this measurement see Chapter 8 for the automatic frequency control averaging marker and noise attenuator functions Note In this measurement the sweep time can not be specified Only the query for i the sweep time is available Y When the automatic frequency control function is ON the carrier frequency is automatically set to the target frequency before the sweep starts The time required to set the carrier frequency to the target frequency is not included in the sweep time Also when the external signal generator needs to change its output frequency for a correct measurement the external signal generator changes the frequency and a certain time elapses before the sweep The time required for the frequency change of the external signal generator is not included in the sweep time
149. R SUB MKR SUB MKR 1 AMKR MENU 2 INTG NOISE on OFF 3 PRESET MKRS 4 MKR ON DATA CLEAR SUB MKRS MKR CONT RETURN MKR LIST on OF RETURN MKR FIXED AMKR TRACKING AMKR AMODE OFF AMKR SWP PARAM FIXED AMKR VALUE RETURN cdQj0704 Figure 8 10 Softkey Menus Accessed from Menu Key Analyzer Mode 2 3 Marker Menu SUB MKR Displays the Sub marker menu used to turn on the sub marker AMKR MENU Displays the A Marker menu used to calculate the difference between the marker and A marker readings INTG NOISE on OFF MEAINOIS OFF O ON 1 CINTGNOIS Sets the noise integration function in the phase noise measurement to ON OFF In the ON setting the measured noise values are integrated and displayed This function is available only for the linear sweep If the partial search function Menu MKR SEARCH SEARCH RANGE PART SEARCH on OFF is OFF measured values in the entire screen trace are integrated If the partial search function is ON measured values in the marker search range are integrated The noise integration measurement can be displayed as the measurement data trace Display DEF TRACE DISPLAY DATA only The memory trace MEMORY or DATA and MEMORY cannot be displayed If there is a spurious component within the range to be integrated the correct value cannot be obtained For the noise measurement set the detection mode Menu DETECTION SAMPLE to SAMPLE PRESET MKRS PRSMKR
150. REQ CONTROL Set the target frequency Press TARGET Press E O GD The target frequency is set to 800 MHz Set the allowable frequency tolerance Press TOLERANCE Press 9 O O Em The allowable frequency tolerance is set to 100 kHz Set the DUT tuning sensitivity Press SENSITIVITY Press 5 M 4 The tuning sensitivity is set to 5 MHz V Set the maximum iteration for the control voltage setting loop cycles Press MAX ITERATION Press 2 0 x1 The maximum iteration for the control voltage setting loop cycles is set to 20 Specify the upper and lower limits of the control voltage levels for the automatic frequency control function Press AFC MAX CTRL VOLT Press 5 x1 The maximum control voltage level is set to 5 V Next set the lower limit Press AFC MIN CTRL VOLT Press 1 x1 The minimum control voltage level is set to 1 V Turn ON the automatic frequency control function Press AFC on OFF to toggle it AFC ON off Press RETURN 4 46 Basic Measurement Procedures Note The automatic frequency control function is performed immediately before i the sweep or measurement starts During the entire measurement the DC Y control voltage is kept constant Therefore the DC control voltage level is not changed even if the actual frequency is shifted or changed during the entire measurement Be sure to take this into consideration for measurements that
151. RMAX lt value gt Sets the maximum frequency within the frequency transient measurement range m RF TRANS MIN FREQ TRMIN lt value gt Sets the minimum frequency within the frequency transient measurement range Manual Changes A 3 Renaming E Rename REF FREQ FOR SCALE to RF TRANS REF FREQ Deletion m TARGET FREQ E FREQ SPAN 2MHz E 20MHz E MAX xxxMHz E TARGET POSITION Sense Range RF ATTEN SENS PLRTY POS neg FREQ RES 1kHz 64kHz NOISE ATTEN RF TRANS MAX FREQ RF TRANS MIN FREQ RF TRANS REF FREQ Figure A 5 Softkey menu called from the Sense Range key for serial number JP1KE RF ATTEN RF ATTEN TARGET FREQ SENS PLRTY POS neg FREQ SPAN 2MHz FREQ RES 1kHz 20MHz 64kHz MAX 1536MHz NOISE ATTEN TARGET POSITION RETURN REF FREQ FOR SCALE MORE gt When RF TRANSIENT is selected in RF ATTEN gt vo RF ATTEN TARGET FREQ SENS PLRTY POS neg FREQ SPAN 2MHz FREQ RES 1kHz 20MHz 64kHz MAX 1536MHz NOISE ATTEN TARGET POSITION RF TRANS MENU REF FREQ RETURN When any parameter other than RF TRANSIENT is selected in d00701 Figure A 6 Softkey menu called from the key current A 4 Manual Changes Changes of softkeys under the Menu key only for analyzer mode Make the following changes in Figure A 8 and Figure A 10 to adapt them to Figure A 7 and Figure A 9 Deletion m SWEEP TYPE LOG FREQ E DETECTION SAMPLE E DETECTI
152. RRIER NOISE Specifying an offset frequency Press and OFFSET FREQ in this order The current setting is displayed on the screen as OFFSET FREQUENCY xx kHz Use the numeric entry keys to enter an offset frequency Example To specify 100 kHz press 1 0 0 and k m Note A large offset frequency used in the C N ratio measurement can result in i large fluctuations of the measurement data This occurs because the noise Y measurement resolution bandwidth used inside the 4352B increases due to the large offset frequency In this case specify a proper averaging factor to minimize the measurement fluctuations Setting the converted bandwidth for the noise measurement Press and NOISE BW The current setting is displayed on the screen as NOISE BAND WIDTH xx Hz Use the numeric entry keys to enter noise bandwidth Example To specify 1 Hz press 1 and x1 Note For the noise measurement internally performed in the 4352B the resolution bandwidth is uniquely determined based on the setting of OFFSET FREQ and Y cannot be changed by the user The noise level used for C N ratio measurement is the value converted to the noise bandwidth which you set with NOISE BW Setting the averaging factor Press and AVERAGING FACTOR The current setting is displayed on the screen as AVERAGE FACTOR xx Use the numeric entry keys to enter the averaging factor Example Press 8 and x1 5 16 Basic Measurements Using
153. Range Indicates the 2nd or 3rd harmonic target frequency is not within the 4352B measurement range The measurement range is set to 10 MHz to 3 GHz when the 4352B is used alone or set to the selected frequency band when used with 43521A Downconverter Unit when 2xCARR CENTER or 3 x CARR CENTER is selected in spectrum measurements At this time the previous measurement conditions still remain any of the sweep parameters start stop center or span values are not changed Check the DUT s output frequency Messages 14 Error Messages Alphabetical Order 82 Thermometer Out Of Range The 4352B s internal thermometer reading is out of the proper range Adjustment or repair is necessary Contact our service office or the company from which you purchased the 4352B 124 Too many digits The mantissa of a decimal numeric data element contains more than 255 digits excluding leading zeros see IEEE 488 2 7 7 2 4 1 223 Too much data A legal program data element of block expression or string type was received that contained more data than the 4352B could handle due to memory or related device specific requirements 210 Trigger error A trigger related error occurred This error message might be displayed if the 4352B detects an unknown problem related to errors 211 through 219 211 Trigger ignored A GET TRG or triggering signal was received and recognized by the 4352B but was ignored because
154. Recall Function Table D 2 Suffixes and Extensions Added Automatically Data Groups Suffixes for LIF Extensions for DOS Instrument State and Internal Data STATE 5 STA Internal Data Binary File SAVE BINARY _D DTA Internal Data ASCII File SAVE ASCII _I TXT Graphics Image as an HP GL File GRAPHICS G HPG Auto Recall Function When the analyzer is turned on it looks for a file named AUTOREC in the built in floppy disk If it finds this file the analyzer automatically reads the file to retrieve its data Note You must save the AUTOREC file in the floppy disk Do not save it into the RAM Y turned off disk memory because the RAM disk memory loses data when the power is D 4 Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data ASCII File Structure Internal Data SAVE ASCII File Structure For ASCII Files Numbers and strings in an ASCII file are delimited by tab codes Also strings are enclosed in double quotation marks Status Block and Data Block An ASCII data file consists of a status block and data blocks The status block consists of two lines the revision number and the date code The data block consists of three parts the state part the title line and the data part m State The state part consists of the following instrument states Title only when set Measurement Item Measurement Unit RE ATTEN Setting DC Control Voltage DC Power Voltage
155. S Turns all markers OFF MKR ON MKRO DATA MEMO Selects whether to use the marker on the data or memory trace 8 26 Measurement Block Analyzer Mode Analyzer Mode DATA Data trace MEM Memory trace MKR CONT MKRCONT OFF 0 0N 1 Toggles between the continuous and discontinuous maker mode MKR CONT interpolates between the measured points to allow the markers to be placed at any point on the trace Displayed marker values are also interpolated This is the default marker mode MKRI IDISCRETE places markers only on the measured trace points as determined by the stimulus settings DISCRETE The marker can only read values at measurement points determined based on x coordinates CONT Interpolates each interval between 2 adjacent measurement points so that the marker can read any value on the trace MKR LIST on OFF MKRL OFF O 0N 1 Turns the marker list function ON or OFF This function is used to display a list of the X and Y coordinates of all markers In the A mode X and Y coordinates of the A marker are also displayed RETURN Returns to the previous menu Sub marker Menu SUB MKR 1 SMKR1 OFF 0 0N 1 2 SMKR2 OFF 0 0N 1 3 SMKR3 OFF 0 0N 1 4 SMKR4 OFF 0 0N 1 The above keys are used to display the sub marker where the marker is currently displayed CLEAR SUB MKRS CLRSMKRS Turns OFF the sub marker RETURN Returns to the previous menu Measurement Block Analyzer Mode 8 27
156. S gt DEFAULT COLORS SAVE COLORS RECALL COLORS RETURN Figure 8 7 Softkey Menus Accessed from Display Key Analyzer Mode 1 2 Measurement Block Analyzer Mode 8 13 Analyzer Mode OCT mera DATA TINT MEMORY BRIGHTNESS LIMIT LINE PARAMETER COLOR GRATICULE RESET COLOR WARNING RETURN TEXT MARKER BASTE MORE PEN 1 RETURN PEN 2 PEN 3 PEN 4 PEN 5 PEN 6 RETURN Figure 8 8 Softkey Menus Accessed from Display Key Analyzer Mode 2 2 8 14 Measurement Block Analyzer Mode Analyzer Mode Menu AUTO SCALE AUTO Displays an automatically scaled trace data defined by SCALE FOR with one keystroke Sweep values are not affected only scale and reference values The 4352B optimizes the display scale to put all the displayed data onto the vertical GRATICULE SCALE REFERENCE Displays the Scale menu DEF TRACE DATA Displays the Define Trace menu DATA HOLD CDHOLD OFF MAX MIN The data hold function is used to keep the maximum or minimum value obtained in the continuous measurement mode displayed on the screen The following three softkeys are displayed BOLD OFF Data hold function OFF MAX Holds the maximum value obtained during the measurement MIN Holds the minimum value obtained during the measurement DATA MATH MATH DATA DPLM DMNM DDVM Displays the following softkeys to select the data math
157. STOP STOP lt Value gt Specifies the sweep stop value This softkey cannot be used in frequency transient measurements CENTER CENT lt Value gt Specifies the sweep center value This key is not available when you select the frequency transient measurement or the LOG sweep in the phase noise measurement Pressing this key displays the current setting as CENTER xxxGHz Use the numeric entry keys to enter the value Changing the sweep start value START the sweep stop value STOP or the sweep span value SPAN causes this value to change SPAN SPAN lt Value gt Sets the sweep time of the linear sweep This key is not available when you select the LOG sweep in the phase noise measurement Pressing this key displays the current setting as SPAN xxxHz Use the numeric entry keys to enter the value Changing the sweep start value START or the sweep stop value STOP causes this value to change Measurement Block Analyzer Mode 8 23 Analyzer Mode NUMBER of POINTS POIN lt Value gt Specifies the number of measurement points per sweep This number can be specified in RF power frequency tuning sensitivity measurements In other measurements you can only query the 4352B for this number SWEEP TIME SWET lt Value gt Specifies the sweep time The sweep time can be specified in RF power frequency tuning sensitivity or phase noise measurements In other measurements you can only query the 4352B for this time
158. Safety Summary When you notice any of the unusual conditions listed below immediately terminate operation and disconnect the power cable Contact your local Agilent Technologies sales representative or authorized service company for repair of the instrument If you continue to operate without repairing the instrument there is a potential fire or shock hazard for the operator E Instrument operates abnormally E Instrument emits abnormal noise smell smoke or a spark like light during the operation E Instrument generates high temperature or electrical shock during operation EH Power cable plug or receptacle on instrument is damaged E Foreign substance or liquid has fallen into the instrument Caution A Do not exceed the operating input power voltage and current level and signal type appropriate for the instrument being used refer to your instrument s Function Reference Ls Electrostatic discharge ESD can damage the highly sensitive microcircuits in your instrument ESD damage is most likely to occur as the test fixtures are being connected or disconnected Protect them from ESD damage by wearing a grounding strap that provides a high resistance path to ground Alternatively ground yourself to discharge any static charge built up by touching the outer shell of any grounded instrument chassis before touching the test port connectors 4352B DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY According to ISO IEC Guide 22 and CE
159. Sample measurement screen integral of phase noise vs offset frequency characteristics 10 Read the values of measurement points Press and MARKER to display the marker You can read the value of each measurement point using the marker Note If the measurement value is not your expected value check that the DC i outputs are ON DC appears if the DC outputs are OFF and that the Y modulation output is OFF 4 40 Basic Measurement Procedures Note For the automatic frequency control function the averaging function the i marker function and the noise attenuator function see Chapter 8 Note In this measurement the sweep time can not be specified Only the query is i available Y When the automatic frequency control function is ON the carrier frequency is automatically adjusted before the sweep The time required for the adjustment is not included in the sweep time If the external signal source needs to be set again the setting is first made and after the frequency change time elapses the sweep starts This time is not included in the sweep time also Partial integration You can specify a portion of the span trace and view the integral of that part 1 Press and MKR SEARCH The current marker position is displayed on the screen as MARKER xxx kHz Press SEARCH RANGE Press PART SRCH on OFF to toggle it PART SRCH ON off Small triangles are displayed at the lower left and lower right of the
160. Saved Binary Files and ASCU Files The analyzer supports two file formats binary and ASCII that are used to save data on a disk Binary files are used to save measurement conditions and data using the SAVE function and to retrieve binary data using the RECALL function External controllers and Instrument BASIC can read measurement data from binary data files ASCII measurement data or screen image files can be read by commonly available IBM PC based software for data analysis or other secondary functions The RECALL function cannot read ASCII files Note When saving internal data arrays note that ASCII data files cannot be recalled i on the analyzer If you need to recall the data save the file in binary format Y This binary data can be recalled and saved as an ASCII file at any time Data Groups Instrument States and Internal Data STATE This group includes instrument states and measurement data memory contents binary files only Internal Data SAVE BINARY There are two types of internal data that are saved in the internal memory of the analyzer as shown below m Data saves formatted measured values or math results m Memory saves formatted memory contents This internal data can be selected and saved as required D 2 Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data File Types And Data Saved Graphics Images GRAPHICS Graphics consist of the graphic images on the screen created using HP GL Hewlett Packard Graphi
161. TCH TIME SG TYPE SG MAX FREQ DOWNCONV on OFF cd0j0804 Figure 9 2 Softkey Menus Accessed from Key Menu Note All settings selected under are stored even when the 4352B is turned i OFF Therefore you do not need to select the same settings again unless you Y change the external signal generator integrated with the 4352B LO CONTROL auto MAN LOAUTO OFF 0 0N 1 Turns the external signal generator automatic control function ON or OFF When LO CONTROL AUTO man is selected the external signal generator is automatically controlled to produce a signal at the frequency required by the 4352B via GPIB This function can be turned ON when one of the following measurement items is selected Tester Mode m RF frequency resolution 1 kHz a FM deviation a C N ratio Analyzer Mode Frequency Tuning sensitivity resolution 1 kHz Phase noise Frequency transient heterodyne mode Spectrum When the external signal generator automatic control function is ON the 4352B functions as follows m The external signal generator is reset if is pressed E When the SG type is changed with SG TYPE the current connected external signal generator is reset Be sure to specify the desired signal generator before selecting LO CONTROL AUTO man Control Block 9 3 Note The external signal generator is automatically set to a specific frequency i immediately before the measurement starts During the measurement the Y external signal
162. TRACE Indicates that MKR ON MEMORY was selected when no memory trace is displayed 113 NO MARKER DELTA SPAN NOT SET Indicates that MKRA SPAN was selected when the Amarker is not displayed 14 NO MARKER DELTA RANGE NOT SET Indicates that MKRA SEARCH RNG was selected when the Amarker is not turned on 116 NO ACTIVE MARKER Indicates that the Marker function was executed when no marker is activated Press Menu MARKER to activate a marker 118 NO FIXED DELTA MARKER The fixed Amarker was not turned on Be sure to turn the fixed Amarker on before using FIXED AMKR VALUE or FIXED AMKR AUX VALUE 128 SAVE ERROR A serious error occurred when the file was being saved For example this message is displayed when the disk surface is physically damaged 129 RECALL ERROR INSTR STATE PRESET A serious error for example corrupted data is detected on recalling a file and this forced the 4352B to be PRESET 130 INVALID FILE NAME The file name for the RECALL PURGE or RE SAVE function must have a _D or _S extension for LIF format 131 NO STATE DATA FILES ON DISK There are no files with extensions _D or _S for LIF format or STA or DTA for DOS format on the flexible disk 132 CAN T SAVE GRAPHICS WHEN COPY IN PROGRESS If you attempt to save graphics when a print is in progress this error message is displayed Wait until print is completed then save the graphics again Messages 23
163. TRR 1 ee ee ee ee ee 8 31 RETURN 2 2 a 8 31 Define Peak Menu o 8 31 THRESHOLD on OFF PKTHRE OFF O 0N 1 VE e 8 31 THRESHOLD VALUE PKTHVAL lt Value gt cc 8 31 MKR THRESHOLD MKRTHRE o 8 31 PEAK DEF AY PKDLTY lt Value gt o 8 31 RETURN 2 2 A 8 32 Carrier Menu Cr L 8 32 CARRIER CENTER CARRCENT Vl E ek 8 32 2xCARR CENTER CARR2CENT 2 o 8 32 3xCARR CENTER CARRSCENT 2 2 o 8 32 RETURN Ce E e 8 32 Cable Loss Compensation Menu o Ve 8 33 COMPEN on OFF LCOMP OFF IO ON 1 e 8 33 SLUPE SLOPE lt Value gt 2 2 a a a ee ee 8 33 LOSS LOSS lt Value gt 2 2 a 8 33 RETURN 2 6 6 wwe a aa a a a a aa aa 8 33 9 Control Block Mod Mena NN 9 2 MOD AMPLITUDE MODAMP Value PPP 9 2 MOD OUT on OFF MODOOFFIOION 1 o 9 2 REZO Menu e 9 3 LO CONTROL auto MAN LOAUTO OFF O 10N11 o 9 3 LO SWITCH TIME LOSWT lt Value gt e 9 4 SG TYPE SGTYPE lt Value gt a a 9 4 SG MAX FREQ a a a a a aa aa 9 4 Contents 12 DOWNCONV ON off DNCONVOFFIOIONI1 9 5 Trigger o 9 6 geen Menu Lilica 9 6 TRIGGER HOLD HOLD Cr e a a e a a a a a a a a 9 6 SINGLE SING 2 a 9 6 CONTINUOUS CONT clic A 9 6 TRIG SRG FREE RUN 2 2 2 ee ee 9 6 MEASURE RESTART REST aaa aaa 9 6 RETURN aaa a 9 7 Trigger Sour
164. TTL level latch output 14 OUTPUT PORT B1 TTL level latch output 15 OUTPUT PORT B2 TTL level latch output 16 OUTPUT PORT B3 TTL level latch output 17 OUTPUT PORT B4 TTL level latch output 18 OUTPUT PORT B5 TTL level latch output 19 OUTPUT PORT B6 TTL level latch output 20 OUTPUT PORT B7 TTL level latch output 21 I O PORT CO TTL level latch output 22 I O PORT C1 TTL level latch output 23 I O PORT C2 TTL level latch output 24 I O PORT C3 TTL level latch output 25 I O PORT DO TTL level latch output 26 I O PORT D1 TTL level latch output 27 I O PORT D2 TTL level latch output 28 I O PORT D3 TTL level latch output 29 PORT C STATUS TTL level input mode LOW output mode HIGH 30 PORT D STATUS TTL level input mode LOW output mode HIGH 31 WRITE STROBE SIGNAL TTL level active low pulse output width 10 ys typical 32 5V PULLUP 33 SWEEP END SIGNAL TTL level active low pulse output width 20 ys typical 34 5V 5V 100 mA MAX 35 PASS FAIL SIGNAL TTL level PASS HIGH FAIL LOW latch output 36 PASS FAIL WRITE STROBE TTL level active low pulse output width 10 ys SIGNAL typical See 4352B GPIB Programming Manual for details 11 8 Specifications General Characteristics General Characteristics 1 O Characteristics External input Ist LO Input Level 10 dBm typical Connector cc N female External reference input Frequency cc 10 MHz 100 Hxz typical
165. TY lt Value gt 8 31 PEAK DEF MENU 8 30 PEN 1 COLO PEN1 7 17 8 20 PEN 2 COLO PEN2 7 18 8 20 PEN 3 COLO PEN3 7 18 8 21 PEN 4 COLO PEN4 7 18 8 21 PEN 5 COLO PENS 7 18 8 21 PEN 6 COLO PEN6 7 18 8 21 performance 11 1 Index 5 performance test 11 1 PHASE NOISE MEAS NOIS 8 3 Power Cable 3 2 power on default E 1 power requirements 11 11 POWER UNIT dBm POWUNIT DBM 7 10 8 12 POWER UNIT dBuY POWUNIT DBUV 7 10 8 12 POWER UNIT dBY POWUNIT DBV 7 10 8 12 POWER UNIT Volt POWUNIT V 8 12 POWER UNIT Watt POWUNIT W 8 12 POWER UNIT Watt CPOWUNIT W 7 10 POWER VOLTAGE VPOW lt Value gt 9 10 Preset E 1 1 3 2 3 PRESET MKRS PRSMKRS 8 26 preset values E 1 PREV FILES 10 10 PREV PAGE PREP 10 5 print 10 2 10 4 print abort 10 4 PRNT COLOR FIXED PRICVARI 10 3 printer control language 11 10 PRINT SETUP 10 3 PRINT STANDARD PRINALL 10 2 10 4 PRINT STANDARD PRIS 10 3 program execution halt 10 16 Program Execution 7 15 PURGE 10 16 purge file 10 9 PURGE FILE PURG lt Character String gt 10 9 PRICFIXE R RAM disk D 1 rear panel 2 9 RECALL COLORS RECC 7 16 8 19 RECALL FILE 10 6 recharge time E 1 reference data 11 1 REFERENCE POSITION REFP lt Value gt 8 16 REFERENCE VALUE REFV lt Value gt 8 16 REF FREQ TRREF lt value gt 8 8 REMOTE indicator 2 2 RENumber 10 17 Index
166. Target position values you can set may be restricted by the frequency span and the target frequency When you use the 4352B alone not using the 43521A and select frequency span MAX XXXXMHZ m When you connect the 43521A Downconverter Unit and select the frequency band of 10 MHz to 3 GHz and frequency span MAX xxxxMHz If you need more information see MAX xxxxMHz in this chapter and 2 1 Relationship between hardware and setting in transient measurement in Appendix C REF FREQ FOR SCALE TRREF lt Value gt Sets the reference frequency to display frequency transient measurement data Use the numeric entry keys to enter the value The number of digits to display the frequency at each measurement point is up to 6 5 Therefore if you measure frequency transient characteristics in a higher resolution for example 50 Hz the number of frequency display digits may be insufficient In this case enter a reference frequency to use the difference between the reference frequency and the actually measured frequency value as trace information at each point which provides a higher frequency measurement resolution Specify a reference frequency using digits of 100 MHz or higher For measurements that do not require reading resolution of 6 digits or higher you do not need to set this reference frequency For details see 2 3 Setting a reference frequency REF FREQ FOR SCALE in Appendix C Specifies the reference frequency for freque
167. W Vpower Set Power Voltage OUTPUT Hp4352 VOUT ON Supply DC Voltage OUTPUT 0Hp4352 STAR Start Set Measurement Start Time OUTPUT Hp4352 SPAN Sweep_time Set Sweep Time OUTPUT Hp4352 TRMAX Fmax Set MAX Measurement Frequency OUTPUT 0Hp4352 TRMIN Fmin Set MIN Measurement Frequency OUTPUT Hp4352 TRREF Fref Set Reference Frequency WRITEIO 16 0 0 Initialize PORT A 1 N 224 Change Frequency to 180 MHz N 224 GOSUB Set_frequency 1 DISP PRESS CONTINUE PAUSE DISP MEASUREMENT Sample program using the value trigger function 1 2 Manual Changes A 11 480 490 OUTPUT 0Hp4352 TRGS VAL TRGVAL 181E6 Set Value Trigger mode ON and Set Trigger frequency to 181 MHz 500 OUTPUT Hp4352 TRGP POS Select Positive Trigger Polarity 510 OUTPUT Hp4352 CLES Clear Status Register 520 OUTPUT Hp4352 0PC Verify Operation Completed 530 ENTER Hp4352 Opc 540 550 OUTPUT Hp4352 SING Single Sweep 560 570 N 249 Change Frequency to 200 MHz 0 N 249 580 GOSUB Set frequency 590 GOSUB Meas end 600 610 DISP MEAS END 620 630 STOP 640 Set_frequency OUTPUT Hp4352 DUT1L Set OUTPUT 1 to LOW FOR I 7 TO O STEP 1 WRITEIO 16 0 BIT N I Send Divider Data via PORT A WRITEIO 16 0 BIT N 1 2 WRITEIO 16 0 BIT N I NEXT 1 OUTPUT Hp4352 DUT1H Set OUTPUT 1 to HIGH RETURN Meas_end REPEAT OUTPUT 0Hp4352 ESB Check Event Status Register ENTER 0H
168. Y Note viii Instruction manual symbol the product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instruction manual Alternating current Direct current On Supply Off Supply In position of push button switch Out position of push button switch Frame or chassis terminal A connection to the frame chassis of the equipment which normally include all exposed metal structures This Warning sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure practice condition or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in injury or death to personnel This Caution sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure practice condition or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the product This Note sigh denotes important information It calls attention to a procedure practice condition or the like which is essential to highlight Affixed to product containing static sensitive devices use anti static handling procedures to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to component In This Book This reference is organized as follows Chapter 1 Gives you an overview of the analyzer 4352B VCO PLL Signal Analyzer Chapter 2 Illustrates the front and rear panels of 4352B Chapter 3 Describes what to verify when opening the package and how to install your 4352B Chapter 4
169. a Memory Upper and Lower are included in the file The data name title used here is shown in Table D 7 5 Data is saved in the order shown in the title line 6 gt denotes a tab code Data is delimited by tab codes D 6 Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data Name Used In Measurement Item ASCII File Structure The string corresponding to the measurement item that is saved in MEASURE TYPE of the instrument state part The corresponding strings are shown in Table D 5 Table D 5 Measurement Item and MEASURE TYPE String Tester Mode Measurement Item MEASURE TYPE String RF Power Frequency DC Power Current FM Deviation RF Power Frequency DC Power Current FM Deviation C N Ratio Carrier Noise Table D 6 Measurement Item and MEASURE TYPE String Analyzer Mode Measurement Item MEASURE TYPE String RF Power RF Power Frequency Tuning Sensitivity Frequency Phase Noise Frequency Transient Spectrum Phase Noise RF Transient Spectrum Data Name Used In The Title Line The data name used in the title line of the data block shows which data is saved in the data part As shown in Table D 7 each internal data has a name Table D 7 Data Group and Data Name Data Group Data Name Description Data Data Data Memory Memory Memory Contents Upper Limit Trace Upper Upper Limit Trace Lower Limit Trace Lower Lower Limit Tra
170. able level for the DC control voltage is set to 1 V Next set the wait time to eliminate the DUT transient response by changing the DC control voltage 6 Press CTRL DELAY 7 Press 2 0 k m The wait time is set to 20 msec When the phase noise measurement or the spectrum measurement is performed specify the DC control voltage When the other measurement is performed this DC control voltage setting is not used and the DC control voltage is specified as the sweep parameter in described later 8 Press CTRL VOLTAGE 9 Press 4 x1 The DC control voltage is set to 4 V 4 22 Basic Measurement Procedures 7 2 Applying DC Voltages Apply the DC power voltage and DC control voltage to the DUT 1 Press Dc Power or Dc Control If the above keys have already been pressed in the setup you do not need to press them again 2 Press OUTPUT on OFF to toggle it OUTPUT ON off The DC power voltage and DC control voltage is applied to the DUT Note i Y OUTPUT on OFF can be selected in either DC Control or DC Power No matter which key is used the DC control voltage and DC power voltage are both simultaneously applied to the device A message saying that the attenuation for the input signal from the DUT will be adjusted may be displayed on the LCD In this case press Sense Range RF ATTEN and adjust the RF attenuation value according to the instruction in the message Example If
171. active function up or down The step size is predetermined and cannot be changed Also when the step key is used input termination by the unit s key is not required Entry or Clears and turns off the active entry area and any displayed prompts error messages or warnings Because this key prevents active values from being changed by accidentally moving the knob use Entry Off to clear the active entry area The next function selected turns the active entry area back on Back Space Deletes the last entry or the last digit entered from the numeric keypad 6 2 Entry Block Measurement Block Tester Mode This chapter describes each softkey which is called from its corresponding hardkey in the MEASUREMENT block when the tester mode is selected The keys in the MEASUREMENT block control the functions including measurement parameters control of input ports control of display averaging and compensation The block also includes keys available when using the 43521A Downconverter Unit The following show the function of each key in the MEASUREMENT block in the tester mode Meas Selects measurement item Switches between instrument types Sense Range Specifies the attenuation for input signal from the DUT Specifies the resolution for frequency measurements Specifies the internal attenuation for C N ratio measurements Specifies the measurement range for FM deviation measurements Bw Avg Specifies the avera
172. ader 116 NO ACTIVE MARKER Indicates that the Marker function was executed when no marker is activated Press Menu MARKER to activate a marker 111 NO DATA TRACE Indicates that MKR ON DATA was pressed when no data trace is displayed 137 NO DATA TRACE DISPLAYED Indicates that SCALE FOR DATA was pressed when no data trace is displayed 6 No Downconverter RF Output Do Signal Search This message appears when RF OUT of the 43521A Downconverter Unit outputs no signal because the frequency setting of the external signal source is inappropriate Set a correct nominal frequency Meas FREQ BAND xx xx NOMINAL FREQ or execute the signal search Meas FREQ BAND xx xx SIGNAL SEARCH to set the nominal frequency to the 4352B The oscillation frequency of the external signal source is adjusted properly 61 No Downconverter Unit Connected This message appears in the following cases m When you try to set DOWNCONV on OFF to ON with the 43521A Downconverter Unit disconnected m When you try to set DOWNCONV on OFF to ON with the 43521A turned off E When you turn off the 43521A with DOWNCONV ON off set to ON E When you recall the setting to use the 43521A with DOWNCONV on OFF set to OFF Connect the 43521A correctly and turn on the power Notice that if DOWNCONV on OFF is OFF you cannot recall the setting to use the 435214 Messages 9 Error Messages Alphabetical Order 118 NO FIXED DELTA MARKER The fixe
173. adjust the control voltage so that the VCO carrier frequency is maintained at your specified frequency Repeat the following steps the control voltage setting loop to reach maintain the VCO carrier frequency at your specified frequency Control voltage change Frequency measurement Calculation of a more proper control voltage from the measurement results This function is used to evaluate the characteristics of the VCO with the carrier frequency held constant Caution When using the automatic frequency control function use AFC MAX CTRL VOLT and AFC MIN CTRL VOLT to specify the Y maximum and minimum level of control voltage that can be applied to the DUT If the automatic frequency control function is used without an appropriate control voltage specified as the maximum and minimum level an unexpectedly high voltage may be applied to the DUT eventually damaging or destroying the DUT Note Minimum and maximum values of the control voltage can be controlled in two i ways by setting AFC MAX CTRL VOLT and AFC MIN CTRL VOLT and setting Y Y MAX CTRL VOLTAGE and MIN CTRL VOLTAGE If controlled in both ways the maximum value is set to the lower value of AFC MAX CTRL VOLT and MAX CIRL VOLTAGE Likewise the minimum value is set to the higher value of AFC MIN CTRL VOLT and MIN CTRL VOLTAGE The following conditions must be specified in the 4352B to use the automatic frequency control function m Target Frequency The f
174. analyzer is a talker when it sends trace data or marker information over the bus Listener A listener is a device capable of receiving device dependent data when addressed to listen There can be any number of active listeners at any given time Examples of this type of device are printers power supplies and signal generators The analyzer is a listener when it is controlled over the bus by a computer B 2 GPIB Function Specification Controller What is GPIB A controller is a device capable of managing the operation of the bus and addressing talkers and listeners There can only be one active controller at any time Examples of controllers include desktop computers and minicomputers In a multiple controller system active control can be passed between controllers but there can only be one system controller that acts as the master and can regain active control at any time The analyzer is an active controller when it plots or prints in the addressable mode The analyzer is a system controller when it is in the system controller mode GPIB Specifications Number of Devices Connectable Cable Length Message Transmission Format Data Rate Address Capabilities Multi Controller Function 15 maximum 20 meters maximum or 2 meters per device whichever is less Byte serial bit parallel asynchronous data transmission using a 3 line handshake system Maximum of 1 M byte per second over limited distances with tri state drive
175. ance Basic Measurement Procedures 4 21 7 Measurements in Analyzer Mode This section describes the measurement procedures for VCO or PLL measurements in the analyzer mode Note When you enter a value be sure to press x1 K m M z or G n to specify i the proper unit after entering the value Also when you wish to enter an Y integer be sure to press after entering your desired value See Chapter 6 for more details 7 1 Specifying DC Control Voltage Specify the DC control voltage that is applied to the DUT from the 4352B and its related values to protect the DUT and to perform stable measurement In the 4352B the maximum and minimum allowable level for the DC control voltage applied to the device can be specified This will prevent excessive DC control voltage from being applied to the device When the signal generated by the DUT has transient fluctuations after the DC control voltage is changed specify the wait time required for the stabilization of the DUT output If this wait time is specified the 4352B waits until the specified time elapses after the DC control voltage is changed before it starts making a measurement This can eliminate the effect of the DUT transient responses 1 Press Dc Control 2 Press MAX CTRL VOLTAGE 3 Press 1 2 x1 The maximum allowable level for the DC control voltage is set to 12 V 4 Press MIN CTRL VOLTAGE 5 Press 1 x1 The minimum allow
176. and column numbers of the BASIC print area for each display mode When the BASIC command line is enabled BASIC commands can be executed from the keyboard Display Location BASIC Print Area BASIC Command Line Column Row All Instrument 0 0 Not usable Half Instrument Half BASIC 60 11 Usable ALL BASIC 60 23 Usable BASIC Status 0 0 Usable Status Notation of the Program Execution U blank Program completion command executable CONTINUE disabled Program halt command executable CONTINUE enabled Program is standing by for input from the keyboard command not executable This character is displayed under the following 2 conditions m Program in execution command not executable CONTINUE disabled a Executing command input from the keyboard command not executable Measurement Block Tester Mode 7 15 Tester Mode Character Input Menu SELECT LETTER Selects the on screen character pointed to by the arrow 7 You can use the rotary knob to move the arrow Use fp and JD to select one of three character sets on the screen SPACE Inserts a space into the title BACK SPACE Deletes the last character entered ERASE TITLE Deletes the entire title DONE Terminates the title entry and returns to the Display MORE menu CANCEL Cancels the title entry and returns to the Display MORE menu without any changes Display Adjustment Menu INTENSITY INTE lt Value gt Specif
177. aoaaa aa 8 19 WARNING COLO WARN aoaaa eee ee ee 8 20 TEXT MARKER COLO TEXT 000020400 8 20 MORE oaa a a a a a a a a a a aa aa 8 20 Contents 9 RETURN 2 e 8 20 Second Color Adjustment Menu Lo e 8 20 TINT TINT lt Value gt 2 Se 8 20 BRIGHTNESS CBRI lt Value gt o 8 20 COLOR COLOR lt Value gt 2 2 Cr a a a a a a 8 20 RESET COLOR RSCO 2 e 8 20 RETURN 2 2 1 ee Se 8 20 Change Pen ColorMenu 04 2 a 8 20 IBASIC COLOIBT Cr 820 PEN COLO PEN Ce 820 PEN2 COLO PEND Cr 820 PENS COLO PEN3 Ce 821 PEN4 COLOPEN4 Cr 821 PENS COLO PENS Cr 821 PEN6 COLO PEN6 Cr 821 RETURN 2 ee ee ee Cr 821 Cor e e a a ea a a a Cera a a aa 8 22 Menu Menu cc PE 8 22 SWEEP 2 ww a oe 8 22 SWEEP TYPE CSWPTLOGFILINF 8 22 AUTO FREQ CONTROL PP 8 22 MARKER cc PP 8 23 MKR SEARCH o 8 23 DETECTION SAMPLE DET POSINEGISAM 8 23 CARRIER MENU o 8 23 CABLE LOSS COMPEN o 8 23 Sweep Menu Co o 8 23 START STAR lt Value gt o 8 23 STOP STOP lt Value gt 2 Se 8 23 CENTER CENT lt Value gt o 8 23 SPAN SPAN lt Value gt o 8 23 NUMBER of POI
178. aracter String gt 10 9 CHANGE YES 10 18 cleaning 3 7 CLEAR YES YES 10 22 CLEAR I 0 10 17 CLEAR LIMIT LIMCLEL 10 21 CLEAR SUB MKRS CLRSMKRS 8 27 clock 10 15 COLOR COLOR lt Value gt 7 18 8 20 color 7 18 color monitor 2 10 color parameter 7 18 color print 10 3 COMMAND ENTRY 10 17 COMPEN on OFF LCOMP OFF O ON 1 7 21 8 33 connectors 2 9 Contents of the 4352B 3 2 Continue 10 16 control block 1 3 Control Block 9 1 CONTROL Block 9 1 CONTROL Block 9 1 controller B 3 Copy 1 3 COPY ABORT COPA 10 2 10 4 copy abort 10 2 copy file 10 9 COPY FILE FILC 10 10 COPY SKEY on OFF PRSOFT ON OFF 10 2 Index 2 COPY TIME on OFF COPT OFF O ON 1 10 3 10 4 CREATE DIRECTORY CRED lt Character String gt 10 9 ert 2 4 2 7 CTRL DELAY CTRLDLY lt Value gt 9 9 CTRLV CAL 9 9 CTRLV CORR on OFF CTRLVCORR OFF O ON 1 9 9 CTRL VOLTAGE VCTRL lt Value gt 9 8 D data D 2 DATA COLO DATA 8 19 DATA and MEMORY DISP DATM 8 17 DATA and MEMORY DISP DATM 7 12 DATA HOLD DHOLD OFF MAX MIN 7 12 8 15 DATA MATH MATH DATA DPLM DMNM DDVM 7 13 8 15 DATA MEMORY DATMEM 7 12 DATA ONLY SAVDDAT lt Character String gt 10 7 DATA ON off SAVDAT OFFIOION 1 10 8 data save 10 7 DATA LIMIT MENU 8 17 DATA LIMIT MENU 10 21 DATA LOWER DATLIML 8 17 10 22 DATA MEMORY DATMEM 8 17 DATA UPPER
179. are as follows Maximum allowable control voltage level 8 V Control voltage 2 V This setting does not actually supply the control voltage The power will be supplied in Applying DC Voltages described later 5 10 Basic Measurements Using the 43521A Press BE Contrai Press MAX CTRL VOLTAGE The current setting is displayed on the screen as MAX CONTROL VOLTAGE xx V Press 8 and in this order The maximum allowable level of the DC control voltage is set to 8 V Press MIN CTRL VOLTAGE The current setting is displayed on the screen as MIN CONTROL VOLTAGE xx V Press 1 and in this order The minimum allowable level of the DC control voltage is set to 1 V Next set the wait time used when the control voltage is changed 6 Press CTRL DELAY The current setting is displayed on the screen as CONTROL DELAY xx msec Press 2 0 and in this order The wait time after the change of the control voltage is set to 20 msec Then set the DC control voltage to be supplied 8 9 Press CTRL VOLTAGE The current setting is displayed on the screen as CONTROL VOLTAGE xx V Press 2 and in this order The DC control voltage is set to 2 V 1 9 Applying Power Voltage and Control Voltage Apply the DC power voltage and DC control voltage to the DUT 1 2 Press DC Power Or DC Control Press OUTPUT on OFF to toggle it OUTPUT ON off The DC power voltage and DC control voltag
180. ary knob or numeric input keys After you change the day setting press ENTER to restart the clock YEAR Enables changing the Year setting with the rotary knob or numeric input keys After you change the year setting press ENTER to restart the clock Instrument State Block 10 19 ENTER SETCDATE Restarts the internal clock CANCEL Returns to the previous menu Pressing this key does not change the internal clock setting Beeper Menu BEEP DONE ON off BEEPDONE OFF O ON 1 Turns the beeper function ON or OFF The beeper sounds to indicate the completion of operation such as instrument state save or calibration BEEP WARN on OFF BEEPWARN OFF O ON 1 Turns the warning beeper ON or OFF The beeper sounds to indicate when a warning message is displayed Limit Menu Analyzer Mode LIMIT LINE on OFF LIMILINE OFF O ON 1 Turns the limit line function ON or OFF If limit line function is turned on the limit lines are displayed for visual comparison of the measurement data in all rectangular coordinate forms Limit line can be saved onto the disk When the limit line function is ON you can specify the limit line and save it into the disk with an instrument state LIMIT TEST on OFF LIMITEST OFF 0 0N 1 Turns the limit test function ON or OFF When limit testing is on the data is compared with the defined limits at each measured point Limit tests occur at the end of each sweep whenever the data is up
181. ase noise vs offset frequency Characteristics Sample measurement screen partial integration of phase noise vs offset frequency characteristics e Example of Measurement Screen Observation of FM Signal Waveform After Demodulation a a a a a a Connections on the Front Panel a Connections on the Rear Panel e o o Connecting a VCO DUT aoa a a a a Connecting a PLL DUT a a a Sample Measurement Screen RF Power Measurement DUT VCO Sample Measurement Screen Frequency Measurement DUT VCO Sample Measurement Screen Carrier Noise Ratio Measurement DUT VCO Sample Measurement Screen RF Power vs DC Control Voltage Characteristics Measurement DUT VCO 6 2 a a Sample Measurement Screen Frequency Tuning Sensitivity vs DC Control Voltage Characteristics Measurement DUT VCO 02 Sample Measurement Screen Phase Noise vs Offset Frequency Characteristics Measurement DUT VCO 2 1 a a a a Sample Measurement Screen Integral of Phase Noise vs Offset Frequency Characteristics Measurement DUT VCO 0 Sample Measurement Screen Partial Integration of Phase Noise vs Offset Frequency Characteristics Measurement DUT VCO 2 2 2 Sample Measurement Screen Frequency Transient Measurement DUT PLL Sample Measurement Screen Spectrum Measurement in the Analyzer Mode
182. ata 123 Exponent too large The magnitude of the exponent was larger than 32000 see IEEE 488 2 7 7 2 4 1 124 Too many digits The mantissa of a decimal numeric data element contains more than 255 digits excluding leading zeros see IEEE 488 2 7 7 2 4 1 128 Numeric data not allowed A legal numeric data element was received but the 4352B does not accept it in this position for a header 130 Suffix error This error as well as errors 131 through 139 are generated when parsing a suffix This error message might be displayed if the 4352B detects an unknown problem 131 Invalid suffix The suffix does not follow the syntax described in IEEE 488 2 7 7 3 2 or the suffix is inappropriate for the 4352B 134 Suffix too long The suffix contained more than 12 characters see IEEE 488 2 7 7 3 4 138 Suffix not allowed A suffix was encountered after a numeric element that does not allow suffixes 140 Character data error This error as well as errors 141 through 148 are generated when analyzing the syntax of a character data element This error message might be displayed if the 4352B detects an unknown problem 141 Invalid character data Either the character data element contains an invalid character or the particular element received is not valid for the header Messages 26 Error Messages Numerical Order 144 Character data too long The character data element contains
183. ata trace stored by this softkey can be used for data math function or display The stored memory trace is automatically canceled if you change the number of measurements NOP In this case only the data trace is displayed DATA LIMIT MENU Displays the Data Limit menu as with DATA LIMIT MENU available under System RETURN Returns to the previous menu Data Limit Menu LIMIT LINE on OFF LIMILINE OFF 0 0N 1 Turns the limit line display ON or OFF This is the same as LIMIT LINE on OFF included in the Limit menu DATA UPPER DATLIMU Stores the data trace as the upper limit trace DATA LOWER DATLIML Stores the data trace as the lower limit trace DATA UPPER EXDATLIMU Swaps between the current displayed data trace values and the upper limit trace values to check measurement values on the upper limit trace DATA LOWER EXDATLIML Swaps between the current displayed data trace values and the lower limit trace values to check measurement values on the lower limit trace Measurement Block Analyzer Mode 8 17 Analyzer Mode Display MORE Menu ALLOCAT N ALL INSTR DISA ALLI Displays the measurement screen over the entire display HALF INSTR HALF BASIC DISA HIHB Displays the measurement screen on the upper half and the IBASIC screen on the lower half of the display ALL BASIC DISA ALLB Displays the IBASIC screen over the entire display BASIC STATUS DISA BASS Displays the
184. ater is applied Note that if the maximum and minimum acceptable voltage levels are specified using MAX CTRL VOLTAGE and MIN CTRL VOLTAGE the DC control voltage applied to the DUT is restricted by the allowable range 3 1 RF Power vs DC Control Voltage Characteristics Measurement DUT VCO In this section you measure the RF power characteristic vs the DC control voltage applied to the DUT VCO 1 Preparing for the measurement Preform 1 Preparations for Measurements 1 1 to 1 9 in this chapter 2 Selecting the measurement mode Select the analyzer mode Press Meas INST TYPE and VCO ANALY in this order The menu whose top item is ANALY RF POWER appears 3 Selecting the RF power vs DC control voltage characteristic measurement mode Press ANALY RE POWER ANALY RF POWER is underlined 4 Making sure that the modulation output is OFF Press Mod and check that MOD OUT on OFF is selected 5 Specify the DC control voltage sweep range Press and SWEEP in this order Perform one of the following two setting procedures E Press START and use the numeric entry keys to enter the sweep start value Example Press 1 and x1 Then press STOP and use the numeric entry keys to enter the sweep stop value Example Press 5 and x1 E Press CENTER and use the numeric entry keys to enter the sweep center value Then press SPAN and use the numeric entry keys to enter the sweep span value Note In 1 Preparations for Measurements
185. ation C 11 Technical Information 8 SING in line 490 generates a measurement trigger causing the 4352B to start the frequency transient measurement Upon the measurement trigger according to OUT1ENVH set in line 190 OUTPUT of the 24 bit I O port goes HIGH This signal sets the PLL load terminal and causes the divider data divide ratio that has already sent to the PLL data terminals to be acquired into the PLL Then the output signal of the PLL starts to move to the target frequency The measurement trigger and the move to the target frequency occur simultaneously and the transient measurement is performed Figure C 5 shows the relationship between the measurement trigger and the transient Frequency with Divider Data 2 PLL Lock Up Time Frequency with Divider Data 1 Send Divider Data 2 to PLL TL Measurement Trigger to 4352S o CDOOCO4 Figure C 5 Measurement trigger and transient when using the trigger detection output function Using the value trigger function This function allows a measurement trigger to be generated when the DUT output frequency reaches your specified frequency in order to start measurement When a trigger for the frequency transient measurement is generated with this function turned ON the 4352B enters the trigger wait state In this state the internal circuit of the 4352B measures frequency f until the measured frequency reaches your specified frequency fr After that the actual trigger of
186. atus Block and Data Block 2 2 L D 5 Name Used In Measurement Item 0 0 0 02022084 D 7 Data Name Used In The Title Line D 7 E Allowable Values and Defaults for Key Functions Tester Mode 6 a a a E 2 Measurement Block a E 2 Meas E E E E E a E 2 Sense Range Ca a e e e a a e a a a a a e E 2 E 2 E 3 E 3 ontrol Block cccccllll E 5 E 5 E 5 E 5 DC Contro CV e E E a E E a E a E a a E 5 DC Pame E 6 nstrument State Block ee a E 7 aa E 7 er Mode ww ww E 9 surement Block ee E 9 Meas Ce e a E a a A E E a a E e ee ee ek a E 9 Sense Range o E 9 E 10 E 10 Menu o E 12 Control Block e e E 14 MAD E 14 REA E 144 Trigger e EA DC Control cc ll E e E 14 DC Power Cc e E E E a E E E A E E A A E a a E 15 Instrument State Block rc E l5 CTN Save Recall E 15 System e E 15 Loca A E 16 Factory Settings for Backup Memory 2 0 0 000 eee ee ee E 17 iw au W aS ls 313 z gt silo gt ES We Ofe D 5 E o o Elo w onl uN pun se lo T ape 30 gt Bf S ile 3 E lt Es o S 3 S wo Q e o D lt F Fault Diagnosis for the 4352S Measurement System External Signal Generator Diagnosis o e F 1 4352B Diagnosis a F 2 Diagnosis for Source Functions F 2 Diagnosis for Receiver Functions
187. available when using the 43521A Downconverter Unit The following show the function of each key in the MEASUREMENT block in the analyzer mode Meas Selects measurement item Switches between instrument types Sense Range Specifies the attenuation for the input signal from the device Selects the slope df dv type for the tuning sensitivity characteristics curve Specifies 1 kHz as the resolution for frequency tuning sensitivity measurements Specifies 64 kHz as the resolution for frequency tuning sensitivity measurements Sets the attenuation for noise measurement in phase noise measurements Specifies the maximum frequency for the frequency transient measurement range Specifies the minimum frequency for the frequency transient measurement range Specifies the reference frequency for frequency transient data Bw Avg Specifies the averaging function Specifies the video bandwidth for spectrum measurement Specifies the resolution bandwidth for spectrum measurement Specifies the noise bandwidth for phase noise measurement Specifies the converted noise bandwidth for phase noise measurement Specifies the aperture for tuning sensitivity measurements Format Selects the display unit for the RF power measurement data Display Selects the trace to be displayed Stores the data trace using the memory trace function Selects the display mode Splits the display into the measurement and IBASIC screens Performs data math fu
188. ayed and the selftest is performed approximately 10 seconds Then the Tester Mode RF Power Measurement Screen appears Note m The following message is displayed on the LCD at power on However this i will no longer be displayed when a DUT is connected and the proper DC Y power voltage and DC control voltage are applied CAUTION Insufficient RF Level a To make a measurement that meets the accuracy specifications a warm up of 30 minutes is required after turning on the power 1 3 Connecting a DUT This chapter uses VCO and PLL as measurement samples The characteristics of each sample are as follows If you are measuring a sample that has characteristics other than those listed below change the settings given in this chapter accordingly m Voltage Control Oscillator VCO Power voltage 5V Control voltage 2V Maximum allowable control voltage 8 V Carrier frequency 5 8 GHz Phase Locked Loop PLL Power voltage 5V Carrier frequency 5 8 GHz 1 Before connecting a DUT check that the DC power voltage and the DC control voltage are not supplied to avoid damage due to excess input Press DC POWER or DC CONTROL and check that OUTPUT on OFF is OFF 2 Connect a DUT as shown in Figure 5 3 for VCO or Figure 5 4 for PLL Prepare cables required for the connection by yourself In this chapter the FM deviation measurement is not performed and therefore you need not to connect a cable to the FM OUT connector Basic Mea
189. by the 4352B In this case the displayed frequency is not the actual input frequency but the frequency that the 4352B is requesting to the external signal generator 7 Memory Content The measured value saved in internal memory is displayed 8 Measured Value The measured value in the selected measurement item is displayed 9 Status Notations Displays the current status of various functions The following notations are used DwC The 43521A Downconverter Unit is connected and RE LO DOWNCONV ON off is set to ON Measurement condition change Measurement data in doubt under the current conditions ExR Displayed when the external reference signal is being input to the external reference input connector on the rear panel Even if the phase is not locked in the external reference signal this is displayed when a signal is being input from the outside Avg Averaging function is ON The averaging factor is displayed below Avg Max Maximum hold function is ON Min Minimum hold function is ON Gx Data math operation gain is ON 0 Data math operation offset is ON G amp 0 Data math operation gain ON data operation offset ON D M Data math operation data memory is ON D M Data math operation data memory is ON D M Data math operation data memory is ON Hld Trigger hold 1 Measurement in progress Ext Waiting for external trigger rear panel BNC Man Waiting for manual trigger Bus Waiting for GPIB trig
190. ce The data to be saved is specified on the Save Data Definition Menu which is displayed when DEFINE SAVE DATA under is pressed By selecting DATA ON off and MEM ON off Data and Memory respectively are saved Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data D 7 E Allowable Values and Defaults for Key Functions The Allowable values and defaults for each function are shown here There are two types of defaults preset values by pressing Preset and power on defaults by turning the instrument power on Saved settings are not affected by presetting and turning on off the instrument In this chapter these settings are indicated by Not Affected If the battery for the backup memory goes dead they are initialized to the factory settings shown in Factory Settings for Backup Memory The battery for the backup memory lasts 72 hours typical It is recharged automatically when you turn on the power Recharge time is 1 hour typical At power on this instrument automatically performs a selftest When the selftest is completed it is set to the power on defaults state If the PRES or RST GPIB command is executed it is set to the preset values state Allowable Values and Defaults for Key Functions E 1 Tester Mode Measurement Block Meas Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power On Default Measurement Item RF POWER FREQUENCY DC POWER RF POWER RF POWER CURRENT FM
191. ce Menu a 9 7 TRIGGER FREE RUN TRGS INT Cr E A 9 7 EXTERNAL TRGS EXT cccccc 9 7 GPIB TRGS BUS 2 a 9 7 MANUAL TRGS MAN Ce e e 9 7 VALUE TRGS VAL Analyzer Mode Ce 9 7 TRIG PLRTY POS neg TRGP POS NEG 9 7 DC Control e 9 8 DC Control Menu 8 CTRL VOLTAGE VCTRL Value o ON 9 8 MKR CTRL VOLT MKRVCTRL Analyzer Mode a 9 8 MIN CTRL VOLTAGE MINVCTRL lt Value gt 9 8 MAX CTRL VOLTAGE MAXVCTRL lt Value gt 9 9 CTRL DELAY CTRLDLY lt Value gt e 9 9 CTRLV CAL Option OOl only 2 020084 9 9 OUTPUT on OFF VOUT OFFIOJON 1 e 9 9 DC Control Voltage Calibration Menu Option 001 only Ce 9 9 EXECUTE CTRLV CAL CTRLVCAL e 9 9 CTRLV CORR on OFF CTRLVCORROFFIOIONI1 0 02 9 9 RETURN 6 a a a a a a 9 9 De Power ee 910 DC Pomer Menu e 910 POWER VOLTAGE VPOW lt Value gt CN 9 10 OUTPUT on OFF VOUTOFFIOION 1 9 10 10 Instrument State Block Copy Vc a a a e e a a a a a a e a e a a a a e e a a 10 2 Copy Menu Ve A 10 2 PRINT STANDARD PRINALL e 10 2 COPY ABORT COPA o o 10 2 COPY SKEY on OFF PRSOFT ON OFF o 10 2 COPY TIME on OFF COPTOFFIOJON 1 024 10 3 PRINT SETUP CN 10 3 ORIENT PORTRAIT LANDSCAPE Ca a a a a aa a a a 10 3 FORM FEED UN off FORMFEED oN OFF Ca a a e a a a a a a 10 3
192. cifying DC Control Voltage en 4 14 6 2 Applying DC Voltages 2 a 4 15 Contents 2 6 3 RF Power Measurement ccccccclc e 4 15 6 4 Frequency Measurement ccccclclc a a a 4 16 6 5 DC Power Current Measurement 2 2 2 ee ee a 4 16 6 6 FM Deviation Measurement 2 08 0 0 eee 4 16 6 7 C N Ratio Carrier Noise ee 4 18 Advanced Measurement Items in Tester Mode 0 4 20 6 8 S N Ratio 2 2 a 4 20 6 9 Tuning Sensitivity Measurement With Two Measurement Points 4 21 7 Measurements in Analyzer Mode o 4 22 7 1 Specifying DC Control Voltage o e 4 22 7 2 Applying DC Voltages 2 a a 4 23 7 3 RF Power Characteristic vs DC Control Voltage Target Device VCO 4 24 7 4 Frequency Tuning Sensitivity Characteristics vs DC Control Voltage Target Device VCO aoaaa a a 4 26 7 5 Phase Noise Characteristics vs Offset Frequency Target Device VCO or PLD ooa a a 4 29 7 6 Frequency Transient Target Device PLL a o a a a a a aa 4 31 7 7 Spectrum Target Device VCO or PLL a a a a 4 33 Advanced Measurement Items in Analyzer Mode o a a a a a a 4 35 7 8 Comparison between Carrier and Harmonic Levels 2 2 4 35 7 9 Comparison Between Characteristics Obtained Under Three or Four Different Conditions 4 37 7 10 Integral of Phase Noise vs Offset Frequency Characteristics Target Device VCO or PLL aoaaa a a a 4 39
193. cluded in the output signal effect of TTL output etc Insert a low pass filter between the DUT s output terminal and the 4352B RF IN connector to eliminate the harmonics component If this message is displayed any time other than during a C N measurement adjustment or repair is necessary Contact our service office or the company from which you purchased the 4352B 82 Thermometer Out Of Range The 4352B s internal thermometer reading is out of the proper range Adjustment or repair is necessary Contact our service office or the company from which you purchased the 4352B 90 TOO MUCH DATA The amount of binary data sent to this instrument in the FORM2 FORMS or FORM5 data transfer format is too much Or the number of data items exceeds the number of display points 91 NOT ENOUGH DATA The amount of data sent to the 4352B is less than that expected when the data transfer format is binary 100 CAN T CHANGE ANOTHER CONTROLLER ON BUS The 4352B cannot assume the mode of system controller until the active controller is removed from the bus or relinquishes the bus See the 4352B GPIB Programming Manual Messages 22 Error Messages Numerical Order 102 ANALYZER TYPE MISMATCH Indicates the invalid function was selected in the present measurement item Change the measurement item or select the different function 111 NO DATA TRACE Indicates that MKR ON DATA was pressed when no data trace is displayed 12 NO MEMORY
194. connector on the rear panel Even if the phase is not locked in the external reference signal this is displayed when a signal is being input from the outside Avg Averaging function is ON The averaging factor is displayed below Avg Max Maximum hold function is ON Min Minimum hold function is ON Gx Data math operation gain is ON 0 Data math operation offset is ON G amp 0 Data math operation gain is ON data math operation offset is ON D M Data math operation data memory is ON D M Data math operation data memory is ON D M Data math operation data memory is ON Hld Trigger hold 1 Measurement in progress Ext Waiting for external trigger rear panel BNC Man Waiting for manual trigger Bus Waiting for GPIB trigger Svc In service mode In this mode the measured data is out of the specification For details please see the Service Manual afc AFC function is ON 9 Message Area Displays prompts or error messages See Error Messages for more information on error messages 10 Title Displays a descriptive alpha numeric string title defined by you according to the procedures described in Display in Chapter 7 2 8 Front and Rear Panel Rear Panel Figure 2 4 provides a brief review of the rear panel Requirements for the input signals to the rear panel connectors are provided in Chapter 11 1 External Reference Input 2 Internal Reference Output 3 External Program RUN CONT
195. cs Language The HP GL format is supported by most drawing software and is the format used by most plotters File Type and Data Group Combinations You can select and save to a disk one of the following four combinations of the two file types and the four data groups a Binary File O Instrument state and internal data STATE o Internal data and memory SAVE BINARY o Graphics image GRAPHICS a ASCII File o Internal data and memory SAVE ASCII Note Note that if only internal data is saved the instrument state is not saved If i you wish to recall the instrument state be sure to save the STATE by saving Y the instrument state and internal data in a binary file File Names All data saved using the built in disk drive and the RAM disk memory has an identifying file name A file name consists of the lower and upper case alphabet numbers and valid symbol characters Up to 8 characters can be used for a file name The following table shows the valid characters for LIF and DOS file names Table D 1 Valid Characters for File Names Valid Characters Description LIF DOS Format A Z A Z Upper case alphabet a z a z Lower case alphabet 0 9 0 9 Numeric characters L 10 O LP Symbol characters One of the following suffixes or extensions is automatically added to the file name depending on the data group type stored in the file Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data D 3 Auto
196. ct C N ratio measurement as the measurement item Press Meas CARRIER NOISE 3 Specify offset frequency Press Bw Avg Press OFFSET FREQ Enter the offset frequency using the entry keys A large offset frequency selected for OFFSET FREQ in C N ratio measurement can result in large fluctuations of the measurement data This occurs because the noise measurement bandwidth used in the 4352B increases due to the large offset frequency In this case specify a proper averaging factor to minimize the measurement fluctuations 4 Set the converted noise bandwidth for the noise measurement Press NOISE BW Enter the converted noise bandwidth using the entry keys For the noise measurement internally performed in the 4352B the resolution band width is automatically determined based on the offset frequency specified with OFFSET FREQ and cannot be changed by the user The noise level used for C N ratio measurement is derived by converting the noise bandwidth which you set with NOISE BW 5 Set the averaging factor for the noise measurement Press AVERAGING FACTOR Enter the averaging factor using the entry keys Press AVERAGING on OFF to toggle it AVERAGING ON off Note m If the message saying that the noise attenuator should be set properly is i displayed perform the following steps Y Y Press Sense Range Press NOISE ATTEN Enter the attenuation using the entry keys This can help prevent spurious in the bandwidth for
197. ctor is too low less than 20 dBm Verify that the DUT is correctly connected to the 4352B Also verify that the power control voltage output is turned ON on the LCD information the measurement setting parameter display or the status notations If it is OFF press DC Power or DC Control and press OUTPUT ON off Messages 7 Error Messages Alphabetical Order This message is also displayed if a positive DC voltage component TTL output etc is included in the DUT s output signal In this case insert a high pass filter to sufficiently eliminate the positive DC voltage component 161 Invalid block data A block data element was expected but was invalid for some reason see IEEE 488 2 7 7 6 2 For example an END message was received before the length was satisfied 101 Invalid character A syntax element contains a character that is invalid for that type For example a header containing an ampersand SING amp 141 Invalid character data Either the character data element contains an invalid character or the particular element received is not valid for the header 121 Invalid character in number An invalid character for the data type being parsed was encountered For example an alpha Character in a decimal numeric or a 9 in octal data 1711 INVALID DATE The date entered to set the real time clock is invalid Re enter the correct date 50 Invalid Dev Cal The correction coefficient of
198. cy from the Basic Measurement Procedures 4 11 external signal generator after the external signal generator frequency setting is changed by the 4352B automatic control function This wait time varies depending on your external signal generator When this wait time is specified the 4352B waits the specified time after the external signal generator frequency setting is changed by the 4352B automatic control function Then the 4352B starts making a measurement 1 Press RF LO DO Specify the type of the external signal generator Press SG TYPE Enter the value that corresponds to the external signal generator used and press x1 3 Set the frequency change wait time Press LO SWICH TIME Press 1 0 0 and k m 100 msec is specified as the frequency switching wait time 4 Turn ON the automatic control function for the external signal generator Press LO CONTROL auto MAN to toggle it LO CONTROL AUTO man Note i Y In the tester mode the external signal generator is not automatically controlled during a measurement That is the automatic control of the external signal generator completes when the measurement starts and the signal frequency of the external signal generator is kept constant during the entire measurement Thus setting LO CONTROL AUTO man does not guarantee that the frequency specified in the external signal generator is appropriate for all through the measurement under way when a measure
199. d Amarker was not turned on Be sure to turn the fixed Amarker on before using FIXED AMKR VALUE or FIXED AMKR AUX VALUE 114 NO MARKER DELTA RANGE NOT SET Indicates that MKRA SEARCH RNG was selected when the Amarker is not turned on 113 NO MARKER DELTA SPAN NOT SET Indicates that MKRA SPAN was selected when the Amarker is not displayed 12 NO MEMORY TRACE Indicates that MKR ON MEMORY was selected when no memory trace is displayed 138 NO MEMORY TRACE DISPLAYED Indicates that SCALE FOR MEMORY was selected when no memory trace is displayed 66 No Signal Found This message appears when the carrier signal cannot be found out in the signal search function Meas FREQ BAND xx xx SIGNAL SEARCH The frequency of the carrier signal may not be within the specified frequency band Meas FREQ BAND xx xxGHz Check again to see if the specified range of the frequency band matches with the carrier signal frequency Generally if the DUT does not generate the carrier signal the error message CAUTION Insufficient RF Level appears first As shown in this example if another error message has been displayed already this error message does not appear even if you execute the signal search 131 NO STATE DATA FILES ON DISK There are no files with extensions _D or _S for LIF format or STA or DTA for DOS format on the flexible disk 134 NO STATE DATA FILES ON MEMORY There are no files with extens
200. d frequency may greatly change due to the change of driving and or control voltage and measurement time is relatively long using averaging technique In the analyzer mode on the other hand the signal generator can be reset to change a frequency of the generated signal so that the signal should follow any change of the frequency under measurement 4 3 Specifying DC Power Voltage Specify the required DC power voltage for the device 1 Press DC Power The current DC power voltage setting is displayed 2 Press POWER VOLTAGE 3 Press 5 and x1 The DC power voltage is specified as 5 V 4 12 Basic Measurement Procedures 5 Selecting Measurement Mode Select the tester or analyzer mode l Press Meas INST TYPE 2 PressINST TYPE VCO TESTER to select the tester mode or press VCO ANALY to select the analyzer mode See 6 Measurements in Tester Mode and 7 Measurements in Analyzer Mode when you select the tester and analyzer modes respectively Basic Measurement Procedures 4 13 6 Measurements in Tester Mode This section describes measurement procedures for the VCO in the tester mode Note When you enter your desired value be sure to press x1 K m M74 or G n i to specify the proper unit after entering the value Also when you wish to Y specify a non physical value such as an averaging factor be sure to press x1 after entering the value See Chapter 6 for more details
201. d measurement items in Tester mode The advanced measurement items can be obtained by calculation based on frequency or FM deviation measurement results You can also use Instrument BASIC to automatically calculate their specific items from results obtained by basic measurement procedures See the corresponding section for detailed basic measurement procedures 6 8 S N Ratio The S N ratio for FM modulation is defined as the ratio of the FM deviation caused by the modulating signal S to the residual FM N Residual FM represents FM deviation caused by noise and it is equivalent to the value of FM deviation measured when there is no modulation input The measurement method for the S N ratio varies depending on the definition of FM deviation caused by the modulation signal S a When S is defined as the FM peak deviation AF 1 Turn the modulation signal output OFF 2 Set FM deviation range to 2 kHz Press Sense Range FM DEV RANGE FM DEV RANGE 2kHz 3 Set the display format to a peak value Press Format PEAK CONV ON off 4 Measure FM deviation Record the value displayed on the screen as the residual FM Nmeas 5 Calculate the S N ratio using S N dB 20 LOG AF Nmeas a When S is defined as the modulation signal level 1 Set the modulation signal output to the prescribed level 2 Set the FM deviation s measurement range press Sense Range FM DEV RANGE and select the proper range in accordance with the lev
202. d minimum frequencies are automatically calculated from the frequency span of 512 MHz the entered target frequency and the target position value If you need more information see 2 1 Relationship between hardware and setting in transient measurement in Appendix C Measurement Block Analyzer Mode 8 7 Analyzer Mode TARGET POSITION TRTPOS lt value gt Pressing this key displays the current setting value on the screen as TARGET POSITION RATIO xxY FREQ SPAN Use the numeric entry keys to change the value Set the position of the target frequency within the frequency span minimum frequency to maximum frequency in After selecting the frequency span determine the minimum frequency and the maximum frequency you want to measure Assuming that the minimum frequency is 0 and the maximum frequency is 100 calculate the position value of the target frequency as shown below and enter it Values you can enter range from 5 to 95 in steps of 5 Target position value target frequency minimum frequency frequency span x 100 If you select the frequency span of 2 MHz or 20MHz the frequency span is 2 MHz or 20 MHz respectively If you select frequency span MAX connect the 43521A Downconverter Unit and set the frequency band to a range other than 10 MHz to 3 GHz the frequency span is 512 MHz In the following cases depending on the measurement frequency band used for the measurement the frequency span is determined
203. dated and when limit testing is first turned on The limit test can be performed for both X and Y coordinates on the rectangular coordinate format Five Ways to Inform the User of the Test Result When the limit test function is ON the 4352B informs the user of the test result as follows e PASS or FAIL appears on the left hand side of the screen e Beeper sounds when the measured value is found to be unacceptable Only when the fail beep function is ON When the list is displayed with the copy function an asterisk x appears next to the measurement point for which the measured value is unacceptable A bit in the GPIB status byte is set to 1 if the measured value is unacceptable e A bit in 24 bit I O port is set to 1 PASS or 0 FAIL BEEP FAIL on OFF BEEPFAIL OFF O ON 1 Turns the fail beep function ON or OFF When the limit test and fail beep functions are ON the beeper sounds each time a limit test is performed and a failure is detected This fail beeper is not related to the warning beeper or beeper for completion of operation 10 20 Instrument State Block EDIT LIMIT Displays the Limit Edit menu used to define or change limits CLEAR LIMIT LIMCLEL Displays the Limit Clear menu DATA LIMIT MENU Displays the Data Limit menu Limit Edit Menu Analyzer Mode START PARAM Specifies the current X coordinate as the start point of a limit section UPPER LIMIT Specifies the upper limi
204. directly to a compatible printer or plotter An overview of GPIB operation is given here GPIB commands that correspond to front panel functions are indicated with in this manual See the 4352B GPIB Programming Manual for detailed explanations of GPIB commands For details of remote programming for the analyzer using the GPIB see the 4352B GPIB Programming Manual The 4352B GPIB Programming Manual includes examples of remote measurements using an HP 9000 series 200 300 computer with BASIC programming The 4352B GPIB Programming Manual assumes familiarity with front panel operation of the instrument For information regarding the IEEE 488 1 standard see IEEE Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation Published by Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc 345 East 47th Street New York 10017 USA GPIB Functions The GPIB uses a party line bus structure in which up to 15 devices can be connected on one contiguous bus The interface contains 16 signal lines and 6 ground lines In this connection system many types of devices such as instruments computers plotters printers etc can be connected in parallel An GPIB device supports one or more of the following functions Talker A talker is a device capable of sending device dependent data when addressed to talk There can be only one active talker at any given time Examples of this type of device are voltmeters counters and tape readers The
205. e are applied to the DUT 3 Check that CAUTION Insufficient RF Level disappears from the screen Note The OUTPUT on OFF softkey can be accessed from either or i DC Power No matter which key is used the DC control voltage and DC power Y voltage are both simultaneously applied to the DUT Note If the CAUTION Set RF ATT 5dB Less or CAUTION Set RF ATT 5dB More i message appears on the screen use one of the following methods to change the Y attenuator value of the 43521A until the CAUTION display disappears m Press Sense Range and RF ATTEN The current attenuator value is displayed like RF ATTEN xx dB Press the key or the f key to change the attenuator value m Press Sense Range and RF ATTEN The current attenuator value is displayed like RF ATTEN xx dB Use the numeric entry keys to change the attenuator value in steps of 5 dB You can change the ATT of the 43521A from 0 dB to 35 dB in steps of 5 dB Basic Measurements Using the 43521A 5 11 2 Measurements in Tester Mode In this section you measure the characteristics of the VCO in the tester mode Note The phrase Use the numeric entry keys to enter implies that after i entering your desired value you have to press x1 k m M j or G n to Y specify the proper unit Notice that when you wish to specify a non physical value such as an averaging factor press after entering the value See Chapter 6 for more details 2 1 RF Pow
206. e marker function see i Chapter 8 5 34 Basic Measurements Using the 43521A 3 6 Spectrum Measurement DUT PLL In this section you perform the spectrum measurement for the oscillation signal of the DUT PLL 1 Preparing for the measurement Preform 1 Preparations for Measurements 1 1 to 1 9 in this chapter Connect a PLL as the DUT Selecting the measurement mode Select the analyzer mode Press Meas INST TYPE and VCO ANALY in this order The menu whose top item is ANALY RF POWER appears Selecting the spectrum measurement mode Press SPECTRUM SPECTRUM is underlined Making sure that the modulation output is OFF Press Mod and check that MOD OUT on OFF is selected Setting the frequency sweep range Press and SWEEP Perform one of the following two setting procedures E Press CENTER and use the numeric entry keys to enter the sweep center value Example To specify 5 8 GHz press 5 8 and G n Then press SPAN and use the numeric entry keys to enter the sweep span value Example To specify 20 kHz press 2 0 and k m E Press START and use the numeric entry keys to enter the sweep start value Then press STOP and use the numeric entry keys to enter the sweep stop value Setting the measurement resolution bandwidth Press Bw Avg and RES BW in this order The current setting is displayed on the screen as RES BANDWIDTH xx Use the numeric entry keys to enter t
207. e that are directly displayed with the front panel keys and those that are displayed from within other menus For example in the Averaging Menu that is displayed with Bw Avg all functions related to averaging are displayed such as the averaging factor the averaging restart etc If AVERAGING FACTOR is pressed on that menu the averaging factor can be entered directly with numeric keys If RETURN is pressed the previous menu is displayed If DONE is pressed the specified function will be executed then the initial menu is displayed Usually the present active function is aborted at menu change Softkeys that are Connected with Vertical Lines When several possible choices are available for a function the softkeys connected with a vertical line represents these choices For example in the menu for Meas in the tester mode the measured values that may be displayed RF POWER FREQUENCY DC POWER CURRENT FM DEVIATION and CARRIER NOISE are connected by a vertical line Only one softkey can be selected at a time When a selection has been made from the listed alternatives that selection is underlined until another selection is made Softkeys That Toggle On or Off Some softkey functions can be toggled on or off This is indicated in the softkey label The current state on or off is capitalized in the softkey label Example AVERAGING ON off The word on is capitalized showing that averaging is currently ON AVERAGING on OF
208. easurement Preform 1 Preparations for Measurements 1 1 to 1 9 in this chapter Connect a VCO as the DUT 2 Selecting the measurement mode Select the analyzer mode Press Meas INST TYPE and VCO ANALY in this order The menu whose top item is ANALY RF POWER appears 3 Selecting the phase noise vs offset frequency characteristics measurement mode Press PHASE NOISE PHASE NOISE is underlined 4 Making sure that the modulation output is OFF Press Mod and check that MOD OUT on OFF is selected 5 Performing signal search Press Meas FREQ BAND xx xx and SIGNAL SEARCH in this order SIGNAL FOUND x xxx GHz appears on the screen Press NOMINAL FREQUENCY and check that the value displayed on the screen is the same as the frequency of the signal search result NOMINAL FREQUENCY x xxx GHz 6 Selecting the log sweep Press Menu and SWEEP TYPE to select SWEEP TYPE LOG FREQ 7 Specifying the offset frequency sweep range Press Menu and SWEEP in this order Press START and use the numeric entry keys to enter the sweep start value Example Press 1 0 0 and x1 Then press STOP and use the numeric entry keys to enter the sweep stop value Example Press 1 0 and m 0 Note The allowable value you can specify as the offset frequency sweep range is one of the following values Z Z Z Z Z OY z In i f the followi 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz 10 MHz I Y this example the log sweep has been selected Theref
209. ecify a proper sweep time Basic Measurements Using the 43521A 5 21 3 2 Frequency Tuning Sensitivity vs DC Control Voltage Characteristics Measurement DUT VCO In this section you measure the output carrier frequency and tuning sensitivity characteristics vs the DC control voltage of the DUT VCO The tuning sensitivity is a characteristic obtained by differentiating the output carrier frequency with respect to the DC control voltage 1 Preparing for the measurement Preform 1 Preparations for Measurements 1 1 to 1 9 in this chapter Selecting the measurement mode Select the analyzer mode Press Meas INST TYPE and VCO ANALY in this order The menu whose top item is ANALY RF POWER appears Selecting the frequency tuning sensitivity vs DC control voltage characteristics measurement mode Press FREQUENCY FREQUENCY is underlined Making sure that the modulation output is OFF Press Mod and check that MOD OUT on OFF is selected Specify the DC control voltage sweep range Press Menu and SWEEP in this order Perform one of the following two setting procedures E Press START and use the numeric entry keys to enter the sweep start value Example Press 1 and x1 Then press STOP and use the numeric entry keys to enter the sweep stop value Example Press 5 and x1 E Press CENTER and use the numeric entry keys to enter the sweep center value Then press SPAN and use the numer
210. ect to being changed without notice in future editions Further to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law Agilent disclaims all warranties either express or implied with regard to this manual and any information contained herein including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Agilent shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing use or performance of this document or any information contained herein Should Agilent and the user have a separate written agreement with warranty terms covering the material in this document that conflict with these terms the warranty terms in the separate agreement will control Exclusive Remedies The remedies provided herein are buyer s sole and exclusive remedies Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages whether based on contract tort or any other legal theory Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Agilent Technologies products For any assistance contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office Addresses are provided at the back of this manual vii Safety Symbols General definitions of safety symbols used on equipment or in manuals are listed below A IS O A I d Warning q Caution
211. ects the analyzer mode and displays the VCO Analyzer menu Measurement Block Analyzer Mode 8 3 Analyzer Mode SIGNAL SEARCH SIGSRCH Searches for finds out the carrier signal from the DUT The search is performed within the frequency band Meas FREQ BAND xx xx that has been selected If the carrier is found out SIGNAL FOUND x xxxx GHz is displayed and the frequency is automatically set as the nominal frequency By setting the nominal frequency the frequency of the external signal source and the input attenuator are set to proper values which realizes correct measurements If the carrier signal cannot be detected within the frequency band an error 66 No Signal Found is displayed Check the setting of the frequency band Meas FREQ BAND xx xx again If you cannot enter the nominal frequency NOMINAL FREQ for example you do not know the oscillation frequency of the DUT you can find out the nominal frequency using this search function In the following cases this function is not required and therefore invalid m When using the 4352B alone without connecting the 43521A E When the 43521A Downconverter Unit is connected DOWNCONV ON off is set to ON and the frequency band is set to 10 MHz to 3 GHz NOMINAL FREQ NOMFREQ lt value gt Pressing this key displays the current setting as NOMINAL FREQUENCY x xxxxx GHz Enter an approximate oscillation frequency nominal frequency of the DUT using the numeric entry
212. ed to access menus to control the Instrument BASIC programming the real time clock and the alarm beep In addition In the analyzer mode it provides menus for specifying the upper and lower limits and storing the data trace as an upper or lower limit trace Local is used to return control to the user from an external controller and displays a series of menus used to select the HP B mode and modify the GPIB addresses Preset resets the 4352B settings to defaults See Appendix E for a list of defaults Copy provides access to the menus used for controlling external printers Save Recall is used to access a menu to save read the instrument settings and data to from disk or memory In addition in the analyzer mode it provides a menu to specify the limit traces See Chapter 10 for details Introduction 1 3 Front and Rear Panel This chapter describes the features of the front and rear panels of the 4352B It provides illustrations and descriptions of the front panel features the LCD display and its labels and the rear panel connectors Front Panel The functions available with the 4352B are activated from the front panel Figure 2 1 by using the front panel hardkeys or softkeys In this manual all front panel hardkeys and softkey labels are shown as Hardkey and Softkey respectively 1 Front Panel Keys And Softkeys 2 GPIB Remote Indicator 3 Preset Key ZA MEASUREM
213. ed to the measurement i trigger Therefore you can perform this function when you see an insufficient Y frequency resolution for a marker value after the sweep is complete C 8 Technical Information Technical Information 2 4 Setting the measurement trigger To ensure accuracy in determining the transient characteristics of a PLL DUT in response to a request to change its frequency the following operations must be performed as quickly as possible m Sending the request to the PLL to change its frequency sending a load signal m Generating a measurement trigger for the 4352B The 4352B provides the following functions to synchronize these operations a Trigger detection output function m Value trigger function The trigger detection output function immediately after the measurement trigger changes the logic level of the port on the rear panel By connecting the port on the rear panel to a PLL you can supply the load signal to the PLL in order to change its frequency immediately after the measurement trigger The value trigger function first sends the load signal to change the frequency to the PLL The 4352B detects the start of the change of the PLL output frequency and generates a trigger by itself This function is useful if the load signal cannot be supplied to PLL immediately after the measurement trigger for example when you cannot connect the port on the rear panel to a PLL Using the trigger detection output function
214. eeper Menu Ce 10 20 BEEP DONE ON off BEEPDONE OFFIOJON 1 A 10 20 BEEP WARN on OFF BEEPWARN OFFIO ON 1 02020 10 20 Limit Menu Analyzer Modo 10 20 LIMIT LINE on OFF LIMILINEOFFIOJONI1 10 20 LIMIT TEST on DEF CLIMITEST OFF O ON 1 10 20 BEEP FAIL on OFF BEEPFAIL OFF O ON 1 10 20 EDIT LIMIT cc a a a 10 21 CLEAR LIMIT LIMCLEL ccccclcll 10 21 DATA LIMIT MENU e 10 21 Limit Edit Menu Analyzer Mode 2 2 1 ee e e o 10 21 START PARAM 2 1 e 10 21 UPPER LIMIT cc e 10 21 LOWER LIMIT cc a a a 10 21 STOP PARAM ll e 10 21 UPPER LIMIT 2 2 e 10 21 LOWER LIMIT cc a a a 10 21 ENTER cc a a a a a a 10 21 Limit Clear Menu Analyzer Mode eee o o 10 22 CLEAR YES 2 2 e 10 22 DO 10 22 Data Limit Menu Analyzer Mode e 10 22 LIMIT LINE on OFF CLIMILINE OFFIOJONI1 10 22 DATA UPPER DATLIMU 2 2 ee 10 22 DATA LOWER DATLIML 2 2 a ee ee 10 22 DATA UPPER EXDATLIMU 2 a 10 22 DATASLOWER EXDATLIML 2 a ee a 10 22 o 10 23 Menu 2 ea e a a a a 10 23 SYSTEM CONTROLLER cl e 10 23 ADDRESSABLE ONLY 2 a a a 10 23 SET ADDRESSES 2 1 we Le 10 23 Address Setup Menu 2 1 ee 10 24 ADDRESS 4352 clic a a a a 10 24 ADDRESS SG ADDRSG lt Value gt ccccclcllc ee 10 24 ADDRESS CONTROLLER ADDRCONT lt
215. el of S 3 Measure FM deviation Record the value displayed on the screen as Smeas 4 Turn the modulating signal output OFF 5 Set FM deviation range to 2 kHz Press Sense Range FM DEV RANGE FM DEV RANGE 2kHz 6 Measure FM deviation Record the value displayed on the screen as residual FM Nmeas 7 Calculate the S N ratio using S N dB 20 LOG Smeas Nmeas 4 20 Basic Measurement Procedures 6 9 Tuning Sensitivity Measurement With Two Measurement Points Tuning sensitivity is defined by the following formula Af AE Where Se Tuning Sensitivity MHz V AE DC Control Voltage Variation V Af Carrier Frequency Variation MHz Actually the carrier frequency f n 1 2 at the prescribed DC control voltage level Enln 1 2 is measured and the tuning sensitivity is calculated by the following formula fi de E gt Ey 1 Set the DC control voltage E1 2 Measure the RF frequency and record the measured value as f1 3 Change the DC control voltage E2 and measure the RF frequency Record the measured value as f2 4 Calculate the tuning sensitivity using the measured values in the formula above Note Only follow the steps given above if you wish to quickly evaluate VCO i performance in the tester mode Otherwise measure the frequency tuning Y sensitivity characteristics vs DC control voltage in the analyzer mode This measurement provides you with more detailed information on VCO perform
216. ement trace Press and AUTO SCALE The scale is adjusted automatically The measurement result is displayed on the screen as shown in Figure 5 13 Dw RF Transient da MHz REF 5 84 GHz 5 849619 GHz 2 5 msec ATH 15dB TARG 5 5GHz 56 of 5 5946 6 1066Hz REF H START sec FSPAN Siz MHz LO 2 669 GHz SPAN 5 msc Figure 5 13 Sample Measurement Screen Frequency Transient Measurement DUT PLL Reading the measurement values Press Menu and MARKER The marker appears You can read the value of each measurement point using the marker Specifying the reference frequency If you need more digits to display the measurement value specify the reference frequency Press Sense Range and REF FREQ FOR SCALE in this order The current setting is displayed on the screen as REFERENCE FREQUENCY xx Use the numeric entry keys to enter the frequency transient reference frequency Example To specify 5 GHz press 5 and G n At the lower right of the screen 5 GHz is displayed and the REF frequency value displayed above decreases by 5 GHz See 2 3 Setting a reference frequency REF FREQ FOR SCALE in Appendix C for details Basic Measurements Using the 43521A 5 33 Note If the measurement value is not your expected value check that the DC i outputs are ON DC appears if the DC outputs are OFF and that the Y modulation output is OFF Note For information on the averaging function and th
217. ency range is restricted by i the oscillation frequency range of the signal source you use 2 Make connections between the devices both on the front panel and on the rear panel as shown in Figure 5 1 and Figure 5 2 The cables that connect between the 4352B and the 43521A and the external signal source are furnished with this instrument and the 43521A 5 2 Basic Measurements Using the 43521A d00501 43521A External Signal Source ana 05800908 Ba sds ooooo0 ooooo ooooo ooooo T 00006 OOOOOO Ot Figure 5 1 Connections on the Front Panel Table 5 1 Parts Used on the Front Panel Number Name Agilent Part Connection Locations Number N N cable 8120 4387 The RF IN connector of the 4352B and 18 cm x 2ea attached to the the RF OUT connector of the 435214 48521A the LO IN connector of the 4352B and N N cable 04195 61602 the LO OUT connector of the 43521A The RF output connector of the external signal source and the LO IN comnector of the 43521A Basic Measurements Using the 43521A 5 3 d00502
218. ency setting 5 Measure the phase noise characteristics Press Trigger SINGLE 6 To check the measurement values using the marker function press DATA LOWER to switch between the lower limit trace and the data trace See Chapter 8 for additional information about the marker function 4 38 Basic Measurement Procedures 7 10 Integral of Phase Noise vs Offset Frequency Characteristics Target Device VCO or PLL In this section you integrates the result of the phase noise characteristic of the device with respect to the offset frequency from the carrier of the DUT VCO 1 Check that the modulation output is OFF Press Mod and confirm that MOD OUT on OFF is selected 2 Select the measurement mode Select the analyzer mode Press Meas INST TYPE and VCO ANALY in this order The menu whose top item is ANALY RF POWER appears 3 Select the phase noise vs offset frequency characteristics measurement mode Press PHASE NOISE 4 Select the linear sweep Press Menu Press SWEEP TYPE xxx FREQ to toggle it SWEEP TYPE LIN FREQ 5 Set the offset frequency sweep range Press Menu Press SWEEP Press CENTER and use the numeric entry keys to enter the sweep center value Then press SPAN and use the numeric entry keys to enter the sweep span value 6 Select the resolution bandwidth Press Bw Avg Press RES BW and use the numeric entry keys to enter the resolution bandwidth value 7 Set the averaging
219. eps 1 2 Press DC Power Or DC Control to set OUTPUT ON off Press DC Power POWER VOLTAGE and the entry keys to set the DC Power voltage to your desired value Measure the output voltage level at the DC POWER connector using a voltmeter and verify that the measured value is within the specification Press DC Control CTRL VOLTAGE and the entry keys to set the DC Control voltage to your desired value Measure the output voltage level at the DC CONTROL connector using a voltmeter and verify that the measured value is within the specification Press Mod MOD AMPLITUDE and the entry keys to set the MOD level to your desired level Then set MOD OUT ON off Measure the output level at the MOD OUT connector and verify that the measured level at the MOD OUT connector is within the specification Diagnosis for Receiver Functions Check the receiver functions by using the 4352B s internal signal instead of the external signal generator and DUT The diagnosis should be performed with the analyzer in the tester mode Perform the following steps 1 Connect between the 2nd IF Output connect and the 2nd IF Input connector on the rear panel using U shape BNC BNC connectors Connect the BNC BNC cable between the 40 MHz Output connector rear panel and the LO IN connector front panel Connect the BNC BNC cable between the INT REF Output connector rear panel and the RF IN con
220. er the signal search is also performed during measurement for reference purpose 1 7 Specifying DC Power Voltage Specify the DC power voltage required for the DUT The power voltage of the DUT VCO and PLL is 5 V and therefore set the DC POWER to 5 V This setting does not actually supply the power voltage The power will be supplied in 1 9 Applying Power Voltage and Control Voltage described later 1 Press DC Power 2 Check that OUTPUT on OFF is set to OFF 3 Press POWER VOLTAGE The current setting is displayed on the screen as POWER VOLTAGE xx V 4 Press 5 and in this order The DC power voltage is set to 5 V 1 8 Specifying DC Control Voltage and Wait Time You can specify the maximum and minimum acceptable levels for the DC control voltage applied to the DUT which prevents excessive control voltage from being applied to the DUT The supplied DC control voltage can be set only within the range between the maximum and minimum acceptable levels In addition when the output signal from the DUT has transient fluctuations after the change in the DC control voltage the wait time required for the stabilization of the output can be specified in the 4352B If this wait time is specified the 4352B waits until the specified time elapses after the DC control voltage is changed before it starts making a measurement This can eliminate the effect of the DUT transient response The characteristics of the DUT VCO and PLL
221. er Measurement DUT VCO In this section you measure the level of the carrier signal outputted from the VCO 1 Preparing for the measurement Perform 1 Preparations for Measurements 1 1 to 1 9 in this chapter Connect a VCO as the DUT 2 Making sure that the modulation output is OFF Look at the parameters displayed on the LCD screen and check that OFF is displayed in the MOD column If the modulation output value is displayed in MOD perform the following steps to turn the modulation output OFF Press Mod Press MOD QUT ON off to toggle it MOD OUT on OFF 3 Performing signal search Press Meas FREQ BAND xx xx and SIGNAL SEARCH SIGNAL FOUND x xxx GHz appears on the screen Press NOMINAL FREQUENCY and check that the value displayed on the screen is the same as the frequency of the signal search result NOMINAL FREQUENCY x xxx GHz 4 Selecting the measurement mode Select the tester mode Press Meas INST TYPE and VCO TESTER in this order The menu whose top item is MEAS RF POWER appears 5 Selecting the RF power measurement mode Press MEAS RF POWER The measured value of the RF power is displayed on the LCD screen as shown in Figure 5 5 5 12 Basic Measurements Using the 43521A Dut RF Power ExR RF ATT O dB CTRL 2 V POWER 5 Y MOD OFF 13 27 dBm COMPEN OFF SLOPE O dB GHz LOSS O dB LO 2 6717 GHz MEAS 22 msec Figure 5 5 Sample Measurement Screen RF Power Measurement DUT VC
222. er key labels are displayed only when an Instrument BASIC program which defines the user keys is being executed CAT The CAT command displays the list of files on a disk SAVE The SAVE command saves a program as an ASCII file RE SAVE The RE SAVE command overwrites an old file with a new one using the same file name GET The GET command loads a specified ASCII file into the editor memory PURGE Enters the PURGE command in the BASIC command line The PURGE command deletes a specified file INITIALIZE The INITIALIZE command formats a disk 10 16 Instrument State Block MSI INTERNAL The MSI INTERNAL command specifies a disk device INTERNAL selects the built in flexible disk MEMORY selects the built in RAM disk SCRATCH Pressing the key after the command deletes a currently edited program from the memory RENumber Pressing the key after the command renumbers the line numbers of a program LIST The LIST command outputs the program list to the screen COMMAND ENTRY Displays the softkeys that are used to enter BASIC commands The active entry area displays the letters digits and some special characters Three sets of letters can be scrolled using the step keys 17 and Q CLEAR 1 0 The CLEAR I O command causes the execution of an I O related command to pause Press Continue to resume the execution RESET The RESET command terminates program execution without confirmation BASIC Edit Me
223. eration of a measurement system that includes the analyzer please see Appendix F Appendix F isa quick fault diagnosis guide for the analyzer By performing the diagnostics according to the instructions provided the faulty instrument can be pinpointed in a short time Also when an error message is displayed on the analyzer s LCD screen please see Error Messages at the back of the manual xi Contents 1 Introduction Analyzer s Features 1 2 Front and Rear Panel ee 1 2 ENTRY Block 00242 a 1 2 MEASUREMENT Block Co a 1 2 CONTROL Block aoa o 1 3 INSTRUMENT STATE Block 2 o 1 3 2 Front and Rear Panel Front Panel Ce Ce o 2 1 1 Front Panel Keys and Softkeys CV o 2 2 Softkeys that are Connected with Vertical Lines Ce 2 2 Softkeys That Toggle On or Off 2 2 2 o 2 2 Softkeys that Show Status Indications i in Brackets Co 2 2 2 GPIB REMOTE Indicator 2 2 2 a 2 2 3 key Lllcclll a 2 3 4 LO IN LO Input Connector 2 ee 2 3 5 RF IN RF Input Connector 1 a a a 2 3 6 DC POWER Power Voltage Output Connector 4 2 3 N 7 DC CONTROL Control Voltage Output Connector 2 2 2 3 8 MOD OUT Modulation Signal Output Connector 2 2 2022 2 3 9 Built In Flexible Disk Drive 0 0 02 002002 00004 2 3 10 LINE Switch 2 2 2 a 2 3 Screen Display Tester Mode 2 1 1 ee A 2 4 1 Measurement
224. erical Order 54 Carrier Overload The carrier level in a C N ratio measurement or a phase noise measurement is too large The 4352B RF IN connector s input level is too large Verify the input level to the 4352B RF IN connector 55 Noise Overload The noise level during a C N ratio measurement or a phase noise measurement is too large This is caused by either the DUT s noise level being too large or by the DUT s spurious component being too large in the measurement range Verify the spectrum of the DUT s output signal 5 RF Input Under Trans Min Freq Indicates that the frequency transient measurement trace was probably inaccurate because the input frequency to the 4352B was below the lowest possible measurement frequency Note however that RF Input Under Trans Max Freq message No 58 may erroneously appear even when the above problem is present if the 4352B is operating in the heterodyne mode and if the difference between input signals from the device and the external signal generator is larger than 40 MHz Verify that the DUT generates the proper signal and inputs it to the 4352B RF IN connector If the signal is generated check its frequency Press Sense Range MAX TRANS FREQ or MIN TRANS FREQ and the entry keys to change the detection bandwidth if required 58 RF Input Over Trans Max Freq Indicates that the frequency transient measurement trace was probably inaccurate because the input frequency to the 4
225. error that the 4352B displays when it cannot detect more specific errors This code indicates only that a query error as defined in IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 7 and 6 8 has occurred Messages 29 Error Messages Numerical Order 410 Query INTERRUPTED A condition causing an interrupted query error occurred see IEEE 488 2 6 3 2 3 For example a query followed by DAB or GET before a response was completely sent 420 Query UNTERMINATED A condition causing an unterminated query error occurred see IEEE 488 2 6 3 2 2 For example the 4352B was addressed to talk and an incomplete program message was received by the controller Messages 30 Index Special characters 2 5 2 8 Y 6 2 1 6 2 Ca 6 2 2 24 bit I O interface 11 7 24 bit I O interface pin assignment 11 7 2xCARR CENTER CARR2CENT 8 32 3 3xCARR CENTER CARR3CENT 8 32 4 40 MHz output connector 2 10 43524 STATE SAVDSTAC lt string gt 10 7 6 64kHz FCOUN RES64KHZ 7 6 A active state 2 2 address B 5 ADDRESS 4352 10 24 addressable 10 23 addressable B 5 ADDRESS CONTROLLER ADDRCONT lt Value gt 10 24 ADDRESS SG ADDRSG lt Value gt 10 24 ADJUST DISPLAY 8 18 ADJUST DISPLAY 7 14 AFC MAX CTRL VOLT AFCMAXV lt Value gt 7 20 8 25 AFC MIN CTRL VOLT AFCMINV lt Value gt 8 25 AFC MIN CTRL VOLT AFCMINV lt Value gt 7 20 AFC on OFF AFC OFF O 0N 1 7 20 8 25 ALL BASIC DISA ALLB 7
226. ess Mod MOD QUT on OFF to stop the frequency modulation a In the case of a DUT with an oscillation frequency of 100 MHz or less a large harmonics component is included in the output signal effect of TTL output etc Insert a low pass filter between the DUT s output terminal and the 4352B RF IN connector to eliminate the harmonics component If this message is displayed any time other than during a C N measurement adjustment or repair is necessary Contact our service office or the company from which you purchased the A352B 70 A D Overload The input level to the 4352B s internal A D converter is too large Adjustment or repair is necessary Contact our service office or the company from which you purchased the 4352B Messages 2 Error Messages Alphabetical Order 11 A D Overload in Downconverter Unit An overflow occurred in the A D converter of the 43521A Downconverter Unit If this error occurs often the 43521A may be at fault and need repair Contact our service office or the company from which you purchased this instrument 48 AFC Out Of Loop The automatic frequency control function could not follow the fluctuation in the measurement condition and did not converge on the target frequency Possible problems and the corrective action are shown below m The tuning sensitivity is improperly set Press Menu AUTO FREQ CONTROL SENSITIVITY and the entry keys to specify a proper tuning sensitivity the unit is
227. ester mode is selected Check that the measured value on the 4352B s screen is 8 dBm or more Record this value as Pb The difference between this Pb and Pa described later is used to diagnose faults Diagnosis of the power measurement function of the 43521A The 43521A has an internal power measurement function If this function provides a value close to the measured power value of the 4352B the measurement function operates normally If the value is out of the limits the 43521A is at fault Repair it Use the connection in the previous section 1 Disconnect the following cables m Between the LO OUT connector of the 43521A and the RF IN connector of the 4352B 43521 61638 m Between the RF output connector of the external signal source and the LO IN connector of the 4352B 41951 61602 Connect the attached N N cable 48521 61638 between the LO OUT connector and the RF IN connector of the 43521A Press and then DOWNCONV on OFF to toggle it DOWNCONV ON off F 4 Fault Diagnosis for the 4352S Measurement System Press and RF ATTEN in this order Use f and J or the rotary knob to set the attenuator to 20 dB Press System SERVICE MENU and SERVICE MODES in this order The 4352B enters into the service mode and displays the measured power value The value measured with the power measurement function of the 43521A is displayed Use the power value measured with the 4352B as Pa 7 Check that the difference
228. eted Y Y CAUTION Insufficient RF Level This will no longer be displayed when the DUT is connected and the proper DC power voltage and DC control voltage are applied to the DUT m To make a measurement that meets the accuracy specifications of the 4352B a warm up of 30 minutes is required after turning the 4352B power on 4 8 Basic Measurement Procedures 3 Connecting Device Connect the device under test DUT to the 4352B as shown in Figure 4 2 or Figure 4 3 Caution N Do not exceed the operating input power voltage and current level Y and signal type appropriate for the instrument being used refer to your instrument s function reference Note Inserting a low pass filter In phase noise measurement a low cutoff low pass filter is sometimes inserted into the DC control voltage input terminal to attenuate the noise of the DC control voltage source This kind of low pass filter has a longer time constant making the measurement time longer The DC control voltage source of the 4352B provides a lower noise level of InV Hz If you use the low noise DC control voltage source of the 4352B you need no low cutoff low pass filter as described above for almost all VCO measurements However an oscillation frequency component may leak to the DC control voltage input terminal of the VCO which adversely affects the measurement result of RF power or frequencies Insert a low pass filter cutoff frequency 100 kHz to 1 MHz
229. evel 12 V Response Time for Change in Control Voltage 20 msec Carrier Frequency 800 MHz Phase Locked Loop PLL Control voltage 12V Carrier frequency 180 MHz to 200 MHz If you are measuring a device that has characteristics other than those listed above change the settings given in the description accordingly The modulation signal frequency is fixed at 1 kHz at all times Basic Measurement Procedures 4 5 Required Equipment The following equipment is required for the procedures in this chapter m 4352B VCO PLL Signal Analyzer a External Signal Generator The recommended external signal generators for this system are listed below o 8664A with Option 004 8GHz Hi Performance RF Singal Source o 8644B with Option 002 2GHz Hi Performance RF Singal Source a Cables connecting the device to the 4352B Prepare these cables by yourself Note The cables that connect between the 4352B and the external signal generator i are furnished with the 4352B Y Signal generators other then those listed above can also be used See SG TYPE SGTYPE lt Value gt in Chapter 9 for more details Note System performance with regard to measurable frequency range is restricted by i the frequency range of the signal genrator you use Note that the phase noise Y Characteristics of the signal generator restricts the minimum measurable value in the phase noise measurement 4 6 Basic Measurement Procedures 1 Cable Connection Con
230. except as noted and after a warm up time of at least 30 minutes has elapsed from power on Information provided as typical typically nominal or approximate represents typical characteristics of the 4352B and is intended to serve as reference data for efficient operation of the 4352B Measurement Items Tester Mode RF Power Frequency band 10 MHz to 3 GHz Input level o 10 dBm to 20 dBm Resolution 0 00 areare orenean renren areare tenes 0 01 dB Accuracy lt 2 GHz lt 15 dBm Peak Voltage Response 23410 C 0 0 40 6dB Other than the above Peak Voltage Response 23410 C 0 00 0 1 0dB O Peak Voltage Response 0 to 40 C 0 ete tenet nes 2 0dB 1 GHz 5 dBm Peak Voltage Response 23410 C 0 00 00005 0 2dB typical Frequency Frequency band Lo 10 MHz to 3 GHz Resolution When 1kHz is selected as resolution 0 2 0 0 000 ccc ncn teen nee ns 1 kHz Accuracy time base accuracy of the external signal source used 1 kHz DC Current Consumption Current range 2 0 00 a O to 50 mA Accuracy OVAS a LO OR 0 2 of reading 100 pA DO to 40 C coco 0 8 of reading 400 A Resolution cciiii ence nee nee need ene ene ees 10pA Specifications 11 1 Measurement Items FM Deviation Measurement Range 0 0 to 200 kHz Deviation Resolution 0 2 0 0 nen nee nee eee nen net eben es A digits Deviation Acc
231. f Y causes an error 61 No Downconverter Unit Connected to be displayed 1 6 Setting the External Signal Source and Frequency Band Note The phrase Use the numeric entry keys to enter implies that after i entering your desired value you have to press x1 k m M or G n to Y specify the proper unit Notice that when you wish to specify a non physical value such as an averaging factor press after entering the value See Chapter 6 for more details Setting the GPIB Address Press Local SET ADDRESSES and ADDRESS SG in this order The current address value for the external signal source registered in the 4352B is displayed as SG GPIB ADDRESS xx Check that it matches with the address setting in the external signal source If it is incorrect enter the address value of the external signal source again and press x1 Setting the External Signal Source Automatic Setting Function Press RF LO Jand LO CONTROL auto MAN to toggle it LO CONTROL AUTO man Note If no response for example the GPIB REM lamp on the external signal source i lights up is obtained when setting to LO CONTROL AUTO man the external Y signal source address value registered in the 4352B may be different from the address setting in the external signal source Check them Note In the tester mode the automatic setting of the external signal source is i performed only immediately before measurement and does not operate during Y measu
232. f paper The printer does not respond to control Verify power to the printer and check the interface connection between the analyzer and the printer 27 SG not on not connect wrong address Indicates that the external signal generator did not respond when the 4352B tried to control the external signal generator via GPIB Verify the external signal generator is turned ON the GPIB cable connection is proper the GPIB address setting for the external signal generator is proper etc 30 NO VALID MEMORY STORED Indicates that you tried to display the memory trace data when there was no measurement data stored in memory Note Messages with error numbers 40 82 are related to measurement Y 40 Insufficient RF Level The input level to the 4352B RF IN connector is too low less than 20 dBm Verify that the DUT is correctly connected to the 4352B Also verify that the power control voltage output is turned ON on the LCD information the measurement setting parameter display or the status notations If it is turned OFF press DC Power or DC Control and press OUTPUT ON off Also this message is displayed if a positive DC voltage component TTL output etc is included in the DUT s output signal In this case insert a high pass filter to sufficiently eliminate the positive DC voltage component Messages 16 Error Messages Numerical Order 41 Set RF ATT 5 dB Less Press Sense Range RF ATTN and the entry
233. ff is set to ON and the frequency band is set to 10 MHz to 3 GHz If DOWNCONV ON off is set to ON and the frequency band is set to a range other than 10 MHz to 3 GHz the setting is applied to the input attenuator of the 43521A If you try to make a setting of 0 dB the message MAXIMUM RF INPUT POWER IS 19dBm FOR OdB ATTEN CONTINUE may appear After checking that the RF input is 19 dBm or less press Yes If it is greater than 19 dBm press no If you enter a value larger than 19 dBm when the input attenuator is set 0 dB the 4352B or the 43521A may be damaged FREQ RES 1kHz FCOUN RES1KHZ Sets the frequency resolution to 1 kHz for frequency measurements Measurement Block Tester Mode 7 5 Tester Mode 64kHz FCOUN RES64KHZ Sets the frequency resolution to 64 kHz for frequency measurements NOISE ATTEN NATT lt Value gt Specifies the noise attenuation for C N measurements The attenuation level can be selected as 0 10 20 30 or 40 dB The purpose of this noise attenuator is to adjust the input level to the A D converter when the power of the noise component is measured This prevents range saturation that may occur due to the presence of spurious peak component within the noise measurement bandwidth Example When the following message is displayed CAUTION Set Noise ATT 10 dB More Press NOISE ATTEN and set the noise attenuation to a level at least 10 dB higher than the current level FM DEV RANGE Displays
234. fied with LOSS is 0 the loss at 1 GHz can be directly entered for SLOPE See Figure 8 12 LOSS LOSS lt Value gt Specifies the cable loss at DC 0 Hz in dB RETURN Returns to the previous menu Measurement Block Analyzer Mode 8 33 Control Block This chapter describes all the functions available with the Control block Keys provided in this block can be used to select settings associated with signals and triggers used for measurements The following list describes the function of each key In the following menus softkeys with Tester Mode or Analyzer Mode shown on their right are displayed only in that mode Mod Specifies the modulation signal RF LO Selects settings associated with controlling an external signal generator Trigger Selects the trigger mode Selects the trigger source DC Control Specifies the DC control voltage DC Power Specifies the DC power voltage In the following pages those keys with Tester Mode or Analyzer Mode shown on the right of the key label are displayed only in that mode Control Block 9 1 Mod MOD AMPLITUDE MOD OUT on OFF Figure 9 1 Softkey Menus Accessed from Key Mod Menu MOD AMPLITUDE MODAMP lt Value gt Specifies the amplitude of the modulation signal in Vrms MOD OUT on OFF MODO OFF 0 0N 1 Turns the modulation signal output ON or OFF 9 2 Control Block CO Reno RF LO LO CONTROL auto MAN LO SW
235. for SG TYPE if you wish to use an external signal generator other than those listed above In this case use SGCMD one of the GPIB commands so that the 4352B stores the GPIB command for setting up the external signal generator This allows the external signal generator to be automatically controlled by the 4352B See the 4352B GPIB Programming Manual for details Set the RF output of the external signal generator to 10 dB This can be done manually or using GPIB commands after power ON oG MAX FREQ Lets you enter the maximum frequency of the connected external signal source using the numeric entry keys You can enter it only when the 43521A Downconverter Unit is connected and the DOWNCONV ON off is set to ON Depending on the entered frequency a frequency band menu is automatically selected as follows You can check the selected FREQ BAND menu by pressing and FREQ BAND in this order 9 4 Control Block CO Entered frequency Selected band menu Less than 4 2 GHz 10 MHz to 6 6 GHz 3 steps Equal to or greater than 4 2 GHz and less than 6 0 GHz 10 MHz to 9 0 GHz 4 steps Equal to or greater than 6 0 GHz 10 MHz to 12 6 GHz 3 steps Measurements are performed within the selected FREQ BAND range After you change this maximum frequency use Meas and FREQ BAND to set FREQ BAND again DOWNCONV ON off DNCONV OFF 0 0N 1 Sets the downconverter to ON OFF When you make measurements with the 4352B connected
236. forcefully air cooling inside the rack housing For information on ambient temperature to satisfy the specifications and measurement accuracy of the product refer to Chapter 11 Specifications When the ambient temperature around the product is kept within the temperature range of the operating environment specification refer to Operation Conditions in Chapter 11 the product conforms to the requirements of the safety standard Furthermore under that temperature environment it has been confirmed that the product still conforms to the requirements of the safety standard when it is enclosed with cooling clearance as follows 3 6 Installation and Setup Guide Table 3 3 Conditions Rear 180 mm Side 60 mm Instruction for Cleaning To prevent electrical shock disconnect the 4352B power cable from the receptacle before cleaning Wipe with a dry cloth or a soft cloth that is soaked with water and wrung tightly without undeue pressure to clean the casing Do not attempt to clean the 4352B internally Installation and Setup Guide 3 7 Rack Handle Installation The analyzer can be rack mounted and used as a component in a measurement system Figure 3 3 shows how to rack mount the analyzer Table 3 4 Rack Mount Kits Option Description Agilent Part Number 1CN Handle Kit 5062 3991 1CM Rack Mount Kit 5062 3979 1CP Rack Mount amp Handle Kit 5062 3985 5 E o om Figure
237. frequency bands when MAX OMe is selected o GPIB Commands Used to Set Up the External Signal Generators Available measurement frequency bands when MAX xxxxMHz is selected Signal Source Assignment Vc Ce ee ee Supported Printers and Printing Modes Ce A Manual Changes by Serial Number 2 0 8 Manual Changes by Firmware Version 2 2 88 16 available measurement frequency bands Number of frequency conversions 0 ee ee Valid Characters for File Names aoao a a a Suffixes and Extensions Added Automatically Example of ASCII Data File Contents Tester Mode 2 2 Example of ASCII Data File Contents Analyzer Mode Measurement Item and MEASURE TYPE String Tester Mode Measurement Item and MEASURE TYPE String Analyzer Mode Data Group and Data Name a a eee ee ee Contents 25 Introduction This chapter provides an overview of the analyzer 4352B VCO PLL Signal Analyzer The Analyzer s Features section shows the name and describes the functions available with each part of the front panel the rear panel and the 4 key blocks The section Front and Rear Panel explains the input and output connectors the LCD and so on The four Key Block sections provide description of keys introduce the menus available with these keys and show how to use them for example how to set measurement conditions end enter
238. function make sure that the external signal generator is i controlled properly by the 4352B via GPIB Y The VCO PLL test system consists of the 4352B and the external signal generator The 4352B can automatically control the external signal generator via GPIB in accordance with the change of VCO carrier frequency Perform the following steps for the 4352B to control the external signal generator via GPIB a External Signal Generator Type Select one of the following values according to your external signal generator External Signal Generator Set Value 8664A 1 8644B 1 8665B 1 8657B 2 8648B 3 8648C 3 Other than the abovel 4 See the note below Note The cables that connect between the 4352B and the external signal generator i are furnished with the 4352B Note that external signal generators other than Y those given above can also be used See SG TYPE SGTYPE lt Value gt in Chapter 9 for more details If the external signal generator does not respond properly when LO CONTROL AUTO man is selected check if the GPIB address for the external signal generator in the 4352B is correct Press Local SET ADDRESSES and ADDRESS SG to display the current GPIB address setting for the external signal generator Enter the correct address and press if the GPIB address for the external signal generator is incorrect a Frequency Change Wait Time This is the wait time required for stabilization of the changed output frequen
239. ge source on VCO phase noise When noise En is applied to the frequency control terminal of an ideal VCO with no phase noise the phase noise at the offset frequency Fo from the carrier is expressed as follows Veont 20log Kv Z 123 dBe V HA Where Kv Control voltage sensitivity of VCO MHz V En Noise applied to the control terminal nV V H z Fo Offset frequency from the carrier kHz Assume that the phase noise of VCO when the noise at the control terminal is zero is Vvco it has no correlation to En and they are in normal distribution Total noise Vtotal is expressed as follows Technical Information C 1 Technical Information 2 2 Veotal V Veont Voco Notice that the unit must be converted to dBc before substitution into the expression shown above For a concrete example see 1 2 Evaluating estimating errors in phase noise measurement 1 2 Evaluating estimating errors in phase noise measurement Phase noise readings obtained with the 4352B can be expressed in terms of the phase noise of the DUT the 4352B and the external signal source as follows 2 2 2 Vreading V Voce V4352A Vsa Where Vreading 4352B reading Weco Phase noise of DUT at offset frequency fo Vasso 4 4352B phase noise performance at f Vse Phase noise performance of external signal source at f Therefore the measurement error can be estimated as the difference between the reading derived from the above equati
240. ger Svc In service mode In this mode the measured data is out of the specification For details please see the Service Manual Cor FM deviation calibration function is ON Front and Rear Panel 2 5 10 Message Area Displays prompts or error messages See Error Messages for more information on error messages 11 Title Displays a descriptive alpha numeric string title defined by you according to the procedures described in Display in Chapter 7 2 6 Front and Rear Panel Screen Display Analyzer Mode The measured value and measurement information for the currently selected parameter is displayed on the LCD For each item of information displayed on the LCD its display location is indicated with a label in Figure 2 2 and the item is explained below The screen can also be used as the Instrument BASIC display Instrument BASIC uses either a full screen display or a half screen display below the measurement display as a text screen When the graphic function is used in Instrument BASIC select a full screen display 1 Measurement 2 DIV REF 3 Marker Reading 4 Softkey Labels Item 10 Title y 9 Message O Area 8 Status Notations 7 7 e N 7 Measurement 6 Carrier Frequency 5
241. ging function Specifies the measurement conditions for C N ratio measurements Specifies the detection bandwidth for FM deviation measurements Format Selects the display unit for the RF power measurement data Selects the display unit for the FM deviation measurement data Display Selects the data current measurement value and data stored in the memory to be displayed Stores measurement value into the memory Splits the display into the measurement and IBASIC screens Selects whether to display measurement conditions Displays title Adjusts on screen information colors Menu Specifies the automatic frequency control function Performs Activates the cable loss compensation Performs Activates the FM deviation calibration In this chapter an GPIB command that corresponds to the hardkey or softkey is given in parenthesis Characters following the program code that are separated by a space are parameters of the command Example ON OFF indicates that ON or OFF can be used as the parameter That is AVER ON OFF means that this command can take the form of AVER ON or AVER OFF See the 4352B GPIB Programming Manual for details on GPIB commands Measurement Block Tester Mode 7 1 Meas Tester Mode Meas MEAS RF POWER FREQUENCY DC POWER CURRENT FM DEVIATION CARRIER NOISE FREQ BAND 10M 3G INST TYPE INST TYPE VCO TESTER VCO ANALY RETURN ANALY RF POWER FREQUENCY PHASE N
242. hase noise characteristics Press Trigger SINGLE 9 Compare three measurement results The memory trace for the measurement data at the fundamental frequency is displayed The upper limit memory trace for the measurement data at the frequency above the fundamental frequency is displayed and the data trace for the measurement data at the frequency below the fundamental frequency is displayed Basic Measurement Procedures 4 37 Phase Noise 10 dB REF 60 dBc D ExR A A h y ha ATN 5 dB NBW 1 Hz SWP 13 03 sec START 100 Hz LO 228 8 MHz STOP 10 MHz Figure 4 9 Example of the Measurement Screen Comparison between Characteristics Obtained Under Three Different Conditions 10 Read the measurement value by using the marker function All markers are designed for use on either the data or memory trace To analyze measurement data on the upper limit memory trace therefore you need to switch between the upper limit trace and the data trace To switch between traces follow the steps below Press Display DEF TRACE Press DATA LIMIT MENU Press DATA UPPER When the fourth carrier frequency is compared with the other three traces perform the following steps 1 Press Display DEF TRACE 2 Press DATA LIMIT MENU 3 Press DATA LOWER to store the third measurement data as the lower limit memory trace 4 Change the device frequ
243. he 4352B if the frequency changes in the direction opposite to this polarity setting displays an error 65 No Downconverter RF Output Do Signal Search to avoid wrong measurement In this case check the polarity setting again or perform the signal search SIGNAL SEARCH to set the nominal frequency NOMINAL FREQ FREQ RES 1kHz FCOUN RES1KHZ Selects 1 kHz frequency resolution in frequency tuning sensitivity measurements 64kHz FCOUN RES64KHZ Selects 64 kHz frequency resolution in frequency tuning sensitivity measurements NOISE ATTEN NATT lt Value gt Specifies the attenuation for noise measurement in phase noise measurements RF TRANS MENU Displays the frequency transient measurement menu If the frequency transient measurement Meas RF TRANSIENT has been selected already pressing directly displays the frequency transient measurement menu and this key is not displayed TARGET FREQ TRTARG lt value gt Sets the target frequency frequency that is finally reached in the frequency transient measurement Pressing this key displays the current setting value on the screen as TARGET FREQUENCY x xx GHz Use the numeric entry keys to change the value If a value out of the range of FREQ BAND xx xx is entered it is rounded to a value within the range Even if the frequency band is the range of 10M to 3 GHz you cannot specify a value of less than 100 MHz The setting resolution is 100 kHz Changing this target freq
244. he measurement resolution bandwidth Example To specify 3 Hz press 3 and x1 Performing signal search Press Meas FREQ BAND xx xx and SIGNAL SEARCH SIGNAL FOUND x xxx GHz appears on the screen Press NOMINAL FREQUENCY and check that the value displayed on the screen is the same as the frequency of the signal search result NOMINAL FREQUENCY x xxx GHz Moving the carrier frequency Press Menu CARRIER MENU and CARRIER CENTER in this order The frequency at which the carrier exists moves to the center of the screen sweep range Automatically setting the scale for the measurement trace Press Display and AUTO SCALE The scale is adjusted automatically The measurement result is displayed on the screen as shown in Figure 5 14 Basic Measurements Using the 43521A 5 35 Dut Spectrum l dB REF A dBm a 3 0245 dBm RBH 3 Hz BH 3 Hz SHP 26 75 sec ATH dB Y CENTER 5 8 GHz LO 2 587 GHz SPAN 26 kHz Figure 5 14 Sample Measurement Screen Spectrum Measurement in the Analyzer Mode DUT PLL 10 Reading the measurement values Press and MARKER The marker appears You can read the value of each measurement point using the marker Note If the measurement value is not your expected value check that the DC i outputs are ON DC appears if the DC outputs are OFF and that the Y modulation output is OFF Note For more information about the auto frequency control function
245. he offset frequency approximately 12 of the offset frequency This causes a relatively higher measured value than an actual phase noise value if any spurious component exists around the measurement offset frequency Technical Information C 3 Technical Information 2 Technical information on frequency transient measurement analyzer mode The frequency transient measurement function is mainly used to evaluate the oscillation frequency stability of a VCO which stays in a stationary oscillation state It is also used to characterize the frequency variation of a PLL when it is in a frequency transient state The relationship between the frequency span and the minimum and maximum frequencies in the frequency transient measurement depends on the hardware inside the 4352B and the setting of measurement conditions For more information see 2 1 Relationship between hardware and setting in transient measurement described later If a narrower frequency span 2 MHz 20 MHz or 512 MHz is selected frequencies during measurement of a transient may not measured correctly For more information see 2 2 Responses out of the measurement range described later When measuring high frequency signals in high resolution the number of digits for displaying the obtained frequency value may be insufficient In this case you can gain higher frequency resolution by setting a reference frequency For more information see 2 3 Setting a
246. he options PRINT STANDARD PRNT COLOR FIXED or PRNT COLOR VARIABLE Softkeys are also saved 4352A STATE SAVDSTAC lt string gt Saves the instrument state in the format so that the 4352A can recall FILE UTILITIES Displays the File Utilities Menu which allows new disks to be initialized and files to be deleted from the disk STOR DEV STODDISK STODMEMO Selects the floppy disk drive or RAM disk memory as the storage device When DISK is displayed the floppy disk is selected as the storage device When MEMORY is displayed the RAM disk memory is selected as the storage device This setting does not change if the power is turned off or even if is pressed Instrument State Block 10 7 Data Only Menu SAVE BINARY SAVDDAT lt Character String gt Specifies saving the internal data arrays as an Binary format file The arrays saved are defined by the DEFINE SAVE DATA key SAVE ASCII SAVDASC Specifies saving the internal data arrays as an ASCII format file The arrays saved are defined by the DEFINE SAVE DATA key DEFINE SAVE DATA Displays the Save Data Definition menu used to select the internal data array to be saved STOR DEV STODDISK STODMEMO Selects the floppy disk drive or RAM disk memory as the storage device When DISK is displayed the floppy disk is selected as the storage device When MEMORY is displayed the internal RAM disk memory is selected as the storage device This setting d
247. he orientation of printer sheets If your printer does not support landscape printing this setting is ignored PORTRAIT Portrait orientation LANDSCAPE Landscape orientation FORM FEED ON off FORMFEED ON OFF Specifies whether to deliver a sheet after one screen is printed out by switching on orr When the sheet orientation is specified to LANDSCAPE the FORMFEED setting is ignored and sheets are always ejected after each screen printout OPERATING PARAMETERS OPEP Displays the Screen Menu which displays the current operating parameters and prints them in a tabular form Print Setup Menu PRINT STANDARD PRIS Selects the default settings for printing COLOR PRIC Selects color printing This setting is only valid when a color printer is used PRINT COLOR does not work with a black and white printer PRNT COLOR FIXED PRICFIXE PRICVARI Toggles between FIXED and VARIABLE for printing color If FIXED is selected the information is printed using the default color settings If VARIABLE is selected the information is printed with colors as similar as possible to the display colors that can be adjusted For details see Display in Chapter 7 Note Because of the limited number of printer ink colors the printed color is not i always the same as the displayed color Y Instrument State Block 10 3 DPI DPI Specifies the resolution of a printer used for printing by dpi The range of settable res
248. he span to 0 V 5 Specify the sweep time Use SWEEP TIME h m s and entry keys to specify the sweep time per sweep You can also specify the sweep time in seconds To do this press SWEEP TIME enter the time in seconds and press x1 The allowable minimum sweep time varies depending on the specified number of measurement points but it should not be shorter than 10 msec The allowable maximum sweep time is 1 hour 6 Specify the number of measurement points per sweep Press NUMBER of POINTS Use entry keys to enter your desired number 7 Display the data trace Press Display Press DEF TRACE and select DISPLAY DATA 8 Select 1 kHz for frequency resolution Press Sense Range Select FREQ RES 1 kHz 9 Start the sweep Press Trigger SINGLE 10 Optimize the display scale for the measurement data Press Display Press AUTO SCALE to optimize the display scale for the measurement data 11 Read the measurement value Press Menu MARKER to display the marker The measurement value at the marker is displayed on the screen If the measurement value is not your expected value check that the DC outputs are ON and that the modulation output is OFF For more information about the additional features available for this measurement see Chapter 8 for the frequency resolution change averaging and marker functions Basic Measurement Procedures 4 43 7 12 Observation of FM Signal Waveform After De
249. his case increasing the aperture Av can change the calculated slope With a large aperture minute changes in tuning sensitivity cannot be obtained The apertures used in measurements absolutely must be known when you need to compare two or more tuning sensitivity data You must consider the trade off between higher resolution and lower noise when determining a tuning sensitivity aperture Noise can be reduced with an increase in aperture However increased aperture results in elimination of small changes in data for a smooth trace Reducing the aperture aids detailed observation but increases noise at the same time making it difficult to make a proper distinction between noise and actual changes in frequency Therefore we recommend that a small value be specified as aperture first to accurately observe small changes and then a larger value be specified next to smooth out the trace This makes it possible to properly determine the performance characteristics of a device Tuning Sensitivity Af AV gt Control Voltage V Tuning Sensitivity AT AV Minute change in linear frequency characteristics are not readily observable gt Control Voltage V Figure 8 5 Specifying an Appropriate Aperture Measurement Block Analyzer Mode 8 11 Format Analyzer Mode Format Format POWER UNIT dBm Figure 8 6 Softkey Menus Accessed from Format Key Analyzer Mode Menu Settings in
250. ic entry keys to enter the sweep span value Note In 1 Preparations for Measurements in this chapter the minimum and i maximum allowable levels of the DC control voltage have been set to 1 V and 8 Y V respectively Therefore you cannot enter a value out of the range between 1 V and 8 V 6 Specifying the number of measurement points per sweep Press Menu SWEEP and NUMBER of POINTS The current setting is displayed on the screen as NUMBER OF POINTS xx Use the numeric entry keys to set the number of measurement points Example Press 5 1 and x1 Specifying the sweep time per sweep Press Menu SWEEP and SWEEP TIME h m s is displayed Alternately press numeric entry keys and h m s to specify the hour minute and second respectively Example To specify 1 minute and 23 seconds press 0 h m s 1 h m s 2 G and x1 Note You can also specify the sweep time in seconds In the case of the sweep time d setting in seconds press SWEEP TIME use the numeric entry keys to enter Y the time in seconds and then press x1 The minimum setting time varies depending on the specified number of measurement points The maximum setting time is 1 hour 5 22 Basic Measurements Using the 43521A 10 11 12 Selecting the frequency resolution Press Sense Range Select FREQ RES 1kHz or 64 kHz The selected softkey is underlined In this example select FREQ RES 1kHz Setting
251. ies the display intensity as a percentage of the highest brightness level BACKGROUND INTENSITY BACI lt Value gt Specifies the background display intensity as a percentage of white level MODIFY COLORS Displays the First Color Adjustment menu DEFAULT COLORS DEFC Resets all color settings to the default settings factory settings SAVE COLORS SVCO Stores the modified version of the color settings into the backup memory RECALL COLORS RECC Recalls the previously saved modified version of the color settings from the backup memory RECALL COLORS appears only when a color setting has been saved RETURN Returns to the previous menu 7 16 Measurement Block Tester Mode Tester Mode First Color Adjustment Menu DATA COLO DATA Selects the measurement data to change its color and displays the Second Color Adjustment menu MEMORY COLO MEMO Selects the memory data to change its color and displays the Second Color Adjustment menu LIMIT LINE PARAMETER COLO PARAM Selects the measurement setting parameters to change their color and displays the Second Color Adjustment menu GRATICULE COLO GRAT Selects the display frame for measurement data and measurement setting parameters and some softkey labels those with ON and OFF options to change their color and displays the Second Color Adjustment menu WARNING COLO WARN Selects warning messages to change their color and displays the Second Color
252. ined i because the RAM disk data is lost when the power is turned off Y Disk Requirements The analyzer s disk drive uses either a 720 Kbyte or 1 44 Mbyte format on 3 5 inch micro floppy disks Disk Formats The analyzer s built in disk drive can access both LIF logical interchange format and DOS formatted disks The floppy disk and the RAM disk memory can be initialized in either LIF or DOS format You need to specify the format type before initializing the disk The following shows the applicable DOS formats for the analyzer a 720 Kbyte 80 tracks double sided 9 sectors track m 1 44 Mbyte 80 tracks double sided 18 sectors track Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data D 1 File Types And Data Saved RAM Disk Memory Capacity The RAM disk memory capacity can be changed This capacity includes the directory area The capacity of data area depends on the disk format type Copying Files Between the RAM Disk and the Floppy Disk A copy function is provided to copy files between the RAM disk and the floppy disk FILE UTILITIES in the SAVE RECALL menu displays the softkeys used to copy files The GPIB command FILC is also available to copy files Note When you copy files using this function use the same disk format type for both i the RAM disk and the floppy disk This copy function cannot copy files when Y the format of the RAM disk is different from the format of the floppy disk File Types And Data
253. ing errors Errata in the manual To keep this manual as current and accurate as possible Hewlett Packard recommends that you periodically request the latest MANUAL CHANGES supplement For information concerning serial number prefixes not listed on the title page or in the MANUAL CHANGE supplement contact the nearest Hewlett Packard office Turn on the line switch or execute the IDN command by GPIB to confirm the firmware version See the GPIB Command Reference manual for information on the IDN command Table A 1 Manual Changes by Serial Number Serial Prefix or Number Make Manual Changes JPIKE Change 1 Table A 2 Manual Changes by Firmware Version Version Make Manual Changes Rev 1 xx Change 1 Manual Changes A 1 Serial Number Hewlett Packard uses a two part nine character serial number that is stamped on the serial number plate Refer to Figure A 1 attached to the rear panel The first five characters are the serial prefix and the last five digits are the suffix Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd SERNO JP1KG12345 AK MADE IN JAPAN 33 Figure A 1 Serial Number Plate Change 1 To adapt this manual to the 4352B with serial number JP1KE make the following changes Changes of softkeys under the meas key common to tester mode and analyzer mode Make the following changes in Figure A 3 and Figure A 4 to adapt them to Figure A 2 Deletion m FREQ B
254. ing factor AVERAGING FACTOR AVERFACT lt Value gt Specifies the averaging factor number of times for averaging The allowable range of values you can specify for this factor varies depending on the measurement item selected VIDEO BW VBW lt Value gt Changes the setting of the post detection filter and sets the video bandwidth This setting is valid only for the linear sweep in the phase noise vs offset frequency characteristics measurement and the spectrum measurement Pressing this softkey displays the current setting on the screen as VIDEO BAND WIDTH xxxHz Use the 1 or 7 key or the numeric entry keys to change the value Values you can set follow the 1 3 stepping rule that is they can be 1 1 1 3 1 10 1 30 1 100 or 1 300 of the resolution bandwidth RES BW If the resolution bandwidth is changed this value may change automatically The valid setting ranges from 3 mHz to 3 kHz When an input value does not follow the 1 3 stepping rule it is rounded to the nearest valid value Measurement Block Analyzer Mode 8 9 Bw Avg Analyzer Mode RES BW BW lt Value gt Sets the resolution bandwidth This setting is valid only for the linear sweep in the phase noise vs Offset frequency characteristics measurement and the spectrum measurement Narrowing the resolution bandwidth increases the S N ratio Pressing this softkey displays the current setting on the screen as RES BANDWIDTH xxxHz Use the ID or fp key or
255. ing modified COLOR COLOR lt Value gt Adjusts the whiteness of the color being modified RESET COLOR RSCO Resets the color being modified to the default color RETURN Returns to the previous menu 3 color components Tint TINT The continuum of hues on the color wheel ranging from red through green and blue and black to red Brightness BRIGHTNESS Degree of brightness of color Color COLOR Whiteness of color from white to pure color 7 18 Measurement Block Tester Mode Menu Tester Mode Menu Menu AUTO FREQ CONTROL CABLE LOSS COMPEN FM DEV CAL AFC on OFF TARGET TOLERANCE SENSITIVTY MAX CTRL VOLTAGE CTRL DELAY MAX ITERATIO RET COMPEN on OFF SLOPE LOSS RETUR EXECUTE DEV CA DEY CAL on OFF RETUR Figure 7 9 Softkey Menus Accessed from Key Tester Mode Men u Menu AUTO FREQ CONTROL Displays the Automatic Frequency Control menu CABLE LOSS COMPEN Displays the Cable Loss Compensation menu FM DEV CAL Displays the FM Deviation Calibration menu Automatic Frequency Control Menu This menu controls the settings for the automatic frequency control function The automatic frequency control function can automatically and quickly set maintain the DUT output frequency to your specified target frequency It does this by controlling the internal DC control voltage and using the measurement results obtained by its i
256. ions _D or _S for LIF format or STA or DTA for DOS format in the RAM disk memory 30 NO VALID MEMORY STORED Indicates that you tried to display memory trace data when there was no measurement data stored in memory 0 No error The error queue is empty Every error in the queue has been read OUTPERRO query or the queue was cleared by power on or the CLS command Messages 10 Error Messages Alphabetical Order 55 Noise Overload The noise level during a C N ratio measurement or a phase noise measurement is too large This is caused by either the DUT s noise level being too large or by the DUT s spurious component being too large in the measurement range Verify the spectrum of the DUT s output signal 91 NOT ENOUGH DATA The amount of data sent to the 4352B is less than that expected when the data transfer format is binary 120 Numeric data error This error as well as errors 121 through 129 are generated when parsing a data element that appears to be numeric including the nondecimal numeric types This error message might be displayed if the 4352B detects an unknown problem 128 Numeric data not allowed A legal numeric data element was received but the 4352B does not accept it in this position for a header 220 Parameter error Indicates that a program data element related error occurred This error message might be displayed if the 4352B detects an unknown proble
257. is 183 MHz the IF signal is the difference between the local frequency and the frequency of the RF signal that is 1 MHz Because the maximum frequency is 550 MHz or less the 4352B assumes RF frequency local frequency IF frequency and calculates a wrong RF frequency as 182 MHz 1 MHz 181 MHz Because the frequency span is set smaller the RF frequency becomes greater than the frequency of the local signal As a result wrong calculation incorrect measurement is performed A measurement error occurs at early stages of frequency change and the result waveform is folded over as shown in Figure C 1 You can measure the details of the convergence of the transient but the frequency measurement at early stages of the transient is inaccurate You must consider this problem especially when the frequency of the RF signal goes out of the range between the minimum and maximum frequencies Technical Information C 7 Technical Information RF Transient 1MHz REF 180 MHz 186MHz Real Transient 184MHz 182MHz 180 MHz b A A 178 MHZ Image Frequency ATN 0dB REF OHz START O sec Lo 182 MHz SPAN 10 msec Figure C 1 Example of measuring an image frequency at early stages of transient 2 3 Setting a reference frequency REF FREQ FOR SCALE The 4352B internally uses a 32 bit expression for frequency at each measurement point and the
258. ise measurement in C N ratio measurement The actual bandwidth for noise measurement is determined by the 4352B based on this offset frequency NOISE PLL AUTO wide CNPLL AUTO WIDE Selects AUTO to reduce the bandwidth 200 Hz automatically or WIDE to maintain the wide bandwidth 1 kHz if an offset frequency below 5 kHz is used in C N measurements Note When measuring a DUT with high phase noise and the offset frequency i lt 5 kHz the message 2nd PLL Unlocked might be displayed on the screen Y This message indicates that 4352B is unable to make measurements This condition occurs because the 2nd PLL in the 4352B is designed to automatically set the bandwidth to 1 kHz and 200 Hz respectively when the offset frequency is above and below 5 kHz However the 200 Hz bandwidth selected at the offset frequency lt 5 kHz is too narrow to cover the high phase noise of the device When NOISE PLL auto WIDE is selected the bandwidth of the built in 2nd PLL is constantly set at 1 kHz regardless of the variations in the offset frequency Therefore the 4352B can make the proper measurement for a device with high phase noise even when the offset frequency is below 5 kHz Note however that the measurement data at an offset frequency below 5 kHz is only used as reference data if the noise bandwidth is set to WIDE FM DETECTION Displays the FM Deviation Detection Band menu FM Deviation Detection Band Menu HP FILTER 50Hz DTHPF FC50HZ
259. isplayed on the screen If the measurement value is not your expected value check that the DC outputs are ON DC appears if the DC outputs are OFF and that the modulation output is OFF For more information about the additional features for this measurement see Setting Cable Loss Compensation Function for the cable loss compensation function See Chapter 8 for the power level unit selection averaging and marker functions Note Sweep starts after the time specified with CTRL DELAY under i elapses This delay time is intended to wait until the DC control voltage Y becomes stable before sweep The delay time is not included in the sweep time and is applicable only to the first measurement point To provide delay time for the other points you need to specify a proper sweep time Basic Measurement Procedures 4 25 7 4 Frequency Tuning Sensitivity Characteristics vs DC Control Voltage Target Device VCO Carrier frequency and tuning sensitivity characteristics vs the DC control voltage are measured The tuning sensitivity is a differential curve of the F V carrier frequency vs DC control voltage characteristics 1 Check that the modulation output is OFF Press Mod and confirm that MOD OUT on OFF is selected 2 Select the Frequency Tuning Sensitivity Characteristics vs DC Control Voltage as the measurement item Press Meas FREQUENCY 3 Specify the DC control voltage sweep range Press Menu Pre
260. k Analyzer Mode Meas Menu VCO Analyzer Menu ANALY RF POWER MEAS POWE FREQUENCY MEAS FREQ PHASE NOISE MEAS NOIS RF TRANSIENT MEAS TRAN SPECTRUM MEAS SPEC FREQ BAND 10M 3G FBAND lt value INST TYPE Instrument Type Menu INST TYPE VCO TESTER T VCO ANALY VA SIGNAL SEARCH SIGSRCH NOMINAL FREQ NOMFREQ lt value gt Sense Range Gerse Range Menu RF ATTEN RFATT lt Value gt SENS PLRIY POS neg SENSPOL POS NEG FREQ RES tkHz FCOUN RES1KHZ 64kHz FCOUN RES64KHZ NOISE ATTEN NATT lt Value gt RF TRANS MENU 7 19 7 19 7 20 7 20 7 20 7 20 7 20 7 20 7 20 7 20 7 21 7 21 7 21 7 21 7 21 7 22 7 22 7 22 7 22 8 2 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 4 8 4 8 5 8 5 8 5 8 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 Contents 7 TARGET FREQ TRTARG lt value gt o 8 6 FREQ SPAN 2MHz TRSPAN TS2MHZ 8 7 20MHz TRSPAN TS20MHZ 2 1 1 a 8 7 MAX xxxxMHz TRSPAN TSMAX 2 1 ee ee ee 8 7 TARGET POSITION CTRTPOS lt value gt 028 8 8 REF FREQ FOR SCALE TRREF lt Value gt 8 8 CAE Bw Ave Menu Se PPP 8 9 AVERAGING RESTART AVERREST o 8 9 AVERAGING on OFF AVEROFFIOIONI1 o 8 9 AVERAGING FACTOR AVERFACT lt Value gt 8 9 VIDEO BW VBW lt Value gt e 8 9 RES BW BW lt Value gt Ca a a a a a a a a
261. keys Enter the value with a resolution of 200 MHz You can enter the nominal frequency within the specified frequency band Meas FREQ BAND xx xx Setting the nominal frequency realizes correct measurements If you cannot enter the nominal frequency for example you do not know an approximate oscillation frequency of the DUT use the signal search function SIGNAL SEARCH described above to find out the nominal frequency The carrier frequency detected by the signal search is automatically set as the nominal frequency In the following cases this function is not required and therefore invalid m When using the 4352B alone without connecting the 43521A E When the 43521A Downconverter Unit is connected DOWNCONV ON off is set to ON and the frequency band is set to 10 MHz to 3 GHz 8 4 Measurement Block Analyzer Mode Analyzer Mode Sense Range RF ATTEN RF ATTEN TARGET FREQ SENS PLRTY POS neg FREQ SPAN 2MHz FREQ RES 1kHz 20MHz 64kHz MAX 1536MHz NOISE ATTEN TARGET POSITION RETURN REF FREQ FOR SCALE MORE gt When RF TRANSIENT is selected in RFATTEN gt YES RF ATTEN TARGET FREQ SENS PLRTY POS neg FREQ SPAN 2MHz FREQ RES 1kHz 20MHz 64kHz MAX 1536MHz NOISE ATTEN TARGET POSITION RF TRANS MENU REF FREQ RETURN When any parameter other than RF TRANSIENT is selected in d00701 Figure 8 3 Softkey Menus Accessed from Sense Range Key
262. keys to set a value 5 dB lower than the current setting 4 Set RF ATT 5 dB More Press Sense Range RF ATTN and the entry keys to set a value 5 dB higher than the current setting 43 F V Input Underflow The input frequency to the 4352B s F V converter is too low This message indicates that the DUT s frequency has fluctuated widely in a very short time several hundred kHz in several tens of ms Verify the DUT s output frequency stability 44 F V Input Overflow The input frequency to the 4352B s F V converter is too high This message indicates that the DUT s frequency has fluctuated widely in a very short time several hundred kHz in several tens of ms Verify the DUT s output frequency stability 45 1st IF Out Of Range The 4352B s 1st IF frequency is outside of the proper range Possible problems and the corrective action are shown below m The frequency of the external signal generator is not correct The 4352B has not performed automatic control of the external signal generator via GPIB LO CONTROL MAN and or ADDRESSABLE ONLY is selected Verify the frequency of the external signal generator The actual time required for the stabilization of the output frequency from the external signal generator after changing the output frequency exceeds the specified wait time in LOCAL SWICH TIME Press RF LO LOCAL SWTCH TIME and the entry keys to increase the 4352B s wait time The DUT output frequency fluctuated largely in a
263. known problem 148 Character data not allowed A legal character data element was encountered where prohibited by the 4352B 144 Character data too long The character data element contains more than twelve characters see IEEE 488 2 7 7 1 4 100 Command error This is a generic syntax error that the 4352B displays when it cannot detect more specific errors This code indicates only that a command error as defined in IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 4 has occurred 110 Command header error An error was detected in the header This error message might be displayed if the 4352B detects an unknown problem related to errors 111 through 119 Messages 4 Error Messages Alphabetical Order 64 Command Ignored Invalid Freq Band This message appears if you execute the TRMIN or TRMAX GPIB command when DOWNCONV ON off is set to ON and a frequency band other than 10 MHz to 3 GHz high frequency band is selected The command is ignored The TRMIN and TRMAX commands are available only in the following cases When you use the 4352B alone not connecting it to the 43521A E When you connect the 4352B and the 43521A Downconverter Unit set DOWNCONV ON off to ON and set the frequency band to 10 MHz to 3 GHz 62 Correction Data Lost in Downconverter Unit The correction data in the EEPROM of the 43521A Downconverter Unit is lost You cannot use the product Repair the faulty hardware 230 Data corrupt or stale Possib
264. l external equipment from the analyzer For more information see Chapter 2 ENTRY Block This block provides the numerical and units keypad the rotary knob and the step keys These controls are used in combination with other keys to enter or change numeric data For more information see Chapter 6 MEASUREMENT Block This block is used to select the measurement parameters display the measured value and specify the measurement conditions When a key on this block is pressed a softkey menu is displayed Meas provides menus used to select the measurement item and also provides the measurement mode menu used to switch between the tester and analyzer modes This key also lets you select a frequency band and a carrier signal search used when the 48521A Downconverter Unit is connected Sense Range in the tester mode lets you set the attenuator for the input signal from the DUT the resolution of the frequency counter the built in attenuator used in the C N ratio measurement and the measurement range for FM deviation In the analyzer mode it lets you set the built in attenuator the gradient of a device df dv the resolution of the frequency measurement the noise attenuator in the phase noise measurement the reference frequency and frequency span for the frequency transient measurement range and so on Bw Avg displays menus used to average the measurement data for noise reduction In the tester mode it is used to specify
265. l integration of phase noise vs offset frequency characteristics 7 11 Post tuning Drift Characteristics This is a parameter specified as part of the total RF transient characteristics It is expressed as the frequency deviation versus the time characteristics in a given time window after a step change in frequency To make this measurement the zero span measurement function is used in the Frequency Tuning Sensitivity mode Note The 4352B offers the following three ways to measure the post tuning drift i characteristics of the DUT oscillation frequency Select the method suitable for Y your measurement requirements based on the required observation time Observation time Measurement Item Reference section 10 sec or shorter Frequency transient 7 6 Frequency Transient Target Device PLL 10 sec to 1 hour Frequency Tuning Sensitivity Zero Span This section 7 10 1 hour or longer Frequency in Tester Mode by program GPIB Programming Guide Chapter 12 1 Check that the modulation output is OFF Press and confirm that MOD OUT on OFF is selected 2 Stop the sweep Press Trigger HOLD 3 Select the Frequency Tuning Sensitivity vs DC Control Voltage as the measurement item Press Meas FREQUENCY 4 Specify the DC control voltage level 4 42 Basic Measurement Procedures Press Menu SWEEP Use CENTER and entry keys to enter the DC control voltage level Press SPAN 0 x1 to set t
266. lize 1 44 Mbyte disks only Y NO Returns to the previous softkey menu without initializing the floppy disk or RAM disk memory Delete YES NO Menu PURGE YES Deletes the selected file NO Returns to the previous menu without purging the file Character Input Menu SELECT LETTER Selects the characters on the screen pointed to by the arrow 1 You can use the rotary knob to move the arrow You can use f and 7 to switch character sets on the screen SPACE Inserts a space BACK SPACE Deletes the last character entered ERASE TITLE Deletes all characters that have been entered Instrument State Block 10 11 DONE Stop entering characters and return to the previous menu STOR DEV STODDISK STODMEMO Selects the floppy disk drive or RAM disk memory as the storage device When DISK is displayed the floppy disk is selected as the storage device When MEMORY is displayed the RAM disk memory is selected as the storage device This setting does not change if the instrument is turned off or even if Preset is pressed CANCEL Cancels the entry of characters and returns to the previous menu 10 12 Instrument State Block IBASIC MEMORY PARTITION SET CLOCK BEEPER MENU SERVICE MENU System Step Continue Run Pause Stop Edit ON KEY LABELS CAT SAVE RE SAVE GET PURGE INITIALIZE MSI SCRATCH RENumber LIST COMMAND ENTRY CLEAR I O RESET
267. ll parameters of the selected color to defaults RETURN Returns to the previous menu Change Pen Color Menu IBASIC COLO IBT Selects text on the IBASIC screen to change the color PEN1 COLO PEN1 Selects pen 1 to change the color PEN2 COLO PEN2 Selects pen 2 to change the color 8 20 Measurement Block Analyzer Mode Analyzer Mode PENS COLO PEN3 Selects pen 3 to change the color PEN4 COLO PEN4 Selects pen 4 to change the color PEN5 COLO PENS Selects pen 5 to change the color PENG COLO PEN6 Selects pen 6 to change the color RETURN Returns to the previous menu Measurement Block Analyzer Mode 8 21 Analyzer Mode Gen START STOP CENTER SPAN NUMBER of POINTS SWEEP TIME MARKER MENU MKR gt START RETURN MKR gt STOP MKR gt CENTER RETURN AFC on OFF TARGET TOLERANCE SENSITIVITY AFC MAX CTRL VOLT AFC MIN CTRL VOLT SWEEP MAX ITERATION SWEEP TYPE LOG FREQ RETURN AUTO FREQ CONTROL MARKER gt MARKER MENU MKR SEARCH gt MARKER SEARCH MENU DETECTION SAMPLE NEG PEAK CARRIER MENU TURN CABLE LOSS COMPEN CARRIER CENTER 2 x CARR CENTER 3xCARR CENTER RETURN DETECTION POS PEAK COMPEN on OFF SLOPE LOSS RETURN cd0j0702 Figure 8 9 Softkey Menus Accessed from Menu Key Analyzer Mode 1 3 Men u Menu SWEEP Displays
268. ly invalid data New reading started but not completed since last access 225 Data out of memory The 4352B has insufficient memory to perform the requested operation 222 Data out of range A legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed because the interpreted value was outside the legal range as defined by the 4352B see IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 5 231 Data questionable Indicates that the measurement accuracy is suspect 104 Data type error The parser recognized a data element that is not allowed For example a numeric or string data was expected but block data was encountered 77 DC Control Current Overload The current through the DC CONTROL connector is too large 20 mA or more Possible problems and the corrective action are shown below a The DUT s control current is too large Verify that the DUT is correctly connected to the 4352B RF IN connector a An effect of the high value capacitor connected to the DUT s power voltage Vec terminal This is a transient error Press DC Control CTRL DELAY and the entry keys to set a sufficiently large value for elimination of this transient error 52 DC Output On Required in AFC The automatic frequency control function was set on however the power or control voltage is not being applied to the DUT Verify that the power control voltages output is set to ON on the LCD information the measurement setting parameter display or the status notati
269. m related to 221 through 229 108 Parameter not allowed More parameters were received than expected for the header For example the SRE command only accepts one parameter so receiving SRE 4 16 is not allowed 75 POWER FAILED ON nnn Serious error Contact your nearest Hewlett Packard office One or more power supply failed where nnn is one of 5 V 15 V 5 V 15 V 65 V and PostRegHot It shows which power line failed When this error occurs the system halts so an external controller cannot read this error using GPIB 22 PRINTER not on not connected out of paper The printer does not respond to control Verify power to the printer and check the interface connection between the analyzer and the printer 284 Program currently running Certain operations dealing with programs may be illegal while the program is running For example deleting a running program might not be possible 280 Program error Indicates that a downloaded program related execution error occurred This error message might be displayed if the 4352B detects an unknown problem related to errors 281 through 289 Messages 11 Error Messages Alphabetical Order 112 Program mnemonic too long The header contains more than twelve characters see IEEE 488 2 7 6 1 4 1 286 Program runtime error A program runtime error of the Instrument BASIC has occurred To get more specific error information use the ERRM or ERRN com
270. m which you purchased this instrument 75 POWER FAILED ON nnn Serious error Contact your nearest Hewlett Packard office One or more power supply failed where nnn is one of 5 V 15 V 5 V 15 V 65 V and PostRegHot It shows which power line failed When this error occurs the system halts so an external controller cannot read this error using GPIB 16 DC Power Current Overload The current through the DC POWER connector is too large 50 mA or more Possible problems and the corrective action are shown below a The DUT s power current is too large Verify that the DUT is correctly connected to the 4352B a An effect of the high value capacitor connected to the DUT s power voltage Vec terminal This is a transient error Wait until the DC POWER voltage is stabilized then perform the measurement 77 DC Control Current Overload The current through the DC CONTROL connector is too large 20 mA or more Possible problems and the corrective action are shown below a The DUT s control current is too large Verify that the DUT is correctly connected to the 4352B RF IN connector a An effect of the high value capacitor connected to the DUT s power voltage Vec terminal This is a transient error Press DC Control CTRL DELAY and the entry keys to set a sufficiently large value for elimination of this transient error 18 RF Level Overload The input level to the 4352B RF IN connector is too high 20 dBm or more
271. mand Instrument BASIC 285 Program syntax error Indicates that a syntax error appears in a downloaded program The syntax used when parsing the downloaded program is device specific 30 Queue overflow A specific code entered into the queue instead of the code that caused the error This code indicates that there is no room in the queue and an error occurred but was not recorded 400 Query error This is the generic query error that the 4352B displays when it cannot detect more specific errors This code indicates only that a query error as defined in IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 7 and 6 3 has occurred 410 Query INTERRUPTED A condition causing an interrupted query error occurred see IEEE 488 2 6 3 2 3 For example a query followed by DAB or GET before a response was completely sent 420 Query UNTERMINATED A condition causing an unterminated query error occurred see IEEE 488 2 6 3 2 2 For example the 4352B was addressed to talk and an incomplete program message was received by the controller 129 RECALL ERROR INSTR STATE PRESET A serious error for example corrupted data is detected on recalling a file and this forced the 4352B to be PRESET 49 RF Freq Out Of Range The DUT s output frequency is not within the measurement range of the 4352B The measurement range is set to 10 MHz to 3 GHz when the 4352B is used alone or set to the selected frequency band when used with 43521A Downconverter Unit Verif
272. message indicates that the DUT s frequency has fluctuated widely in a very short time several hundred kHz in several tens of ms Verify the DUT s output frequency stability 83 FAN Stopped in Downconverter Unit The fan in the 43521A Downconverter Unit is stopped Using it without repair causes the temperature inside the 43521A to increase abnormally which may result in fatal damage It needs repair Contact our service office or the company from which you purchased this instrument 257 File Name Error Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because the file name on the device media was in error For example an attempt was made to copy to a duplicate file name The definition of what constitutes a file name error is device specific 53 FM Deviation Range Overload The DUT s FM deviation is out of the measurement range Press Sense Range FM DEV RANGE and select a measurement range larger than the current setting FM deviations over 200 kHz cannot be measured Messages 6 Error Messages Alphabetical Order 105 GET not allowed A Group Execute Trigger GET was received within a program message see IEEE 488 2 7 7 240 Hardware error Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because of a hardware problem in the 4352B Definition of what constitutes a hard ware problem is completely device specific This error message might be displayed if the 4352B detect
273. meters Time Figure 2 2 LCD Display Tester Mode 1 Measurement Item Displays the measurement item selected by Meas 2 Automatic Frequency Control ON OFF The AFC display and frequency is displayed when the automatic frequency control function is ON In this mode the 4352B keeps controlling the tuning voltage DC control output to maintain the DUT s output frequency at your specified target frequency 3 Softkey Labels Displays the menu labels that define the function of the softkeys immediately to the right of the label 2 4 Front and Rear Panel 4 Measurement Time The measurement time under the current measurement conditions is displayed However the time required for the automatic frequency control function and display is not included 5 Measurement Parameters The measurement conditions for the measurement item are displayed The left side shows the conditions common to each measurement item and the right side shows the conditions peculiar to the present displayed measurement item 6 LO Frequency The frequency of the reference signal that should be input to the 4352B LO IN connector from the external signal generator is displayed When LO lt Frequency gt is displayed the external signal generator is automatically controlled by the 4352B and the signal of the displayed frequency is actually being input When LO lt frequency gt is displayed the external signal generator is not automatically controlled
274. mode The Address menu is used to enter GPIB addresses of peripheral equipment The controller mode determines which device is the system controller and which acts as the master controller Both the 4352B and the external controller cannot become master controllers at the same time Local Menu ADDRESSABLE ONLY SET ADDRESSES SYSTEM CONTROLLER ADDRESS 4352 ADDRESS SG ADDRESS CONTROLLER RETURN CD009007 Figure 10 6 Softkey Menus Accessed from Key SYSTEM CONTROLLER Sets the 4352B as the system controller This mode is used when peripheral equipment is controlled by the 4352B without an external controller This mode can only be selected manually from the 4352B s front panel and can be used only if no active system controller is connected to the system through GPIB If you try to set the system controller mode when another system controller is present CAUTION CAN T CHANGE ANOTHER CONTROLLER ON BUS is displayed ADDRESSABLE ONLY Sets the 4352B to the addressable only mode in which only addresses can be specified This mode is used when an external controller controls peripheral devices or the 4352B SET ADDRESSES Displays the Address Setup menu used to specify and display not only the 4352B GPIB address but the addresses of peripherals Instrument State Block 10 23 Address Setup Menu ADDRESS 4352 Specifies the GPIB address of the 4352B using the entry keys There is no physical GPIB add
275. mode is called the hold mode Note An appearing in the status display area indicates that measurement i conditions have been changed In this case press SINGLE to make a single Y measurement SINGLE SING Makes a single measurement and returns to the hold mode CONTINUDUS CONT Selects the standard trigger mode in which measurements are continuously performed Measurement data on the screen is updated with each measurement TRIG SRC FREE RUN Displays the Trigger Source menu used to select the trigger source MEASURE RESTART REST Aborts the measurement currently in progress and restarts it Use this softkey to update measurement data after having switched devices or changed measurement conditions When the averaging function is ON MEASURE RESTART is effectively the same as AVERAGING RESTART When HOLD is selected as the trigger type MEASURE RESTART executes a single measurement 9 6 Control Block Tri gger RETURN Returns to the previous menu Trigger Source Menu The following softkeys are used to specify the trigger source When a trigger source type other than FREE RUN is selected the 4352B enters the trigger wait state after having made all the necessary settings for the measurement It starts a measurement when it receives a trigger input signal from the specified trigger source TRIGGER FREE RUN TRGS INT Selects the internal trigger EXTERNAL TRGS EXT Selects the exter
276. modes tester and analyzer modes Each mode allows you to make measurements of different measurement items This chapter introduces the measurement procedures listed below Measurement Items Available in Tester Mode RF power measurement DUT VCO Measures the level of the carrier signal outputted from the VCO Frequency measurement DUT VCO Measures the frequency of the carrier signal outputted from the VCO a C N ratio measurement DUT VCO Measures the ratio of the level of the carrier signal outputted from the VCO to the phase noise level at the specified offset frequency Measurement Items Available in Analyzer Mode RF power vs DC control voltage characteristics measurement DUT VCO Measures RF power characteristics with respect to the DC control voltage Frequency tuning sensitivity vs DC control voltage characteristics measurement DUT VCO Measures output carrier frequency and tuning sensitivity characteristics with respect to the DC control voltage Phase noise vs offset frequency characteristics measurement DUT VCO Measures phase noise characteristics with respect to the offset frequency relative to the carrier frequency Integral of phase noise vs offset frequency characteristics measurement DUT VCO Integrates the result of the phase noise characteristics measurement Integration within a specified range is also available Frequency transient measurement DUT PLL Measures frequency fluctuation characteris
277. modulation FM signal waveform after demodulation can be observed on the frequency transient measurement screen using the 4352B built in F V converter The observation is made in the continuous trigger mode 1 Select frequency transient as the measurement item Press Meas RF TRANSIENT 2 Specify the sweep start time and the sweep time Press Menu Press SWEEP Use START and entry keys to specify the sweep start time Use SPAN and entry keys to specify the sweep time See Menu in Appendix E for the allowable ranges for sweep start time and sweep time 3 Select the continuous trigger mode Press Trigger CONTINUOUS 4 Optimize the display for the measurement data Press Display Press AUTO SCALE to optimize the display scale for the measurement data RF Transient 50 kHz REF 175 4 MHz 175 417 MHz os ATN 10dB MAX 190MHz MIN 170MHz REF OHz START O sec Lo 200 MHz SPAN S msec Figure 4 12 Example of Measurement Screen Observation of FM Signal Waveform After Demodulation Note Demodulated waveforms cannot be obtained if the modulated signal frequency is beyond 5 kHz 4 44 Basic Measurement Procedures Measurement Technique This section explains how to perform more stable and precise measurements using the advanced functions of the 4352B Setting the Automatic Frequency Control Function The 4352B can automatically
278. mple covers panel or display Inspect the shipping container for damage If the shipping container or cushioning material is damaged it should be kept until the contents of the shipment have been checked for completeness and the 4352B has been checked mechanically and electrically The contents of the shipment should be as listed in Table 3 1 If the contents are incomplete if there is mechanical damage or defect or if the analyzer does not pass the power on selftests notify the nearest Hewlett Packard office If the shipping container is damaged or the cushioning material shows signs of unusual stress notify the carrier as well as the Hewlett Packard office Keep the shipping materials for the carrier s inspection Installation and Setup Guide 3 1 Contents Table 3 1 Contents Name Agilent Parts No VCO PLL Signal Analyzer BNC Cable 60 cm 4352B 8120 1839 N N Cable 41951 61602 GPIB Cable 8120 3445 10833A Power Cable 8120 4753 BNC BNC Connector 1250 1859 Sasmple Program Disk 04352 18520 CD ROM for manuals 04352 9050x Option ABA only Documents Function Reference 04352 900x0 GPIB Programming Manual 04352 900x7 Manual Supplement for 04352 900x5 Instrument BASIC Users Handbook Instrument BASIC Users Handbook 04155 90151 Option 810 only mini DIN Keyboard 1150 7970 1 CD ROM contains the contents of the Function Reference GPIB Programming Manual Instrument BASIC Users
279. n press SPAN and use the numeric entry keys to enter the sweep span value Example To specify 100 kHz press 1 0 0 and k m Setting the resolution bandwidth Press and RES BW in this order The current setting is displayed on the screen as RES BANDWIDTH x kHz Use the numeric entry keys to change the value Example To specify 100 Hz press 1 0 0 and x1 Setting the video bandwidth Press and VIDEO BW in this order The current setting is displayed on the screen as VIDEO BAND WIDTH x kHz Use the numeric entry keys to change the value Example To specify 100 Hz press 1 0 0 x1 Setting the averaging factor Press and AVERAGING FACTOR in this order The current setting is displayed on the screen as AVERAGE FACTOR xx Use the numeric entry keys to change the value Example To specify 8 times press 8 and x1 Setting the averaging to ON Press AVERAGING on OFF to toggle it AVERAGING ON off 5 28 Basic Measurements Using the 43521A 12 Setting the noise integration Press and MARKER in this order Press INTG NOISE on OFF to toggle it INTG NOISE ON off 13 Adjusting the scale for measurement trace Press and AUTO SCALE The scale is adjusted automatically The measurement result is displayed on the screen as shown in Figure 5 11 14 Reading the measurement values At the lower left of the screen the result of the noise integration is displayed Intg Noise xxxx dBc This value
280. n you have selected a frequency band it becomes underlined Pressing RETURN displays the 1 level upper menu in which this key is displayed together with the selected frequency band as FREQ BAND 3 1 6 6G There are 3 kinds of frequency band menus The displayed menu is determined depending on the maximum frequency of the external signal source entered with SG MAX FREQ on the menu If DOWNCONV on OFF under is set to OFF this key is displayed in a faint color as FREQ BAND 10M 3G and the frequency band is always set to 10 MHz to 3 GHz automatically INST TYPE Displays the Instrument Type menu Instrument Type Menu INST TYPE VCO TESTER VT Selects the tester mode and displays the VCO Tester menu VCO ANALY VA Selects the analyzer mode and displays the VCO Analyzer menu See Chapter 8 for more information on this menu Measurement Block Tester Mode 7 3 Meas Tester Mode SIGNAL SEARCH SIGSRCH Searches for finds out the carrier signal from the DUT The search is performed within the frequency band Meas FREQ BAND xx xx that has been selected If the carrier is found out SIGNAL FOUND x xxxx GHz is displayed and the frequency is automatically set as the nominal frequency By setting the nominal frequency the frequency of the external signal source and the input attenuator are set to proper values which realizes correct measurements If the carrier signal cannot be detected within the frequency band an error
281. nal trigger through the BNC on the rear panel GPIB TRGS BUS Selects the trigger from GPIB MANUAL TRGS MAN Selects the manual trigger VALUE TRGS VAL Analyzer Mode Generates a trigger when the device output frequency reaches the specified frequency in frequency transient measurements Use TRGVALU lt Value gt to specify the frequency at which to generate a trigger Use TRIG PLRIY POS neg to select whether to generate a trigger when the device output frequency exceeds or falls below the specified frequency This softkey can be only used in frequency transient measurements TRIG PLRTY POS neg TRGP POS NEG Selects whether to start a measurement at the leading or trailing edge of the input signal This signal is applied through the external trigger terminal on the rear panel when an external trigger is selected POS neg positive Starts measurement at the leading edge of TTL input signal pos NEG negative Starts measurement at the trailing edge of TTL input signal When the value trigger function is ON in a frequency transient measurement this softkey is used to select whether to generate a trigger when the device output frequency exceeds POS or falls below NEG the specified frequency Control Block 9 7 DC Control DC Control DC Control CTRL VOLTAGE MIN CTRL VOLTAGE MAX CTRL VOLTAGE CTRL DELAY CTRLV CAL EXECUTE CTRLV CAL OUTPUT on OFF CTRLV CORR on OFF RETURN CD008001 Figure 9 4 S
282. nal within a range of 601 MHz to 603 MHz which is the frequency difference This IF signal is converted in frequency again inside the 4352B to produce the IF signal within the range of 1 MHz to 3 MHz Its frequency is measured by the FV converter As described above by changing the frequency of the local signal depending on the measured signal frequency you can specify any frequencies as the minimum and maximum frequencies while keeping the frequency span of 2 MHz b When selecting the frequency span of 20 MHz When selecting the frequency span of 20 MHz set the frequency of the local signal external signal source so that the difference from the measured signal frequency is within the range of 610 MHz to 630 MHz The measured signal and the local signal is inputted to the mixer inside the 43521A and the mixer outputs the IF signal within the range of 610 MHz to 630 MHz which is the difference frequency This IF signal is converted in frequency again inside the 4352B to produce the IF signal within the range of 10 MHz to 30 MHz It is converted by the 10 divide ratio divider and then measured by the FV converter As described above by Technical Information C 5 Technical Information changing the frequency of the local signal depending on the measured signal frequency you can specify any frequencies as the minimum and maximum frequencies while keeping the frequency span of 20 MHz c When selecting the maximum frequency span 512 MHz
283. nction Displays titles Adjusts on screen information colors Menu Specifies the sweep parameters Specifies the automatic frequency control function Controls the marker function Sets the sweep range based on the carrier frequency Compensates for cable loss Measurement Block Analyzer Mode 8 1 Analyzer Mode Meas MEAS RF POWER FREQUENCY DC POWER CURRENT FM DEVIATION CARRIER NOISE FREQ BAND 10M 3G INST TYPE INST TYPE VCO TESTER VCO ANALY RETURN ANALY RF POWER FREQUENCY PHASE NOISE RF TRANSIENT SPECTRUM FREQ BAND 10M 3G INST TYPE Frequency Band Menu cd00602 Figure 8 1 Softkey Menus Accessed from Key Analyzer Mode Frequency Band Menu FREQ BAND 10M 3G Y FREQ BAND 10M 3G 2 5 3 6G 3 1 6 6G SIGNAL SEARCH NOMINAL FREQ RETURN FREQ BAND 10M 3G 2 5 3 6G 3 1 6 6G 5 4 9 0G SIGNAL SEARCH NOMINAL FREQ RETURN FREQ BAND 10M 3G 2 4 6 6G 5 4 12 6G SIGNAL SEARCH NOMINAL FREQ RETURN SG MAX FREQ lt 4 2GHz 4 2 GHz SG MAX FREQ lt 6 0 GHz 6 0 GHz lt SG MAX FREQ cd00603 Figure 8 2 Frequency band menu 8 2 Measurement Block Analyzer Mode Analyzer Mode Meas Menu VCO Analyzer Menu ANALY RF POWER MEAS POWE Selects RF power characteristics vs DC control voltage as the measurement item FREQUENCY MEAS FREQ Selects fre
284. ncy transient data See Appendix C for details 8 8 Measurement Block Analyzer Mode Analyzer Mode Bw Avg AVERAGING RESTART AVERAGING on OFF AVERAGING FACTOR VIDEO BW RES BW NOISE BW NOISE PLL AUTO wide SENSE APERTURE Figure 8 4 Softkey Menus Accessed from Bw Avg Key Analyzer Mode Bw Avg Menu AVERAGING RESTART AVERREST Resets the sweep to sweep averaging function and restarts the sweep count at 1 at the beginning of the next sweep The sweep count is displayed at the left hand side of the screen AVERAGING on OFF AVER OFF O 0N 1 Turns the trace averaging function ON or OFF When the averaging function is ON Avg appears together with the trigger count in the status display area on the left hand side of the screen Whenever an instrument state change affecting the measurement data is made the trigger for averaging is reset to 1 Averaging starts at count 1 when you turn ON the averaging function for the first time or when you restart this function using AVERAGING RESTART Measurement data is averaged and the displayed data is updated each time the measurement is complete until the count reaches the specified averaging factor The trigger count appears below Avg in the status display area The trigger count is incremented by 1 before each measurement When the count reaches the specified averaging factor the measurement data continues to be updated weighted by that averag
285. nd right front sides of the analyzer using the screws provided Remove all four feet lift bar on the inner side of the foot and slide the foot toward the bar Installation and Setup Guide 3 9 Basic Measurement Procedures Introduction This chapter describes the basic VCO and PLL measurement procedures available with the 4352B The 4352B offers 2 measurement modes tester and analyzer modes Each mode allows you to make measurements of different measurement items Select the measurement mode required for your measurement needs Basic Measurement Procedures 4 1 You can quickly become familiar with the 4352B operations by performing the procedures in this chapter Figure 4 1 shows the basic measurement flow for these procedures START 1 Cable Connection 2 Power ON 3 Connecting Device 4 Initial Setup 4 1 Verifying HP IB Controller Mode 4 2 Setting Up to Control the External Signal Generator via HP IB 4 3 Specifying DC Power Voltage 5 Selecting easurement Mode 6 Measurements in Tester Mode 7 Measurements in Analyzer Mode no 7 1 Specifying DC Control Voltage Specifying DC Control Voltage Applying DC Voltages RF Power Characteristic vs DC Control Applying DC Voltages Voltage Frequency Tuning Sensitivity RF Power Characteristics vs DC Control Voltage Phase Noise Characteristics vs Offset Frequency Frequency Frequency Transient DC Power Current Spectrum Comparison between
286. nect the cables to so that the correct reference signal is output from the external signal generator Note Cables and connectors required for the following connections are furnished i with the 4352B Y m Rear Panel o Connect the BNC BNC connector between the 2nd IF Output Connector and 2nd IF Input Connector o Connect the GPIB cable between 4352B and External Signal Generator GPIB connectors Connect the BNC BNC cable between the EXT REF Input Connector 4352B and EXT REF Output Connector External Signal Generator a Front Panel o Connect the N N cable between LO IN Connector 4352B and RF Connector External Signal Generator After all cables adapter connections have been completed connect the power cable according to the following steps Warning For protection from electrical shock the power cable ground must not be b defeated The power plug must be plugged into an outlet that provides a protective earth ground connection 1 Connect the power cable to the power connector on the rear panel of the 4352B 2 Connect the power cable to the outlet Basic Measurement Procedures 4 7 2 Power ON 1 Turn the external signal generator power ON 2 Press the 4352B LINE switch When the power on self test is completed about 10 seconds information about the installed options is displayed Note m The following message is displayed on the LCD just after the power on i sequence is compl
287. nector front panel 4 Perform RF Power RF Frequency FM Deviation and C N Ratio measurements in tester mode and verify that each measured value is within the following limits Measurement Item Normal Value RF Power 2 5 dBm 1 dBm RF Frequency 10 MHz 100 kHz FM Deviation range 2 kHz detection band 300 Hz 3 kHz 3 Hzrms or less C N Ratio offset 1 kHz 110 dBc or more E offset 10 kHz 130 dBc or more E offset 100 kHz 140 dBc or more F 2 Fault Diagnosis for the 4352S Measurement System Perform the following steps after the verification above 5 Set the measurement mode to the tester mode Press Meas Press INST TYPE INSI IYPE VCO TESTER 6 Hold trigger Press Trigger Press HOLD 7 Select FM deviation measurement as the measurement item Press Meas Press FM DEVIATION 8 Set HPF to 300 Hz Press Bw Avg Press FM DETECTION Press HP FILTER 300Hz 9 Set LPF to 3 kHz Press Bw Avg Press FM DETECTION Press LP FILTER 3kHz 10 Execute FM DEV CAL Press Menu Press FM DEV CAL Press EXECUTE DEV CAL Your analyzer is operating correctly if the message FM DEV CAL FACTOR is displayed on the screen If CAUTION Invalid Dev Cal is displayed on the screen your analyzer is probably defective Fault Diagnosis for the 4352S Measurement System F 3 Diagnosis for the 43521A Downconverter Unit Disgnosis of the 600 MHz output This section describes how
288. next page of the measurement parameter list being displayed 10 4 Instrument State Block Cony PREV PAGE PREP Displays the previous page of the operating parameter list being displayed RESTORE DISPLAY RESD Ends the display of the operating parameter list and displays the measurement screen Instrument State Block 10 5 Save Recall Save Recall Save Recall Menu Save Recall SAVE FILE STATE SAVE BINARY RE SAVE FILE DATA ONLY SAVE ASCII RECALL FILE GRAPHICS FILE UTILITIES 4352A STATE DEFINE SAVE DATA STOR DEV DISK FILE UTILITIES STOR DEV DISK STOR DEV DISK RETURN file name SELECT LETTER file name SPACE flo name BACK SPACE ERASE TITLE PREV FILES DONE NEXT FILES STOR DEV DISK STOR DEV DISK CANCEL file name file name file name DATA ON off MEM on OFF LIMIT on OFF RETURN file name PREV FILES NEXT FILES STOR DEV DISK FILE UTILITY MENU FILE UTILITY MENU CD0090002 Figure 10 2 Softkey Menus Accessed from Save Recall Key 1 3 SAVE FILE Displays the Save File Menu which allows the selection of the save format RE SAVE FILE RESAVD lt Character String gt Displays the File Select Menu Select the file to be re saved from this menu RECALL FILE Displays the File Select Menu Select the file to be recalled from this menu Auto Recall Function When the 4352B is turned on it searches for a file
289. nt Measurements Analyzer Mode in Appendix C Y 4 32 Basic Measurement Procedures 7 7 Spectrum Target Device VCO or PLL A spectrum measurement is performed 1 Check that the modulation output is OFF Press Mod and confirm that MOD OUT on OFF is selected 2 Select Spectrum as the measurement item Press Meas SPECTRUM 3 Specify the frequency sweep range Press Menu Press SWEEP Perform one of the following two procedures to enter the sweep range m Press START and entry keys to enter the sweep start value Then press STOP and entry keys to enter the sweep stop value m Press CENTER and entry keys to enter the sweep center value Then press SPAN and entry keys to enter the sweep span value 4 Specify the resolution bandwidth Press Bw Avg Press RES BW and entry keys to enter the resolution bandwidth 5 Move the carrier frequency to the center of the full span Press Menu Press CARRIER MENU Press CARRIER CENTER The carrier frequency is set to the center frequency and the carrier signal is on the center of the full sweep range 6 Optimize the display scale for the measurement data Press Display Press AUTO SCALE to optimize the display scale for the measurement data Basic Measurement Procedures 4 33 Spectrum 10 dB REF O dBm D ATN 5 dB RBW 3 kHz VBW 3 kHz SWP 2 235 Sec CENTER 200 MHz LO 225 9 MHz SPAN 10 MHz
290. nt is complete until the count reaches the specified averaging factor The trigger count appears below Avg in the status display area The trigger count is incremented by 1 before each measurement When the count reaches the specified averaging factor the measurement data continues to be updated weighted by that averaging factor AVERAGING FACTOR AVERFACT lt Value gt Specifies the averaging factor number of times for averaging The allowable range of values you can specify for this factor varies depending on the measurement item selected A large offset frequency selected for OFFSET FREQ in C N ratio measurements can result in large fluctuations of the measurement data This occurs because the bandwidth for noise measurements used in the 4352B expands with an increase in offset frequency These fluctuations can be minimized by specifying the proper averaging factor NOISE BW CNBW lt Value gt Sets the converted noise bandwidth for C N measurements Measurement Block Tester Mode 7 7 Bw Avg Tester Mode For the noise measurement internally performed in the 4352B the resolution band width is automatically determined based on the offset frequency specified with OFFSET FREQ and cannot be changed by the user The noise level used for C N ratio measurement is derived by converting the noise bandwidth which you set with NOISE BW OFFSET FREQ CNOFREQ lt Value gt Sets the offset from the carrier frequency to make a no
291. nt item Press Meas DC POWER CURRENT The DC power current measured value is displayed on the screen 6 6 FM Deviation Measurement This is the deviation variation width of VCO carrier frequency caused by the modulation signal When the DUT is a VCO that has an FM modulation function the 4352B inputs the modulation signal and measures the deviation of the carrier frequency The frequency of the modulation signal from the 4352B is constantly fixed at 1 kHz 1 Set the amplitude of the modulation signal Press Mod Press MOD AMPLITUDE Press 1 x1 The modulation signal amplitude is set to 1 Vrms 2 Output the modulation signal Press MOD QUT on OFF to toggle it MOD OUT ON off 3 Select FM deviation measurement mode Press Meas FM DEVIATION The FM deviation measured value is displayed on the screen 4 Set the detection bandwidth Specify the cutoff frequency for high pass and low pass filters HPF and LPF to pass the demodulated signal input to the 4352B Determine the cutoff frequencies by evaluating the VCO characteristics and applications Press Bw Avg Press FM DETECTION 4 16 Basic Measurement Procedures The softkey menu used to set the cutoff frequencies for HPF and LPF is displayed For both HPF and LPF press the softkey that corresponds to the cutoff frequency that you want to use Press RETURN 5 Select the FM deviation measurement range Press Sense Range Press EM DEV R
292. ntents 2 1 a a a a 3 2 Power Requirements 3 2 Power Cable n a a a a a a 3 2 NReplacing Fuse Ce 3 5 Fuse Selection cc CA 3 5 Replacing Fuse 02 004 A 3 5 Connecting the BNC BNC connector Cr a 3 6 Operation Environment 08 Loe ee 3 6 Providing clearance to dissipate heat at installation site 2 4 3 6 Instruction for Cleaning 1 a 3 7 Rack Handle Installation 2 2 2 A 3 8 Option ICN Handle Kit 2 3 8 Installing the Handle 2 2 a a a a o 3 8 Option 1CM Rack Mount Kit 3 9 Mounting the Rack 3 9 Option 1CP Rack Mount amp Handle Kit 0022 2 200084 4 3 9 Mounting the Handle and Rack eee 3 9 4 Basic Measurement Procedures Introduction a a a a a a 4 1 Measurement Overview 4 5 Device Characteristics a a a k a a a 4 5 Voltage Control Oscillator VCO a a a 2 e 4 5 Phase Locked Loop PLL a A 4 5 Required Equipment a a a a a a a 4 6 1 Cable Connection oao a a a a A 4 7 2 NS a 4 8 3 Connecting Device we 4 9 A Initial Setup ww a A 4 11 4 1 Verifying GPIB Controller Mode a 4 11 4 2 Setting Up to Control the External Signal Generator via GPIB 4 11 4 3 Specifying DC Power Voltage cc e o 4 12 5 Selecting Measurement Mode a a 0 0 0 ee ee eee 4 13 6 Measurements in Tester Mode 2 2 a a 4 14 6 1 Spe
293. nternal frequency counter Note The automatic frequeney control function starts immediately before i measurement starts During the entire measurement the DC control voltage is Y kept constant Therefore the DC control voltage level is not changed even if the actual frequency is shifted or changed during the measurement Be sure to take this into consideration for measurements with long measurement time conditions For example the specified averaging factor might have problems due to the DC power control voltage fluctuation Measurement Block Tester Mode 7 19 Menu Tester Mode AFC on OFF AFC OFFIOI ONI1 Turns the automatic frequency control function ON or OFF TARGET AFCTARG lt Value gt Specifies the target frequency in Hz TOLERANCE AFCTOL lt Value gt Specifies the tolerance limits between the target frequency and the actual measured frequency in Hz SENSITIVIY AFCSENS lt Value gt Specifies the approximate tuning sensitivity of the DUT in Hz V AFC MAX CTRL VOLT AFCMAXV lt Value gt AFC MIN CTRL VOLT AFCMINV lt Value gt These two softkeys specify the maximum and minimum DC control voltage levels for use with the automatic frequency control function Note that the value specified with MAX CTRL VOLTAGE available under DC Control has priority over the value specified with AFC MIN CTRL VOLT MAX ITERATION AFCITER lt Value gt Maximum iteration for the DC control voltage setting loo
294. nu ASSIGN 0Hp4352 Produces the ASSIGN 0Hp4352 TO 800 command at the cursor s current position QUIPUL Hp4352 Produces the OUTPUT Hp4352 command at the cursor s current position ENTER GHp4352 Produces the ENTER Hp4352 command at the cursor s current position WRITEIO Produces the WRITEIO command at the cursor s current position EXECUTE Produces the EXECUTE command at the cursor s current position Instrument State Block 10 17 READIO Produces the READIO command at the cursor s current position GOTO LINE Allows you to move the cursor to any line number or to a label After pressing GOTO LINE type a line number or a label and then press x1 The cursor moves to the specified line or label END EDIT Exits the edit mode Memory Partition Menu mm K RAM nn K BASIC Assigns mm kBytes to the RAM disk memory and nn kBytes to Instrument BASIC as the memory size The disk size that will be actually assigned is displayed in the softkey in place of mm and nn DONE Displays the Partition Change YES NO menu which selects whether to change the assignment Of memory size CANCEL Cancels the change in memory size assignment and returns to the previous menu Partition Change YES NO Menu CHANGE YES Changes the memory size assignment When this key is pressed the 4352B goes to the reset state NO Cancels the change in memory size assignment and
295. nu The files to be deleted can be located on the floppy disk or RAM disk memory If a file is selected and the softkey is pressed the Purge YES NO Menu is displayed CREATE DIRECTORY CRED lt Character String gt Specifies creating a new directory in a DOS format disk This function is not available for a LIF file The Character mput Menu is displayed CHANGE DIRECTORY CHAD lt Character String gt Selects the current directory on a DOS format disk to be changed This function is not available for a LIF file The Character Input Menu is displayed Instrument State Block 10 9 COPY FILE FILC Displays the File Select menu This softkey is used to select the files to be copied from among options in this menu When copying files between the floppy disk and RAM disk memory the disk formats of the disk and the RAM disk memory must be the same format This copy function cannot copy files when the format of the RAM disk is different from the format of the floppy disk The Character Input Menu is displayed INITIALIZE INID Displays the Initialize YES NO Menu When saving data into a new disk be sure to initialize the disk before saving data A new disk can be initialized in either LIF format or DOS format Note Note that the analyzer can initalize 1 44 Mbyte disks only Y FORMAT LIF DISF LIF DISF DOS Selects the LIF or DOS format for initializing a new disk STOR DEVE STODDISK STODMEMO Selects the floppy
296. oes not change if the instrument is turned off or even if is pressed Save Data Definition Menu DATA ON off SAVDAT OFF O ON 1 Selects whether to save measurement data Select oN to save or OFF not to save data MEM on OFF SAVMEM OFF 0 0N 1 Selects whether to save the memory data Select on to save or OFF not to save the memory data LIMIT on OFF SAVLIM OFF 0 0N 1 Analyzer Mode Selects whether to save the upper lower limit value Select on to save or OFF not to save the limit value RETURN Returns to the previous menu 10 8 Instrument State Block Save Recall File Utilities Menu FILE UTILTI ENU PURGE FILE CREATE DIRECTORY y CHANGE DIRECTORY COPY FILE INITIALIZE file name FORMAT LIF file name PURGE YES STOR DEV DIS file name NO RETUR file name PREV FILES EXT FILES STOR DEV DISK gt SELECT LETTE SPAC BACK SPAC ERASE TITL DO STOR DEV DIS CANCE u m m m m 7 file name SELECT LETTE file name SPAC file name BACK SPAC file name ERASE TITL PREV FILES DO NEXT FILES STOR DEV DIS STOR DEV DISK CANC u m m m m 7 INITIALIZE DISK YES Figure 10 3 Softkey Menus Accessed from Key 3 3 PURGE FILE PURG lt Character String gt Displays the File Select menu This softkey is used to select the files to be deleted from among options in this me
297. of the 4352B timing considerations For example the 4352B was not ready to respond 113 Undefined header The header is syntactically correct but it is undefined for the 4352B For example XYZ is not defined for the 4352B 160 WRONG I O PORT DIRECTION The direction setting for the I O port input or output is incorrect Verify that a signal from an external instrument is being sent to an input port and a signal from an output port is being sent to an external instrument 79 X tal PLL Unlocked 40 MHz The 4352B s internal PLL cannot be locked Verify the reference frequency input to the EXT REF input connector on the 4352B rear panel is 10 MHz 100 Hz 860 X tal PLL Unlocked 85 6 MHz The 4352B s internal PLL cannot be locked Adjustment or repair is necessary Contact our service office or the company from which you purchased the 4352B Messages 15 Error Messages Numerical Order Error Messages in Numerical Order Note The positive number error messages are listed first and then negative number i error messages are listed Y 0 No error The error queue is empty Every error in the queue has been read OUTPERRO query or the queue was cleared by power on or the CLS command 13 BACKUP DATA LOST Data checksum error on the battery backup memory has occurred Wait until the battery is re charged approximately 10 minutes after turning the 4352B on 22 PRINTER not on not connected out o
298. oftkey Menus Accessed from Key Tester Mode DC Control CTRL VOLTAGE MKR CTRL VOLT MIN CTRL VOLTAGE MAX CTRL VOLTAGE CTRL DELAY CTRLV CAL EXECUTE CTRLV CAL OUTPUT on OFF CTRLV CORR on OFF RETURN Figure 9 5 Softkey Menus Accessed from DC Control Key Analyzer Mode DC Control Menu CTRL VOLTAGE VCTRL lt Value gt Specifies the DC control voltage level in V This softkey cannot be used in RF power or frequency Tuning Sensitivity measurements MKR CTRL VOLT MKRVCTRL Analyzer Mode Specifies the X coordinate value of the marker reading as the control voltage level This softkey is useful when you switch measurement items from one in which the DC control voltage is used for the sweep over to another in which the DC control voltage is not used for the sweep Using this softkey allows measurements to be performed with the DC control voltage set at the level specified by the marker This softkey can be used in RF power or frequency Tuning Sensitivity measurements MIN CTRL VOLTAGE MINVCTRL lt Value gt Specifies the minimum DC control voltage level in volts The DC control voltage level specified with CTRL VOLTAGE is ignored if it is below the level specified with this softkey In this case the DC control voltage level is automatically set at the minimum level 9 8 Control Block MAX CTRL VOLTAGE MAXVCTRL lt Value gt Specifies the maximum DC control voltage level in volts The DC
299. olution is between 75 and 600 dpi TOP MARGIN TMARG Specifies the top margin of printing by inch The settable margin range is between O and 5 inches in step of 0 1 inch LFT MARGIN LMARG Specifies the left margin of printing by inch The settable margin range is between O and 5 inches in step of 0 1 inch DEFAULT SETUP DFLT Resets the printing parameters to the following default settings e Printing resolution 75 dpi e Form feed ON e Sheet orientation Portraint e Softkey label printing OFF e Top margin 1 0 inch e Left margin 1 0 inch RETURN Returns to the previous menu Screen Menu PRINT STANDARD PRINALL Prints one page of the screen with the measurement parameter list using an HP graphic printer or compatible printer STANDARD indicating a black and white printer or COLOR indicating a color printer appears within the brackets This display shows which printer has been selected as the default printer on the Print Setup menu The power on default is STANDARD Also the default for a color printer is black ink printing COPY ABORT COPA Aborts the printing currently in progress COPY TIME on OFF COPT OFF O 0N 1 Turns printing time and date ON or OFF When you select print the time and date are printed first then the information on the screen is printed See the Clock Setup Menu for how to change the date or time of the internal clock NEXT PAGE NEXP Displays the
300. on and the phase noise Usually the measurement error becomes larger when the difference in phase noise between the DUT and the 4352B or external signal generator becomes smaller Example We assume that the phase noise of the DUT the 4352B and the external signal source is 135 dBc 140 dBc and 145 dBc respectively Then the phase noise measurement error can be determined as follows Note that phase noise is normally expressed in dBc Therefore the unit must be converted to dBc before substitution into the expression shown above Procedure 1 Convert each value in dB to the equivalent in V 2 Calculate the 4352B reading using the expression given above 3 Convert the 4352B reading in V back to the equivalent in dB 4 Subtract the DUT phase noise from the 4352B reading to determine the error In this example we obtain 1 51 dB as the measurement error through the following calculation Vvco V 10 185 20 1 778x10 Vass24 V 107190 20 1 0x10 7 Voa V 10 145 20 5 623x 1075 Vreading V 2 12x 1077 Vreading AB 20log Vreading VI 133 49 Vrco dB 20log Vvco V 135 Phase noise measurement error dB 133 49 135 1 51 C 2 Technical Information Technical Information 1 3 Measured values when there is a spurious component In the tester mode a measured value is represented by averaging measurement points in the frequency range that is proportional to t
301. ons If the power control voltage output is turned to OFF press DC Power or DC Control and OUTPUT ON off Messages 5 Error Messages Alphabetical Order 16 DC Power Current Overload The current through the DC POWER connector is too large 50 mA or more Possible problems and the corrective action are shown below a The DUT s power current is too large Verify that the DUT is correctly connected to the 4352B a An effect of the high value capacitor connected to the DUT s power voltage Vec terminal This is a transient error Wait until the DC POWER voltage is stabilized then perform the measurement 135 DUPLICATE FILE EXTENSION The extension name entered is already used for other file types Use a different extension name 200 Execution error This is the generic syntax error that the 4352B displays when it cannot detect more specific errors This code indicates only that an execution error as defined in IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 5 has occurred 123 Exponent too large The magnitude of the exponent was larger than 32000 see IEEE 488 2 7 7 2 4 1 44 F V Input Overflow The input frequency to the 4352B s F V converter is too high This message indicates that the DUT s frequency has fluctuated widely in a very short time several hundred kHz in several tens of ms Verify the DUT s output frequency stability 43 F V Input Underflow The input frequency to the 4352B s F V converter is too low This
302. or Messages Alphabetical Order 100 CAN T CHANGE ANOTHER CONTROLLER ON BUS The 4352B cannot assume the mode of system controller until the active controller is removed from the bus or relinquishes the bus See the 4352B GPIB Programming Manual 14 CAN T CHANGE NUMBER OF POINTS The number of points in the spectrum measurement cannot be changed manually except in zero span 132 CAN T SAVE GRAPHICS WHEN COPY IN PROGRESS If you attempt to save graphics when a print is in progress this error message is displayed Wait until the print is completed then save the graphics again 63 Can t Use 12 Bit I O Port This message appears if you execute an IBASIC or GPIB command to operate the 12 Bit I O Port with DOWNCONV ON off set to ON If DOWNCONV ON off is set to ON the 12 Bit I O Port is connected to the 43521A Therefore you cannot use this kind of commands 281 Cannot create program Indicates that an attempt to create a program was unsuccessful A reason for the failure might include not enough memory 54 Carrier Overload The carrier level in a C N ratio measurement or a phase noise measurement is too large The 4352B RF IN connector s input level is too large Verify the input level to the 4352B RF IN connector 140 Character data error This error as well as errors 141 through 148 are generated when analyzing the syntax of a character data element This error message might be displayed if the 4352B detects an un
303. ore CENTER and SPAN are not available 8 Specifying the converted bandwidth 10 Press Bw Avg and NOISE BW in this order The current setting is displayed on the screen as NOISE BAND WIDTH x Hz Use the numeric entry keys to change the value Example Press 1 and x1 Generally use 1 Hz preset value of this instrument Setting the averaging factor Press and AVERAGING FACTOR in this order The current setting is displayed on the screen as AVERAGE FACTOR xx Use the numeric entry keys to enter averaging factor Example Press 8 and x1 Setting the averaging to ON Press AVERAGING on OFF to toggle it AVERAGING ON off Basic Measurements Using the 43521A 5 25 11 Adjusting the scale for measurement trace Press Display and AUTO SCALE in this order The scale is adjusted automatically The measurement result is displayed on the screen as shown in Figure 5 10 Note The minimum measurable value in a phase noise measurement is restricted i by the phase noise characteristics and spurious characteristics of the external Y signal source you use Note When the CAUTION 2nd PLL Unlocked message appears on the LCD screen i follow the steps below to alter the bandwidth of the 2nd PLL inside the 4352B Y to WIDE 1 Press Bw Avg 2 Press NOISE PLL AUTO wide to toggle it NOISE PLL auto WIDE Duc Phase Noise 26 dB REF dBc 93 514 dBc Loo Pod Loo 31 622777 kHz 1 Hz SHP__ 7
304. orm after demodulation Observes the waveform of an FM signal after demodulation You should also be familiar with the following operations Basic Measurement Procedures 4 3 How to specify DC power voltage How to specify DC control voltage How to use the automatic frequeney control function How to set up the external signal generator How to use the cable loss compensation function Note The measurement procedures described in this chapter assumes that the i continuous trigger mode is selected Y Perform the following steps to select the continuous trigger mode if required 1 Press Trigger 2 Press CONTINUOUS 4 4 Basic Measurement Procedures Measurement Overview This chapter uses a stand alone system in the examples use to explain the measurement procedures This system consists of the 4352B and an external signal generator In this system the 4352B controls the external signal generator via GPIB Note The 4352B can also be used as a part of the measurement system controlled i by an external controller such as a PC In such a system you can perform Y measurement automatically by running a program written in BASIC See the 4352B GPIB Programming Manual for more details Device Characteristics In this measurement example a device under test DUT that has the following characteristics is used Voltage Control Oscillator VCO Power Voltage 5V Control Voltage 4V Maximum Allowable Control Voltage L
305. p cycles The measurement and calculation is repeated attempting to determine the optimum DC control voltage level for the target frequency until the number of loop eycles reaches the value specified here A value from 1 to 999 can be entered RETURN Returns to the previous menu 7 20 Measurement Block Tester Mode Menu Tester Mode Cable Loss Compensation Menu This menu is used to make settings or adjustments associated with the cable loss compensation function When this function is ON the 4352B compensates for level loss on a cable using the assumption that the cable characteristics are as shown in Figure 7 10 Level loss on a cable is defined in terms of the frequency domain Loss dB Slope dB GHz gt 1GHz Frequency GHz Figure 7 10 Cable Frequency Characteristics for Level Loss Used by the Cable Loss Compensation Function COMPEN on OFF LCOMP OFF O ON 1 Turns the cable loss compensation function ON or OFF This softkey can only be used in RF power measurements SLOPE SLOPE lt Value gt Specifies the slope of the cable level loss frequency characteristics loss frequency in dB GHz If the DC loss value specified with LOSS is 0 the loss at 1 GHz can be directly entered for SLOPE See Figure 7 10 LOSS LOSS lt Value gt Specifies the cable loss at DC 0 Hz in dB RETURN Returns to the previous menu Measurement Block Tester Mode 7 21 Menu Tester Mode
306. p4352 Esb UNTIL BIT Esb 0 RETURN 1 END Sample program using the value trigger function 2 2 A 12 Manual Changes Miscellaneous Changes The option system of the 4352B has changed since July 2003 Apply the following changes New Option Number Old Option Number Remark 700 Standard DC control voltage 0 to 20V Standard 1 001 Expand DC control voltage 15 to 35V same as the left one 810 Add Keyboard 1A2 Delete Keyboard 1CM Rack Mount Kit same as the left one 1CN Handle Kit same as the left one 1CP Rackmount and Handle Kit same as the left one ABA U S English localization 3 ABA U S English localization ABJ Japan Japanese localization 3 ABJ Japan Japanese localization OBW Add Service Manual same as the left number OB1 Add Operation Manual 4 OBO Delete Operation Manual 1 In the previous system an option for the Expand DC control voltage was available only for Add option In the new option system it is available for the Add and No requiring the customer to select either of them 2 In the previous option system the keyboard comes as one of standard accessories In the new option system it will be attached only when you choose option 810 3 In the previous system the option number is used to choose the language of the operation manual set standard accessory In the ne
307. phase noise measurement function in the analyzer mode Refer to the first section of Appendix C Technical Information for how phase noise measurement in each mode differs Basic Measurements Using the 43521A 5 17 Note The minimum measurable value in a C N ratio measurement is restricted by the i phase noise characteristics and spurious characteristics of the external signal Y source you use Note When the CAUTION 2nd PLL Unlocked message appears on the LCD screen i follow the steps below to alter the bandwidth of the 2nd PLL inside the 4352B Y to WIDE a Press Bw Avg b Press NOISE PLL AUTO wide to toggle it NOISE PLL auto WIDE 5 18 Basic Measurements Using the 43521A 3 Measurements in Analyzer Mode In this section you measure the characteristics of VCO or PLL in the analyzer mode Note The phrase Use the numeric entry keys to enter implies that after A entering your desired value you have to press x1 k m M or G n to Y specify the proper unit Notice that when you wish to specify a non physical value such as an averaging factor press x1 after entering the value See Chapter 6 for more details Note The DC control voltage level specified in the analyzer mode is applicable only i when the phase noise measurement or the spectrum measurement for VCO is Y performed In other measurement items the DC control voltage within the range defined with SWEEP described l
308. played if the 4352B detects an unknown problem related to errors 211 through 219 211 Trigger ignored A GET TRG or triggering signal was received and recognized by the 4352B but was ignored because of the 4352B timing considerations For example the 4352B was not ready to respond 213 Init ignored A request for a measurement initiation was ignored as another measurement was already in progress Messages 27 Error Messages Numerical Order 220 Parameter error Indicates that a program data element related error occurred This error message might be displayed if the 4352B detects an unknown problem related to 221 through 229 221 Settings conflict A legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed due to the current device state See IEEE 488 2 6 4 5 3 and 11 5 1 1 5 222 Data out of range A legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed because the interpreted value was outside the legal range as defined by the 4352B see IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 5 223 Too much data A legal program data element of block expression or string type was received that contained more data than the 4352B could handle due to memory or related device specific requirements 224 Illegal parameter value Used where exact value from a list of possibilities was expected 225 Data out of memory The 4352B has insufficient memory to perform the requested operation 230 Da
309. played on the screen as TARGET POSITION RATIO xx FREQ SPAN Use the numeric entry keys to enter the target position value Example To specify 50 press 5 0 and x1 Setting the frequency span Press MAX 512MHz MAX 512MHz is underlined Setting the sweep start time Press Menu SWEEP and START The current value is displayed on the screen as START TIME xx sec Use the numeric entry keys to enter the delay time between the measurement trigger and the sweep start Example To specify O sec press 0 and x1 Note The setting range of the delay time is O to 800 milliseconds Y 10 Setting the sweep time Press SPAN and use the numeric entry keys to enter the sweep time Example To specify 5 msec press 5 and k m 5 32 Basic Measurements Using the 43521A Note The setting range of the sweep time is 12 5 microseconds to 10 seconds Y 11 12 13 14 15 Sending divider data to the PLL See 2 4 Setting the measurement trigger in Appendix C and 2 5 Sending divider data to a serial input PLL in Appendix C to learn how to set the divider data to the PLL via the 24 bit I O port Sending a load strobe signal to the PLL See 2 4 Setting the measurement trigger in Appendix C and 2 5 Sending divider data to a serial input PLL in Appendix C to learn how to generate a measurement trigger and send a load signal to the PLL Adjusting the scale for measur
310. quency transient in which the frequency of the DUT changes from 186 MHz to 180 MHz By selecting C 6 Technical Information Technical Information the frequency span of 20 MHz as shown below you can measure earlier stages of the transient correctly m Target frequency 180 MHz m Frequency span 20 MHz m Target position 50 In this example the maximum frequency the minimum frequency and the local frequency are as follows when the frequency span is 20 MHz local frequency maximum frequency 10 MHz m Maximum frequency 190 MHz a Minimum frequency 170 MHz a Local frequency 200 MHz For example when the frequency of the RF signal is 183 MHz the IF signal is the difference between the local frequency 200 MHz and the frequency of the RF signal that is 17 MHz Because the maximum frequency is 550 MHz or less the 4352B assumes RF frequency local frequency IF frequency and calculates the RF frequency correctly as 200 MHz 17 MHz 183 MHz On the other hand assume that to obtain higher resolution you set the frequency span to 2 MHz keeping the target frequency and the target position In this case the maximum frequency the minimum frequency and the local frequency are as follows If the frequency span is 2 MHz local frequency maximum frequency 1 MHz a Maximum frequency 181 MHz a Minimum frequency 179 MHz a Local frequency 182 MHz In the same way as above when the frequency of the RF signal
311. quency tuning sensitivity characteristics vs DC control voltage as the measurement item PHASE NOISE MEAS NOIS Selects phase noise characteristics vs offset frequency as the measurement item RF TRANSIENT MEAS TRAN Selects frequency transient as the measurement item SPECTRUM MEAS SPEC Selects spectrum as the measurement item FREQ BAND 10M 3G FBAND lt value gt Lets you select the frequency band when you use the 43521A Downconverter Unit and have set DOWNCONV ON off under to ON Pressing this FREQ BAND xx xx key displays the frequency band menu that lets you select the frequency band used for your measurement example 3 1 6 6G When you have selected a frequency band it becomes underlined Pressing RETURN displays the 1 level upper menu in which this key is displayed together with the selected frequency band as FREQ BAND 3 1 6 6G There are 3 kinds of frequency band menus The displayed menu is determined depending on the maximum frequency of the external signal source entered with SG MAX FREQ on the menu If DOWNCONV on OFF under is set to OFF this key is displayed in a faint color as FREQ BAND 10M 3G and the frequency band is always set to 10 MHz to 3 GHz automatically INST TYPE Displays the Instrument Type menu Instrument Type Menu INST TYPE VCO TESTER VT Selects the tester mode and displays the VCO Tester menu See Chapter 7 for more information on this menu VCO ANALY VA Sel
312. r fuse for the line voltage selected Use only fuses with the required current rating and of the specified type as replacements DO NOT use Y a mended fuse or short circuit the fuse holder in order to by pass a blown fuse Installation and Setup Guide 3 5 Connecting the BNC BNC connector Connect a furnished BNC BNC Connector Agilent Parts No 1250 1859 between Second IF Input Connector and Second IF Output Connector in the rear panel when you make normal measurements E id Mi o o O ol Ok somo mo E gt e E 3 1 CDOJO303 Figure 3 2 Connecting the BNC BNC connector Operation Environment The 4352B must be operated under within the following environment conditions and sufficient space must be kept behind the 4352B to avoid obstructing the air flow of the cooling fans Temperature 0 C to 40 C Humidity less than 95 RH at 40 C Note The 4352B must be protected from temperature extremes which could cause i condensation within the instrument Y Providing clearance to dissipate heat at installation site To ensure the specifications and measurement accuracy of the product you must keep ambient temperature around the product within the specified range by providing appropriate cooling clearance around the product or for the rackmount type by
313. r mode Deletion 2 6 ee A Adding IBASIC sample programs 2 ee ee 2 6 IBASIC sample programs for frequency transient measurements Sample program using the trigger detection output function Sample program using the value trigger function 0 2 2 2 Miscellaneous Changes 2 1 6 we a a a e Contents 18 B GPIB Function Specification What is GPIB Ve B 2 GPIB Functions 2 B 2 Talker 2 2 aa a B 2 Listener oa a a a B 2 Controller a a e B 3 GPIB Specifications 2 a a a a B 3 The Analyzer s GPIB Functions B 4 Bus Mode oaa aa a B 5 Setting Addresses oaoa a a B 5 C Technical Information 1 C N ratio measurement tester mode and phase noise vs offset frequency characteristics measurement analyzer mode o C 1 1 1 Effect of noise of the VCO control voltage source on vco phase noise C 1 1 2 Evaluating estimating errors in phase noise measurement C 2 Example Ce C 2 1 3 Measured values when there is a spurious component re C 3 2 Technical information on frequency transient measurement analyzer mode C 4 2 1 Relationship between hardware and setting in transient measurement C 4 When using the 4352B alone or using the 43521A with the frequency band of 10 MHzto3GHz C 4 a When selecting the frequency span of 2 MHz Ce C 4 b When selecting the frequency span of 20 MHz 2 C 5 c When selecting the maximum frequency
314. r the sweep range m Press START and entry keys to enter the sweep start value Then press STOP and entry keys to enter the sweep stop value m Press CENTER and entry keys to enter the sweep center value Then press SPAN and entry keys to enter the sweep span value A Specify the number of measurement points per sweep Press NUMBER of POINTS Use entry keys to enter the number of measurement points 5 Specify the sweep time Press SWEEP TIME Alternately press h m s and entry keys to specify the hour minute and second respectively You can also specify the sweep time in seconds In the case of the sweep time setting in seconds press SWEEP TIME enter the time in seconds and press x1 The allowable minimum sweep time varies depending on the specified number of measurement points The allowable maximum sweep time is 1 hour 6 Perform display scale optimization for the measurement data after the first sweep is completed Press Display Press AUTO SCALE to optimize the display scale for the measurement data 4 24 Basic Measurement Procedures RF Power 1 dB REF 1 8 dBm LT Hia gt ATN 10 dB SWP 6857 msec START 4 yv POW 12 y STOP 5v Figure 4 4 Example of Measurement Screen RF Power Characteristics vs DC Control Voltage 7 Read the measurement value Press Menu MARKER to display the marker The measurement value at the marker is d
315. race REFERENCE POSITION REFP lt Value gt Specifies the reference line position for the rectangular coordinates with 0 at the bottom line of the GRATICULE and 10 at the tope line REFERENCE VALUE REFV lt Value gt Changes the reference value reference line position MKR REFERENCE MKRREF Makes the reference value equal to the marker s absolute value regardless of the delta marker value As a result the marker moves to the reference line position SCALE FOR DATA SCAF DATA MEMO Selects whether to use the Scale Reference menu functions for the data or memory trace Use the Display menu available under Display to select and display the data or memory trace D amp M SCALE COUPLE SCAC OFF O ON 1 Selects whether to use the same definition of scale for the data and memory traces COUPLE or to use different definitions for these traces UNCOUPLE This function can be used for the trace selected and displayed using the Display menu available under Display RETURN Returns to the previous menu 8 16 Measurement Block Analyzer Mode Analyzer Mode Define Trace Menu DISPLAY DATA DISP DATA Displays the measurement data trace MEMORY DISP MEMO Displays the memory trace A warning message appears if no data has been stored DATA and MEMORY DISP DATM Displays the data and memory traces DATA MEMORY DATMEM Stores the measurement data into the memory trace The measurement d
316. refore provides 6 5 digit display at maximum This restriction is also applied to the marker reading Therefore for example if you need to measure the frequency transient characteristics of a DUT whose oscillation frequency is in the GHz range using the heterodyne mode at 100 Hz resolution the reading resolution may be insufficient In this case use the reference frequency setting function to set a reference frequency and use the difference between the frequency and the actually measured frequency value at each point as trace information which increases the frequency resolution Example When the measured value is 1 23456789 GHz the trace data is as follows 1 23456 GHz RF REF O Hz 4 56789 MHz RF REF 1 23 GHz When the measured value is 850 1234 MHz the trace data is as follows 850 1234 MHz RF REF O Hz 50 1234 MHz RF REF 800 MHz The following guidelines show how to use the RF REF setting Be sure to specify a appropriate value considering the resolution required for your measurement and the measurement resolution available with the 4352B m The RF REF setting is not needed when 6 digits or less reading resolution is enough in your frequency transient measurement This is applicable for example when you measure a PLL with an output frequency in the GHz range at a 10 MHz resolution a Be sure to specify an RF REF value only for digits of 100 MHz and above Note The reference frequency setting function is not relat
317. rement Therefore for example when relatively long measurement time is required due to averaging even if a frequency changes due to the variation of the power voltage or control voltage the automatic setting of the external signal source does not operate and as a result the frequency of the external signal source may not be an appropriate value for the measurement On the other hand in the analyzer mode even if the averaging function is used the automatic setting function of the external signal source operates depending on the variation of the frequency and therefore the frequency of the external signal source is always set to an appropriate value Setting the Type of the External Signal Source and the Frequency Change Wait Time Some period of time is required between when the 4352B commands the external signal source to change the oscillation frequency and when the external signal source actually changes the frequency The 4352B must perform measurement after the frequency change time elapses 5 8 Basic Measurements Using the 43521A This time varies depending on the external signal source In the following example you set the frequency change wait time of the 8664A to 200 msec 1 Press RF LO 2 Specify the type of the external signal source Press SG TYPE The current setting is displayed on the screen as SG TYPE x Enter the value that corresponds to the external signal source used and press x1 For the 8664A pre
318. rements The following show two Instrument BASIC sample programs one using the trigger detection output function and the other using the value trigger function The sample program using the trigger detection output function repeats the following procedure for 4 different PLL frequencies setting divider data changing the frequency immediately after a measurement trigger and then measuring the change of the PLL output frequency In the sample program using the value trigger function the following settings are performed first initial PLL output frequency to 180 MHz the frequency at which a measurement trigger is generated to 181 MHz and trigger direction to POS When all the settings are completed the PLL output frequency is changed to 200 MHz The 4352B starts the transient measurement of the PLL output frequency when the frequency reaches 181 MHz In each of these programs the signals are assigned as follows the load signal to load the PLL divider data to OUTPUTI serial output of the 8 bit divider data to bit O of port A and the transmission clock to bit 1 of port A For details on programming see 4352B GPIB Programming Manual also A 8 Manual Changes Sample program using the trigger detection output function 100 File Name FIG12_32 TXT 110 IBASIC SAMPLE PROGRAM for Frequency Transient Measurement with Trigger Detection Output Function 120 130 ASSIGN Hp4352 TO 800 140 INTEGER Divider 1 4 150 160 Sg_wait_time
319. rent measurement data DATA MEM Subtracts the data in the memory from the current measurement data DATA MEM Divides the current measurement data by the data in the memory DEFAULT GAIN amp OFS DEFGO Resets the gain and offset to defaults gain 1 offset 0 OFFSET DATOVAL lt Value gt Defines the offset for the data math function GAIN DATGAIN lt Value gt Defines the gain for the data math function The data math function allows you to display the calculation result by using one of these formulas m GAIN x DATA OFFSET m GAIN x MEMORY OFFSET m GAIN x DATA MEMORY OFFSET m GAIN x DATA MEMORY OFFSET m GAIN x DATA MEMORY OFFSET MORE Displays the Display MORE menu Note See figure 6 7 and the text that follows it for a description of the display i locations in the following commands Y Measurement Block Tester Mode 7 13 Tester Mode Display MORE Menu ALLOCAT N ALL INSTR DISA ALLI Displays the measurement screen over the entire display HALF INSTR HALF BASIC DISA HIHB Displays the measurement screen on the upper half and the IBASIC screen on the lower half of the display ALL BASIC DISA ALLB Displays the IBASIC screen over the entire display Selecting ALL BASIC reduces the measurement time because the time required for displaying the measurement data is eliminated Note also that you further reduce the measurement time by selecting PARAM on
320. requency Transient Frequency Accuracy frequency span x 0 1 Time base accuracy of external signal source used The frequency span is displayed below the frequency transient measurement screen as FSPAN xxxMHz It is selected depending on the setting as follows When FREQ SPAN 2MHz is selected 2 MHz When 20MHz is selected 20 MHz When MAX xxxxMHz is selected Depending on the entered target frequency and the target position value one of 16 measurement frequency bands see Table 11 1 is automatically selected inside the 4352B The frequency span of that measurement range is used Measurement Resolution The measurement resolution depends on the selected frequency span as follows When FREQ SPAN 2MHz is selected 50 Hz When 20MHz is selected 500 Hz When MAX xxxxMHz is selected Depending on the entered target frequency and the target position value one of 16 measurement frequency bands see Table 11 1 is automatically selected inside the 4352B The frequency resolution of that measurement band is used Table 11 1 Available measurement frequency bands when MAX xxxxMHz is selected Measurement frequency 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 band number Maximum frequency MHz 192 384 576 768 960 1152 1354 1536 1728 1920 2112 2304 2496 2688 2880 3000 Minimum frequency MHz 64 128 192 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 704 768 832 896 960 1024 Frequency span MHz 128 256 384 512 640 768 896 1024 1152 1280 1408 1536 1664
321. requency of the carrier signal to be maintained a Allowable Frequency Tolerance Allowable tolerance limit between the target frequency Fr and the actual frequency Fm The VCO s control voltage is automatically adjusted until Fy Fr is equal to or less than this value a DUT s Tuning Sensitivity Hz V Specify a value close to the actual DUT tuning sensitivity If a value as close as possible is entered the control voltage setting loop cycles required will be smaller to reach maintain your specified frequency If the actual DUT tuning sensitivity is 5 or more times larger than your entered tuning sensitivity value the actual frequency may not be reached to your specified target frequency to within the allowable frequency tolerance For the definition and measurement method for tuning sensitivity in the tester mode see Basic Measurement Procedures 4 45 6 9 Tuning Sensitivity Measurement With Two Measurement Points For the same information in the analyzer mode see 7 4 Frequency Tuning Sensitivity Characteristics vs DC Control Voltage Target Device VCO Maximum Iteration of the Control Voltage Setting Loop Cycles The measurement and calculation is repeated to determine the optimum control voltage level until the number of this loop cycles reaches the value specified here A value from 1 to 999 can be entered To enter these conditions perform the following steps 1 2 3 Press Menu Press AUTO F
322. ress switch available on the 4352B ADDRESS SG ADDRSG lt Value gt Specifies the GPIB address of the external signal generator ADDRESS CONTROLLER ADDRCONT lt Value gt Specifies the GPIB address the 4352B will use to communicate with the external controller Note The 4352B keeps the settings of GPIB mode and GPIB addresses in the backup i memory even if the 4352B is turned OFF Y RETURN Returns to the previous menu 10 24 Instrument State Block Preset P reset Preset resets the 4352B settings to the preset defaults The list of preset defaults are given in Appendix E Note however that the Preset has no effect on the following states a Display Allocation m Display Adjustment m Color Adjustment a Clock Time Date m GPIB addresses GPIB mode system controller addressable m Settings associated with control of external signal generator mw Storage device and initialize disk format a Extension of file names for measurement data and 4352B settings Instrument State Block 10 25 11 Specifications These specifications are the performance standards and operation limits based on which the 4352B is tested When shipped from the factory the 4352B meets the specifications listed in this section For the specifications of the 43521A Downconverter Unit see the User s Manual of the 43521A Specifications list the 4352B s performance guaranteed over the temperature range of 0 C to 40 C
323. rget menu The Target menu is used to search to the left or right for other points when two or more target points are available SRCH TRACK on OFF TRACK OFF O ONI1 Turns the search tracking function ON or OFF This function is used in conjunction with other search functions to search each new sweep Measurement Block Analyzer Mode 8 29 Analyzer Mode SEARCH RANGE Displays the Search Range menu SUB MKR Displays the Sub marker menu used to turn on the sub markers RETURN Returns to the previous menu Peak Menu PEAK SEAM PEAK Moves the marker to the maximum peak NEXT PEAK SEANPK Moves the marker to the next maximum peak NEXT PEAK LEFT SEANPKL Moves the marker to the maximum peak to the left of the present marker position NEXT PEAK RIGHT SEANPKR Moves the marker to the maximum peak to the right of the present marker position PEAK DEF MENU Displays the Define Peak menu SUB MKR Displays the Sub marker menu used to turn on the sub markers RETURN Returns to the previous menu Target Menu TARGET SEATARG lt Value gt The target value is displayed in the appropriate units for the current selected format The default target value is 3 The units vary depending on the current measurement item In the A marker mode the target value is displayed as a relative value with respect to the A marker When all A makers are OFF the absolute value of the target value is displayed S
324. rison Between Characteristics Obtained Under Three or Four Different Conditions Measurement results obtained under different conditions are compared on the same display format In this section we compare the phase noise characteristics obtained at the three different carrier frequencies fundamental frequency frequency above the fundamental frequency and frequency below the fundamental frequency as an example First measure the phase noise at the fundamental frequency See 7 5 Phase Noise Characteristics vs Offset Frequency Target Device VCO or PLL for details 1 Stop the sweep Press Trigger HOLD 2 Store the measurement data at the fundamental frequency in the memory trace Press Display DEF TRACE Press DATA MEMORY 3 Display the data and memory traces Press DATA and MEMORY 4 Set the DUT output frequency to the frequency above the fundamental frequency Be sure to change the target frequency when measuring the VCO phase noise characteristics using the automatic frequency control function 5 Measure the phase noise characteristics Press Trigger SINGLE 6 Store the measurement data at the frequency above the fundamental frequency in the upper limit trace Press Display DEF TRACE Press DATA LIMIT MENU Press LIMIT LINE on OFF to toggle it LIMIT LINE ON off Press DATA UPPER 7 Set the DUT output frequency to the frequency below the fundamental frequency 8 Measure the p
325. root mean square value of FM deviation i Selecting PEAK CONV ON off allows the root mean square value to be Y converted to the corresponding peak 7 10 Measurement Block Tester Mode Tester Mode DISPLAY DATA MEMORY DATA and MEMORY DATA MEMORY DATA HOLD OFF DATA MATH DATA ORE gt gt gt DATA MATH DA DATAH DATA DATA DEFAULT GAIN amp 0 OFFS mammmA gt oO RETUR ALLOCAT N ALL INSTR HALF INSTR HALF BAS ALL BASIC BASIC STA PARAMS ON off ADJUST DISPLAY RETURN SELECT LETTER SPACE BACK SPACE ERASE TITLE BACKGROU DE R INTENSITY D INTENSITY MODIFY COLORS gt amp FAULT COLORS SAVE COLORS ECALL COLORS Figure 7 6 Softkey Menus Accessed from Display Key Tester Mode 1 2 Measurement Block Tester Mode 7 11 Tester Mode OCT mera DATA TINT MEMORY BRIGHTNESS LIMIT LINE PARAMETER COLOR GRATICULE RESET COLOR WARNING RETURN TEXT MARKER BASTE MORE PEN 1 RETURN PEN 2 PEN 3 PEN 4 PEN 5 PEN 6 RETURN Figure 7 7 Softkey Menus Accessed from Key Tester Mode 2 2 Menu DISPLAY DATA DISP DATA Displays the current measurement data when the data math function OFF is turned off The calculation result is displayed instead of the measurement data when the data
326. rs Actual data rate depends on the transfer rate of the slowest device involved Primary Address Specification 31 talk 31 listen Simultaneously maximum of 1 active talker and 14 active listeners In systems with more than one controller only one can be active at any given time The active controller can pass control to another controller but only one system controller is allowed GPIB Function Specification B 3 The Analyzer s GPIB Functions The Analyzer s GPIB Functions As defined in IEEE 488 1 the analyzer has the following capabilities SH1 Full source handshake AH1 Full acceptor handshake T6 Basic talker serial poll reply unaddresses if MLA is issued No talk only mode TEO No extended talker address L4 Basic listener unaddresses if MTA is issued No listen only mode LEO No extended listener address SR1 Complete service request SRQ function RL1 Complete remote local function including local lockout PPO Does not respond to parallel poll DC1 Complete device clear DT1 Responds to a group execution trigger C1 C2 08 C4 System controller capabilities in system controller mode C11 Pass control capabilities in addressable mode E2 Tri stated drivers B 4 GPIB Function Specification The Analyzer s GPIB Functions Bus Mode The analyzer uses a single bus structure The single bus makes it possible for both the analyzer and the host controller to access the peripherals within the system
327. rst inputted to the 64 divide ratio divider and then its output is inputted to the FV converter through the N divide ratio programmable divider This N is the same as the frequency band number shown in Table C 1 When this N is determined the minimum and maximum measurement frequencies are automatically determined Table C 1 16 available measurement frequency bands Frequency band number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ll 12 13 14 15 16 Maximum frequency MHz Minimum frequency MHz Frequency span MHz 192 384 576 768 960 64 128 192 256 320 128 256 384 512 640 1152 384 768 1354 1536 448 512 896 1024 1728 1920 2112 2304 2496 576 640 704 768 832 1152 1280 1408 1536 1664 2688 2880 3000 896 960 1024 1792 1920 2048 3 2 6 4 96 12 8 16 19 2 22 4 25 6 288 32 35 2 38 4 41 6 448 48 51 2 Frequency resolution kHz When using the 43521A with the frequency band other than 10 MHz to 3 GHz The measured signal is converted in frequency by the 43521A and inputted to the 4352B In this case the local signal of the 4352B is fixed to 600 MHz a When selecting the frequency span of 2 MHz When selecting the frequency span of 2 MHz set the frequency of the local signal external signal source of the 43521A so that the difference from the measured signal frequency is within a range of 601 MHz to 603 MHz The measured signal and the local signal is inputted to the mixer inside the 43521A and the mixer outputs the IF sig
328. s an unknown problem related to errors 241 through 249 24 Hardware missing A legal program command or query could not be executed because of missing 4352B hardware For example an option was not installed 111 Header separator error A character that is not a legal header separator was encountered while parsing the header For example no white space followed the header thus SRE4 is an error 114 Header Suffix out of range The value of a numeric suffix attached to a program mnemonic makes the header invalid 224 Illegal parameter value Used where exact value from a list of possibilities was expected 282 Illegal program name The name used to reference a program was invalid For example redefining an existing program deleting a nonexistent program or in general referencing a nonexistent program 283 Illegal variable name An attempt was made to reference a nonexistent variable in a program 213 Init ignored A request for a measurement initiation was ignored as another measurement was already in progress 159 INSUFFICIENT Memory If a lot of tasks are executed at the same time memory might be insufficient for a while For example running Instrument BASIC program printing a screen and sending or receiving data array by GPIB are requested at the same time Wait until finishing some tasks then execute the next task 40 Insufficient RF Level The input level to the 4352B RF IN conne
329. s described above by changing the frequency of the local signal depending on the measured signal frequency you can specify any frequencies as the minimum and maximum frequencies while keeping the frequency span of 2 MHz In this case the relationship between the measured signal and the local signal is as follows m When the measured signal is 550 MHz or less Measured signal frequency lt local frequency m When the measured signal is 550 MHz or more Measured signal frequency gt local frequency C 4 Technical Information Technical Information b When selecting the frequency span of 20 MHz When selecting the frequency span of 20 MHz set the frequency of the local signal external signal source so that the difference from the measured signal frequency is within a range of 10 MHz to 30 MHz The measured signal and the local signal is inputted to the mixer inside the 4352B and the mixer outputs an IF signal within a range of 10 MHz to 30 MHz This IF signal is divided in frequency by 10 and measured by the FV converter As described above by changing the frequency of the local signal depending on the measured signal frequency you can specify any frequencies as the minimum and maximum frequencies while keeping the frequency span of 20 MHz c When selecting the maximum frequency span When selecting the maximum frequency span the mixer for frequency conversion is not used Only the frequency divider is used The measured signal is fi
330. screen There are 2 methods to set the noise integration range as follows In this section the method using the rotary knob is described a Using the numeric entry keys to enter the integration start or end frequency and pressing MKR gt LEFT RNG or MKR gt RIGHT RNG a Using the rotary knob to move the marker to the integration start or end frequency and pressing MKR gt LEFT RNG or MKR gt RIGHT BNG Turn the rotary knob to move the marker to the frequency of 0 970 MHz integration start frequency Press MKR gt LEFT RNG A vertical line appears at the frequency of 0 970 MHz At this time the noise integration value displayed at the lower left of the screen is the integral of the range to the right of the vertical line Turn the rotary knob to move the marker to the frequency of 1 03 MHz integration end frequency Press MKR gt RIGHT RNG A vertical line appears at the frequency of 1 03 MHz The measurement result as shown in Figure 4 11 is displayed and the lower left of the screen shows the value of the noise partial integration for the frequency range between 0 97 MHz to 1 03 MHz as Intg Noise xx dBc Basic Measurement Procedures 4 41 Phase Noise 5 dBf REF 96 dBc 121 75 dBc 1 03 MHZ Intg Noise 493 922 dBc ATH A JE HATH 16 JE FER 166 HE vm 100 Hz HP 2163 se CENTER 1 MHz Lo 818 7 MHz SPAN lag kH Figure 4 11 Sample measurement screen partia
331. sed to define peaks Measurement Block Analyzer Mode 8 31 Analyzer Mode RETURN Returns to the previous menu Carrier Menu This menu can be only used in spectrum measurements CARRIER CENTER CARRCENT Moves the carrier frequency to the center of the X axis 2xCARR CENTER CARR2CENT Moves the 2nd harmonic frequency of the carrier to the center of the X axis 3xCARR CENTER CARR3CENT Moves the 3rd harmonic frequency of the carrier to the center of the X axis RETURN Returns to the previous menu 8 32 Measurement Block Analyzer Mode Analyzer Mode Cable Loss Compensation Menu This menu is used to make settings or adjustments associated with the cable loss compensation function When this function is ON the 4352B compensates for level loss on a cable using the assumption that the cable characteristics are as shown in Figure 8 12 Level loss on a cable is defined in terms of the frequency domain Loss dB Slope dB GHz gt 1GHz Frequency GHz Figure 8 12 Cable Frequency Characteristics for Level Loss Used by the Cable Loss Compensation Function COMPEN on OFF LCOMP OFF O ON 1 Turns the cable loss compensation function ON or OFF This softkey can be used in RF power measurements and spectrum measurements SLOPE SLOPE lt Value gt Specifies the slope of the cable level loss frequency characteristics loss frequency in dB GHz If the DC loss value speci
332. span C 5 When using the 43521A with the frequency band other than 10 MHz to 3 GHz C 5 a When selecting the frequency span of 2MHz C 5 b When selecting the frequency span of 20 MHZ C 5 c When selecting the maximum frequency span 512 MHz C 6 Frequency resolution Ce C 6 2 2 Responses out of the measurement range o a C 6 2 3 Setting a reference frequency REF FREQ FOR SCALE Ce C 8 2 4 Setting the measurement trigger a C 9 Using the trigger detection output function 2 4 C 9 Using the value trigger function Ce C 12 2 5 Sending divider data to a serial input PLL o C 14 3 Notes on measurements Cc C 17 3 1 Eliminating components that adversely affect measurements a C 17 D Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data Storage Devices o D 1 Disk Requirements o a 1 1 ee a a D 1 Disk Formats o a D 1 RAM Disk Memory Capacity o Ce D 2 Copying Files Between the RAM Disk and the Floppy Disk e D 2 File Types And DataSaved o D 2 Binary Files and ASCII Files 2 aa a D 2 Data Groups o D 2 Instrument States and Internal Data STATE Co D 2 Internal Data SAVE BINARY 2 aa 2 e D 2 Graphics Images GRAPHICS 0 A D 3 File Type and Data Group Combinations 00482 D 3 File Names o D 3 Auto Recall Function o o D 4 Internal Data SAVE ASCII File Structure For ASCII Files e eee D 5 Contents 19 St
333. ss 1 and x1 3 Set the frequency change wait time Press LO SWICH TIME The current setting is displayed on the screen as LO SWITCHING TIME xxx msec Press 2 0 0 and in this order Setting the Maximum Frequency of the External Signal Source Enter the maximum frequency of the connected external signal source in this chapter the 8664A using the numeric entry keys The frequency band menu corresponding to the entered maximum frequency appears The relationship between the maximum frequency and the frequency band is as follows You can make measurement within the frequency band Entered Frequency Frequency Band Menu Less than 4 2 GHz 10 MHz to 6 6 GHz 3 steps Equal to or greater than 4 2 GHz and less than 6 0 GHz 10 MHz to 9 0 GHz 4 steps Equal to or greater than 6 0 GHz 10 MHz to 12 6 GHz 3 steps For example the maximum frequency of the 8664A is 3 GHz When you enter 3 GHz the frequency band between 10 MHz and 6 6 GHz is displayed Now you can make measurement with the range of 10 MHz to 6 6 GHz 1 Press RF LO and SG MAX FREQ The current setting is displayed on the screen as SG MAX FREQUENCY xx GHz 2 Enter 3 and G n Note If the display of SG MAX FREQ is faint and you cannot enter a frequency al check that DOWNCONV ON off is set to ON You can enter SG MAX FREQ only Y when DOWNCONVY ON off is ON Setting the Frequency Band Select a frequency band The frequency band men
334. ss SWEEP Perform one of the following two procedures to enter the sweep range m Press START and entry keys to enter the sweep start value Then press STOP and entry keys to enter the sweep stop value m Press CENTER and entry keys to enter the sweep center value Then press SPAN and entry keys to enter the sweep span value A Specify the number of measurement points per sweep Use NUMBER of POINTS and entry keys to enter the number of measurement points 5 Specify the sweep time Use SWEEP TIME and h m s to specify the sweep time per sweep You can also specify the sweep time in seconds In the case of the sweep time setting in seconds press SWEEP TIME enter the time in seconds and press x1 The specified number of measurement points limit the allowable minimum sweep time On the other hand any time span up to 1 hour can be specified for the allowable maximum sweep time 6 Select the frequency resolution Press Sense Range Press FREQ RES 1kHz or 64 kHz 7 When 1 kHz frequency resolution is selected select either the positive upward to the right or negative downward to the right slope df dv of the frequeney vs DC control voltage characteristics suitable for the DUT Press either SENS PLRIY pos NEG for the positive slope or SENS PLRIY POS neg for the negative slope When the slope is correctly selected the output frequency setting of the external signal generator is controlled by the 4352B every time
335. ssed from Key Analyzer Mode 2 2 Softkey Menus Accessed from Key Analyzer Mode 1 3 Softkey Menus Accessed from Key Analyzer Mode 2 3 Softkey Menus Accessed from Key Analyzer Mode 3 3 Cable Frequency Characteristics for Level Loss Used by the Compensation Function Softkey Menus Accessed from Mod Key Softkey Menus Accessed from RF LO Key Softkey Menus Accessed from Trigger Key Softkey Menus Accessed from DC Control Key Tester Mode Softkey Menus Accessed from DC Control Key Analyzer Mode Softkey Menus Accessed from DC Power Key Softkey Menus Accessed from Copy Key Softkey Menus Accessed from Save Recall Key 1 3 Softkey Menus Accessed from Save Recall Key 3 3 Softkey Menus Accessed from System Key Tester Mode Softkey Menus Accessed from System Key Analyzer Mode Softkey Menus Accessed from Local Key I O Port Pin Assignment o 24 bit I O Interface Pin Assignment Trigger Signal Serial Number Plate Softkey menu called from the key for serial number JP1KE Softkey menu called from the key current Frequency band menu current Cable Loss Cable Loss Softkey menu called from the key for serial number JP1KE Softkey menu called from the key current Softkey menu called from the key for serial number JP1KE Softkey menu called from the key current Softkey menu called from the MARKER key for serial number JP1KE Softkey menu called from the MARKER ke
336. surements Using the 43521A 5 5 Note Inserting a low pass filter al In phase noise measurement a low cutoff low pass filter is sometimes Y inserted into the DC control voltage input terminal to attenuate the noise of the DC control voltage source This kind of low pass filter has a longer time constant making the measurement time longer The DC control voltage source of the 4352B provides a lower noise level of InV Hz If you use the low noise DC control voltage source of the 4352B you need no low cutoff low pass filter as described above for almost all VCO measurements However an oscillation frequency component may leak to the DC control voltage input terminal of the VCO which adversely affects the measurement result of RF power or frequencies Insert a low pass filter cutoff frequency 100 kHz to 1 MHz to the DC control voltage input terminal of the VCO in order to attenuate the oscillation frequency component Using coaxial cables To avoid effects of external noise use coaxial cables to connect the DC power voltage terminal and the DC control voltage terminal of the 4352B to a DUT gt To RF OUT of Signal Source d00504 Figure 5 3 Connecting a VCO DUT 5 6 Basic Measurements Using the 43521A
337. t NOMINAL FREQUENCY x xxx GHz 9 Adjusting the scale for measurement trace Press and AUTO SCALE in this order The scale is adjusted automatically and the measurement result of the RF power vs DC control voltage characteristics is displayed on the screen as shown in Figure 5 8 Dut RF Power 2 dB REF 13 2 dBm 12 478 dBm 34 ExR AN 6 dB SUP sec START 1 Y POW 5 LO 2 7757 GHz STOP 5 Y Figure 5 8 Sample Measurement Screen RF Power vs DC Control Voltage Characteristics Measurement DUT VCO 5 20 Basic Measurements Using the 43521A 10 Reading the measurement values Press and MARKER to display the marker You can read the value of each measurement point using the marker Note i If the measurement value is not your expected value check that the DC outputs are ON DC appears if the DC outputs are OFF and that the modulation output is OFF For the cable loss compensation function see Setting Cable Loss Compensation Function in Chapter 4 For the power level unit selection function the averaging function and the marker function see Chapter 8 To eliminate the effect of the transient of the DC control voltage sweep starts after the time specified with CTRL DELAY under DC Control elapses The delay time is not included in the sweep time and is applicable only to the 1st measurement point To provide delay time for 2nd and later measurement points you need to sp
338. t BASIC 11 External Trigger Input Triggers a measurement sweep when the external trigger mode is selected in the trigger mode see Trigger in Chapter 9 The leading or trailing edge of a pulse more than 20 ys wide in the Low or HIGH state starts a measurement The signal is TTL compatible 12 40 MHz Output Connector When you use this instrument by connecting it to the 43521A Downconverter Unit use this connector for connection to the 40 MHz Input BNC connector on the 43521A s rear panel with the BNC BNC cable It is also used in the service mode 13 and 14 Second IF Input Output Connectors Each is connected respectively to the 4352B s internal second IF amplification stage s input output Connect a furnished BNC BNC adapter between these connectors when you make normal measurements 2 10 Front and Rear Panel Installation and Setup Guide This chapter provides installation and setup instructions It contains the following information For information on the 43521A Downconverter Unit see the User s Manual of the 43521A Incoming Inspection m Power Requirements Replacing Fuse Connecting the BNC BNC connector Operation Environment Ventilation Requirements Instruction for Cleaning Rack Handle Installation Incoming Inspection Warning To avoid hazardous electrical shock do not turn on the 4352B when there are signs of shipping damage to any portion of the outer enclosure for exa
339. t EdB 1 MHz to 9 MHz offset 2 0 00 errre arere een net nnn beeen e ed 4dB t Note that if NOISE PLL auto WIDE CNPLL WIDE is selected this accuracy is valid at offset frequency above 5 kHz tt No spurious components should not be assumed around the measurement point for the tester mode only Note The noise floor at 1 MHz and 9 MHz offsets depends on the input signal i level and the RF attenuation setting The figure shown below illustrates the Y relationship between them The value below each line show the RF attenuator setting 11 2 Specifications Measurement Items 160 150 ss 3 a 5dB 10dB 15dB 20dB 25dB 3 E 140 D S 0 dB Z 2 130 lt a 120 20 10 0 10 20 RF Input Power dBm Note i Y Set the attenuation for noise measurement to OdB when measuring the phase noise above 150 dBc Other settings may not guarantee the phase noise specified as a typical value Specifications 11 3 Measurement Items Analyzer Mode Measurement Items Analyzer Mode RF Power Characteristics against DC Control Voltage Refer to RF Power in Measurement Items Tester Mode Frequency Tuning Sensitivity Characteristics against DC Control Voltage Refer to Frequency in Measurement Items Tester Mode Phase Noise Characteristics against Offset Frequency Same as C N Ratio in Measurement Items Tester Mode F
340. t IF Out Of Range The 4352B s 1st IF frequency is outside of the proper range Possible problems and the corrective action are shown below m The frequency of the external signal generator is not correct The 4352B has not performed automatic control of the external signal generator via GPIB LO CONTROL MAN and or ADDRESSABLE ONLY is selected Verify the frequency of the external signal generator a The actual time required for the stabilization of the output frequency from the external signal generator after changing the output frequency exceeds the specified wait time in LOCAL SWICH TIME Press RF LO LOCAL SWTCH TIME and the entry keys to increase the 4352B s wait time a The DUT output frequency fluctuated largely in a very short time several hundred kHz in several tens of ms Verify the DUT s frequency stability a The automatic frequency control function was ON and the target frequency was 50 MHz or less Set the acceptable frequency deviation to 4 or less of the target frequency 81 2nd PLL Unlocked The 4352B s internal 2nd PLL cannot be locked If this message is displayed during a C N ratio measurement or a phase noise measurement the following problems and the corrective action are shown below a The DUT s noise level is too large or a large level spurious component exists in the measurement range Verify the spectrum of the DUT s output signal a The DUT s output signal is being modulated in frequency Pr
341. t for the start point of a limit section LOWER LIMIT Specifies the lower limit for the start point of a limit section STOP PARAM Specifies the current X coordinate as the end point of a limit section UPPER LIMIT Specifies the upper limit for the end point of a limit section LONER LIMIT Specifies the lower limit for the end point of a limit section ENTER Updates the limit line with the information of the specified limit section Instrument State Block 10 21 Note The start and end points as well as the upper and lower limits are fixed at the same time when you press ENTER Also entering the sweep start and end Y points allows all measurement points to be determined If the X coordinate value of the start or end point of the limit line does not match any of the measurement points then the X coordinate value of the nearest measurement point is automatically selected When you use GPIB commands to specify the start and end points you can specify them as the start and end points of sweep or as specific sweep points LIMSECT and LIMSECTN If the end point is smaller than the start point these points are automatically swapped When you need to trace a limit line using many straight line segments use the IBASIC programming function or use an external controller to execute GPIB commands to specify the limit line See the 4352B GPIB Programming Manual for details Limit Clear Menu Analyzer Mode CLEAR YES
342. t is being sent to an input port and a signal from an output port is being sent to an external instrument 1711 INVALID DATE The date entered to set the real time clock is invalid Re enter the correct date Note The messages with negative numbers shown below are for errors that occur i when the 4352B is being controlled with GPIB commands over the GPIB Y Messages 24 Error Messages Numerical Order 100 Command error This is a generic syntax error that the 4352B displays when it cannot detect more specific errors This code indicates only that a command error as defined in IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 4 has occurred 101 Invalid character A syntax element contains a character that is invalid for that type For example a header containing an ampersand SING amp 102 Syntax error An unrecognized command or data type was encountered For example a string was received when the 4352B was not expecting to receive a string 103 Invalid separator The parser was expecting a separator and encountered an illegal character semicolon comma etc 104 Data type error The parser recognized a data element that is not allowed For example a numeric or string data was expected but block data was encountered 105 GET not allowed A Group Execute Trigger GET was received within a program message see IEEE 488 2 7 7 108 Parameter not allowed More parameters were received than expected for
343. ta corrupt or stale Possibly invalid data New reading started but not completed since last access 231 Data questionable Indicates that the measurement accuracy is suspect 240 Hardware error Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because of a hardware problem in the 4352B Definition of what constitutes a hard ware problem is completely device specific This error message might be displayed if the 4352B detects an unknown problem related to errors 241 through 249 24 Hardware missing A legal program command or query could not be executed because of missing 4352B hardware For example an option was not installed 250 Mass Storage Error Indicates that a mass storage error occurred This error message might be displayed if the 4352B detects an unknown problem related to error 257 257 File Name Error Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because the file name on the device media was in error For example an attempt was made to copy to a duplicate file name The definition of what constitutes a file name error is device specific Messages 28 Error Messages Numerical Order 280 Program error Indicates that a downloaded program related execution error occurred This error message might be displayed if the 4352B detects an unknown problem related to errors 281 through 289 281 Cannot create program Indicates that an attempt
344. ted Not Affected E 8 Allowable Values and Defaults for Key Functions Analyzer Mode Measurement Block Meas Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default Measurement Item RF POWER FREQUENCY PHASE NOISE RF RF POWER RF POWER TRANSIENT SPECTRUM HARMONICS ANALYSIS Instrument Type VT VA VT VT Frequency Band 10M 3G 10M 6 6G 10M 9 0G 10M 12 6G Not Affected Not Affected Nominal Frequency Range of Frequency Band Not Affected Not Affected Sense Range Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default RF Attenuator 0 5 10 15 20 25 dB 10 dB 10 dB Noise Attenuator 0 10 20 30 40 dB 10 dB 10 dB Sense Polarity Positive Negative Positive Positive Frequency Resolution 1 kHz 64 kHz 1 kHz 1 kHz Target Frequency Same as Freq Band 100 MHz Min Midpoint Value of Freq Band Note 640 MHz for 10M to 3 GHz Midpoint Value of Freq Band Note 640 MHz for 10M to 3 GHz Frequency Span 2 MHz 20MHz Max Max Max Target Position 5 10 15 to 95 50 50 Ref Freq For Scale 0 to Maximum of Freq Band OMHz OMHz Allowable Values and Defaults for Key Functions E 9 Bw Avg Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default Averaging on OFF On Off Off Off Averaging Factor 1 to 999 16 16 Video Bandwidth 3 mHz RBW 1 3 kHz 10 mHz RBW 3 30 mHz RBW
345. tegration measurement is also included in the marker function See Chapter 7 and Chapter 8 for details CONTROL Block This block is used to select the signal and trigger type for a measurement When a key on the block is pressed a softkey menu is displayed Mod displays a menu to control the modulation signal applied to the DUT RF LO displays menus to select the external signal generator and to control the input signal from the external signal generator This key also lets you switch ON OFF the converter and set the upper limit of the measurement frequency used when the 43521A Downconverter Unit is connected Trigger displays menus to select the trigger mode and trigger source In the analyzer mode the value trigger is added as a new choice for trigger mode in frequency transient measurements DC Control displays a menu to specify the level of control voltage applied to the DUT In the analyzer mode it provides a softkey to set the control voltage level to the X coordinate values at the current marker position DC Power displays a menu to specify the level of power voltage V applied to the DUT See Chapter 9 for details INSTRUMENT STATE Block This block is used to control system functions The following system functions are available GPIB controller mode real time clock Instrument BASIC printer output and saving the 4352B settings and measurement data to the floppy disk or RAM disk memory System can be us
346. the FM Deviation Range menu FM Deviation Range Menu FM DEV RNG 200kHz DEVRNG DV200KHZ Sets the FM deviation range to 200 kHz peak value FM DEV RNG 20kHz DEVRNG DV20KHZ Sets the FM deviation range to 20 kHz peak value FM DEV RNG 2kHz DEVRNG DV2KHZ Sets the FM deviation range to 2 kHz peak value 7 6 Measurement Block Tester Mode Bw Avg Tester Mode Bw Avg AVERAGING RESTART AVERAGING on OFF AVERAGING FACTOR NOISE BW OFFSET FREQ NOISE PLL AUTO wide FM DETECTION HP FILTER 50Hz 300Hz LP FILTER 3kHz 15kHz 20kHz RETURN Figure 7 4 Softkey Menus Accessed from Bw Avg Key Tester Mode Bw Avg Menu AVERAGING RESTART AVERREST Resets the trigger function so that the trigger count will begin from 1 on the next trigger The trigger count for averaging is displayed on the left side of the display screen AVERAGING on OFF AVER OFF O 0N 1 Turns the trace averaging function ON or OFF When the averaging function is ON Avg appears together with the trigger count in the status display area on the left hand side of the screen Whenever an instrument state change affecting the measurement data is made the trigger for averaging is reset to 1 Averaging starts at count 1 when you turn ON the averaging function for the first time or when you restart this function using AVERAGING RESTART Measurement data is averaged and the displayed data is updated each time the measureme
347. the FM deviation calibration is not proper Adjustment or repair is necessary Contact our service office or the company from which you purchased the 4352B 130 INVALID FILE NAME The file name for the RECALL PURGE or RE SAVE function must have a _D or _S extension for LIF format 103 Invalid separator The parser was expecting a separator and encountered an illegal character semicolon comma etc 151 Invalid string data A string data element was expected but was invalid for some reason see IEEE 488 2 7 7 5 2 For example an END message was received before the terminal quote character 131 Invalid suffix The suffix does not follow the syntax described in IEEE 488 2 7 7 3 2 or the suffix is inappropriate for the 4352B Messages 8 Error Messages Alphabetical Order 133 LIF DOS COPY NOT ALLOWED Indicates that you tried to copy a file between the different formatted disks For example if you try to copy a file between the RAM disk and the flexible disk when the format of the RAM disk is different from the format of the flexible disk this message is displayed 250 Mass Storage Error Indicates that a mass storage error occurred This error message might be displayed if the 4352B detects an unknown problem related to error 257 311 Memory error An error was detected in the 4352B s memory 109 Missing parameter Fewer parameters were received than required for the he
348. the Sweep menu SWEEP TYPE SWPT LOGF LINF Sets the sweep type You can select the sweep type from log or linear provided that you have selected the phase noise vs offset frequency characteristics measurement When you perform the noise integration measurement or the spurious measurement select the linear sweep LOG FREQ selects the log sweep LLIN FREQ selects the linear sweep AUTO FREQ CONTROL Displays the Automatic Frequency Control menu 8 22 Measurement Block Analyzer Mode Analyzer Mode MARKER Displays the marker and the Marker menu MKR SEARCH Displays the Marker Search menu DETECTION SAMPLE DET POS NEG SAM Sets the detection mode Selects it from the positive peak mode the negative peak mode or the sample mode POS PEAK selects the positive peak mode This mode detects the maximum value from measurement values Select it for the spurious measurement and the spectrum measurement NEG PEAK selects the negative peak mode This mode detects the minimum value from measurement values Select it for the spurious measurement and the spectrum measurement SAMPLE must be selected when you perform the linear sweep in the phase noise measurement CARRIER MENU Displays the Carrier menu CABLE LOSS COMPEN Displays the Cable Loss Compensation menu Sweep Menu Specifies the following x coordinates in the analyzer mode START STAR lt Value gt Specifies the sweep start value
349. the change in the measured frequency exceeds about 30 MHz If the slope is incorrectly selected it may take an excessively 4 26 Basic Measurement Procedures long time for the sweep because the external signal generator needs to be controlled frequently by the 4352B 8 Perform display scale optimization for the measurement data after the first sweep is completed Press Display Press AUTO SCALE to optimize the display scale for the measurement data 9 Specify the aperture for tuning sensitivity measurement Only specify the aperture when you need to make an uneven trace flatter See Definition of Tuning Sensitivity and Specifying Aperture in Chapter 8 for details Perform the following steps to specify aperture for tuning sensitivity Enter the aperture value in percentage of span Press Bw Avg Use SENS APERTURE and entry keys to enter aperture Frequency 5 MHz REF 200 MHz y ATN 5 dB FRES 1 kHz SWP 979 msec START iv POW tev STOP 5 MV Figure 4 5 Example of Measurement Screen Frequency Tuning Sensitivity Characteristics vs DC Control Voltage 10 Read the measurement value Press Menu MARKER to display the marker The measurement value at the marker is displayed on the screen The tuning sensitivity is displayed using the memory trace Press MKR ON DATA to toggle it MKR ON MEMORY to check the value of the tuning sensitivity
350. the divider data divide ratio signal is sent to the PLL This divider data is a binary value corresponding to the start frequency The value must be derived from the specifications of the PLL This signal is supplied through the A port of the 24 bit I O port on the 4352B s rear panel to the PLL data terminals If the PLL requires serial data the signal must be supplied from AO and Al if parallel data it must be supplied from AO to A7 At this time the divider data divide ratio is not acquired into the PLL yet For details on the program see 2 5 Sending divider data to a serial input PLL in this appendix 5 OUT1H in line 430 causes the OUTPUT of the 24 bit I O port to go HIGH This signal sets the PLL load terminal and causes the divider data divide ratio that has already sent to the PLL data terminals to be acquired into the PLL Then the PLL outputs the start frequency 6 OUTIL in line 440 causes the OUTPUT of the 24 bit I O port to go LOW This resets the PLL load terminal and prepares for the next set 7 Then the divider data divide ratio signal is sent to the PLL This divider data is a binary value corresponding to the target end frequency The value must be derived from the specifications of the PLL This signal is supplied through the A port of the 24 bit I O port on the 4352B s rear panel to the PLL data terminals At this time the divider data divide ratio is not acquired into the PLL yet Technical Inform
351. the header For example the SRE command only accepts one parameter so receiving SRE 4 16 is not allowed 109 Missing parameter Fewer parameters were received than required for the header 110 Command header error An error was detected in the header This error message might be displayed if the 4352B detects an unknown problem related to errors 111 through 119 111 Header separator error A character that is not a legal header separator was encountered while parsing the header For example no white space followed the header thus SRE4 is an error 112 Program mnemonic too long The header contains more than twelve characters see IEEE 488 2 7 6 1 4 1 113 Undefined header The header is syntactically correct but it is undefined for the 4352B For example XYZ is not defined for the 4352B Messages 25 Error Messages Numerical Order 114 Header Suffix out of range The value of a numeric suffix attached to a program mnemonic makes the header invalid 120 Numeric data error This error as well as errors 121 through 129 are generated when parsing a data element that appears to be numeric including the nondecimal numeric types This error message might be displayed if the 4352B detects an unknown problem 121 Invalid character in number An invalid character for the data type being parsed was encountered For example an alpha Character in a decimal numeric or a 9 in octal d
352. the noise measurement from substantially affecting measurement data Example Suppose that the following message is displayed CAUTION Set Noise ATT 10 dB More Set the noise attenuation at a level at least 10 dB higher than the current value 4 18 Basic Measurement Procedures Note When measuring phase noise using the C N ratio measurement function in the tester mode a measurement around a spurious component may show a larger value than an actual phase noise This occurs because the level of the spurious component is significant enough to affect the measurement In this case the value differs from the measurement at the same offset frequency obtained through the phase noise measurement function in the analyzer mode Refer to the first section of Appendix C for how differs phase noise measurement in each mode Note The minimum measurable value in a C N ratio measurement is restricted by the i phase noise characteristics and spurious characteristics of the signal generator Y you use Note When the message CAUTION 2nd PLL Unlocked appears on the LCD follow the steps below to alter the bandwidth of the 2nd PLL in the 4352B to WIDE 1 Press Bw Avg 2 Press NOISE PLL AUTO wide to toggle it NOISE PLI auto WIDE See Bw Avg in Chapter 7 where AUTO and WIDE are compared in their usage Basic Measurement Procedures 4 19 Advanced Measurement Items in Tester Mode This section describes the advance
353. the polarity of the frequency vs control voltage characteristic of the DUT Press Sense Range and SENS PLRTY POS neg in this order If the frequency increases as the control voltage increases select ROS if it decreases select NEG Performing signal search Press Meas FREQ BAND xx xx and SIGNAL SEARCH in this order SIGNAL FOUND x xxx GHz appears on the screen Press NOMINAL FREQUENCY and check that the value displayed on the screen is the same as the frequency of the signal search result NOMINAL FREQUENCY X xxx GHz Adjusting the scale for measurement trace Press Display and AUTO SCALE in this order The scale is adjusted automatically The measurement result is displayed on the screen as shown in Figure 5 9 Specifying the aperture for tuning sensitivity measurement Press Bw Avg and SENS APERTURE in this order Use the numeric entry keys to enter an aperture Enter the aperture value in percentage of span Note Specify the aperture only when you need to make an uneven trace flatter See Definition of Tuning Sensitivity and Specifying Aperture in Chapter 8 for Y details 13 DuC Frequency 56 MHz REF 5 85 GHz 5 06647 GHz 34 ExR FRES 1 kHz SHP 969 msec STOP 5Y ATI TO dB START 1 POW 5 LO 2 5656 GH Figure 5 9 Sample Measurement Screen Frequency Tuning Sensitivity vs DC Control Voltage Characteristics Measurement DUT VCO Reading the measurement values Press and MAR
354. the video i bandwidth function the averaging function the power level display unit Y function and the marker function see Chapter 8 Note In this measurement the sweep time can not be specified Only the query is available Y Note you can set the DC control voltage level for phase noise or spectrum i measurement using the automatic frequency control function See Setting the Y Automatic Frequency Control Function in Chapter 4 for details 5 36 Basic Measurements Using the 43521A Entry Block The Entry Block Figure 6 1 contains the numeric and unit s keypad the knob and the step keys These controls are used in combination with other front panel keys and softkeys to modify the active entry to enter or change numeric data and to change the value of the marker In most cases the keypad knob and step keys can be used interchangeably Before a function is modified it must be made the active function by pressing a front panel key or softkey It can then be modified directly with the knob the step keys or the digits keys and a terminator In the following section GPIB commands corresponding to the various front panel key functions or softkeys are given in parentheses that follow the keys Rotary Knob ENTRY 7 8 9 G n Ze Step Keys Co A s Ie COMES Es Entry Space Key
355. tic over time Spectrum measurement DUT PLL Measures spectrum characteristics Carrier spurious and harmonics levels can be obtained Basic Measurements Using the 43521A 5 1 1 Preparations for Measurements This chapter uses a stand alone system as an example to explain the measurement procedures This system consists of the 4352B 43521A Downconverter Unit and an external signal generator only In this system the 4352B controls the external signal generator 8664A via GPIB Note The 4352B can also be used as a part of the measurement system controlled i by an external controller such as a PC In such a system you can perform Y measurement automatically by running a program written in BASIC See the 4352B GPIB Programming Manual for more details 1 1 Connecting Devices 1 The following equipment is required for the procedures in this chapter a 4352B VCO PLL Signal Analyzer m 43521A Downconverter Unit a External signal source The 8664A is used in this chapter There are 3 types of recommended external signal sources as listed below o 8664A with Option 004 3 GHz Hi Performance RF Signal Generator o 8665A with Option 004 4 2 GHz Hi Performance RF Signal Generator o 8665B with Option 004 6 GHz Hi Performance RF Signal Generator Note If no recommended signal sources are available refer to SG TYPE in the i menu described in Chapter 9 Y Note System performance with regard to measurable frequ
356. tings for Backup Memory Function Factory Setting external signal generator Setting Manual Wait time for LO signal change 100 msec External signal generator type 1 GPIB Address of 4352B 17 GPIB Address of external signal generator 19 GPIB Address of external controller 21 Allowable Values and Defaults for Key Functions E 17 Fault Diagnosis for the 4352S Measurement System This appendix provides a simple fault diagnosis guide for this instrument or the measurement system that includes this instrument By following the diagnostics instructions you will be able to quickly find out which instrument is faulty in the test system Also when performing fault diagnosis for the 43521A Downconverter Unit see this appendix Refer to this information if you notice any failure in the operation of the analyzer or a measurement system that includes the analyzer If you find a malfunction using these instructions adjustments or repair is required Contact our service office or the company from which you purchased the analyzer External Signal Generator Diagnosis Perform the self test function built into the external signal generator and verify if there is anything wrong with the external signal generator Fault Diagnosis for the 4352S Measurement System F 1 4352B Diagnosis Diagnosis for Source Functions Check each output at the MOD OUT DC CTRL and DC POWER connectors Perform the following st
357. to the DC control voltage input terminal of the VCO in order to attenuate the oscillation frequency component Using coaxial cables To avoid effects of external noise use coaxial cables to connect the DC power voltage terminal and the DC control voltage terminal of the 4352B to a DUT 0000 000 Figure 4 2 Connecting Device VCO Basic Measurement Procedures 4 9 CD11208 To 24 bit I O port on 4352B Rear Panel GND OUTPUT1 A1 AO Pin1 Pin3 Pin6 Pin5 Figure 4 3 Connecting Device PLL 4 10 Basic Measurement Procedures 4 Initial Setup Before starting the measurement the initial setup of the 4352B must be performed Perform the following steps to setup the 4352B The keys used in this initial setup are located in the CONTROL block and the INSTRUMENT STATE block 4 1 Verifying GPIB Controller Mode Make sure that the 4352B is the system controller 1 Press Local 2 Make sure that SYSTEM CONTROLLER is displayed with an underline 4 2 Setting Up to Control the External Signal Generator via GPIB Note When using this
358. type and also displays the gain amp offset definition keys The selected type appears in the bracket 7 of the softkey label For example DATA appears if DATA is selected DATA Turns OFF all data math functions DATA MEM Adds memory trace values to the measurement data trace values DATA MEM Subtracts the memory trace values from the measurement data trace values DATA MEM Divides the measurement data trace values by the memory trace values DEFAULT GAIN amp OFS DEFGO Resets the gain and offset to defaults gain 1 offset 0 OFFSET DATOVAL lt Value gt Defines the offset for the data math function GAIN DATGAIN lt Value gt Defines the gain for the data math function Measurement Block Analyzer Mode 8 15 Analyzer Mode The data math function allows you to display the calculation result by using one of this formula m GAIN x DATA OFFSET m GAIN x MEMORY OFFSET m GAIN x DATA MEMORY OFFSET m GAIN x DATA MEMORY OFFSET m GAIN x DATA MEMORY OFFSET MORE Displays the Display MORE menu Scale Menu AUIO SCALE Displays an automatically scaled trace data defined by SCALE FOR with one keystroke Sweep values are not affected only scale and reference values The 4352B optimizes the display scale to put all the displayed data onto the vertical GRATICULE SCALE DIV SCAL lt Value gt Changes the response value scale per division of the displayed t
359. u that has appeared in the previous section has 3 to 4 steps of frequency bands In this section you select a frequency band from the frequency band menu You can perform measurement within the frequency band you select Select a band containing the carrier frequency of your DUT 1 Press and FREQ BAND xx xx The frequency band menu shown below appears E FREQ BAND 10M 36 E 2 5 3 6G E 3 1 6 66 Basic Measurements Using the 43521A 5 9 2 The carrier frequency of the DUT measured in this chapter is 5 8 GHz Therefore select 3 1 6 6G 3 1 6 66 is underlined 3 Pressing RETURN displays the immediate previous softkey menu of FREQ BAND 3 1 6 6G which means that 3 1 6 6G has been selected Setting NOMINAL FREQ Enter the carrier frequency of the DUT as the nominal frequency with the accuracy of 200 MHz 1 Press Meas FREQ BAND and NOMINAL FREQ The current setting is displayed on the screen aS NOMINAL FREQUENCY xxx GHz 2 Use the numeric entry keys to enter the carrier frequency of the DUT For this DUT press E Q E and Gn Note By entering the nominal frequency measurement is performed accurately If you do not know the carrier frequency of the DUT do not enter it in this step A Y Instead find it out using the signal search SIGNAL SEARCH function during measurement The signal search function detects the carrier frequency and automatically stores sets it as the nominal frequency In this chapt
360. uency may cause the measurement maximum and minimum frequencies to change or cause the frequency span and the frequency resolution to change 8 6 Measurement Block Analyzer Mode Analyzer Mode FREQ SPAN 2MHz TRSPAN TS2MHZ Sets the frequency span in the frequency transient measurement to 2 MHz The frequency resolution is 50 Hz The difference between the minimum frequency and the maximum frequency to be measured is 2 MHz Depending on the minimum and maximum frequencies you want to measure enter the target frequency and the target position value to the 4352B to set the measurement range If you need more information see 2 1 Relationship between hardware and setting in transient measurement in Appendix C 20MHz TRSPAN TS20MHZ Sets the frequency span in the frequency transient measurement to 20 MHz The frequency resolution is 500 Hz The difference between the minimum frequency and the maximum frequency to be measured is 20 MHz Depending on the minimum and maximum frequencies you want to measure enter the target frequency and the target position value to the 4352B to set the measurement range If you need more information see 2 1 Relationship between hardware and setting in transient measurement in Appendix C MAX xxxxMHz TRSPAN TSMAX If you use the 4352B alone not using the 43521A or if you use the 43521A within the fre quency band of 10 MHz to 3 GHz the actual frequency span is determined by the combination
361. unctions Instrument State Block Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default Print mode Standard Color Standard Standard Copy skey On Off Off Off Copy time On Off Off Off Print color Fixed Variable Fixed Fixed DPI 75 to 600 dpi 75 75 Top margin 0 to 5 inch 0 1 inch steps 1 0 inch 1 0 inch Left margin 0 to 5 inch 0 1 inch steps 1 0 inch 1 0 inch Orient Portrait Landscape Portrait Portrait Formfeed On Off On On Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default Storage Device Disk Memory Not Affected Not Affected Initialize disk format LIF DOS Not Affected Not Affected Define Save Data On Off On On Define Save Mem On Off Off Off System Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default Clock time 0 0 0 to 24 59 59 Not Affected Not Affected Clock date Up to 2099 Not Affected Not Affected Date format Month Day Year Day Month Year Month Day Year Month Day Year Memory Partion 64K 448K 128K 384K 256K 256K 384K 128K 448K 64K RAM BASIC Not Affected Not Affected Beeper done On Off On On Beeper warning On Off Off Off Allowable Values and Defaults for Key Functions E 7 Local Function Allowable Values Preset Value Power ON Default GPIB address 0 to 30 Not Affected Not Affected GPIB mode System controller Addressable Not Affec
362. uracy 1 kHz FM 2kHz range 234 10 C 42 of reading 0 5 of measurement range 1 kHz FM 2kHz range O to 40 C onanan anaana 8 of reading 2 0 of reading 1 kHz FM 20 200 kHz range 23 10 C 2 of reading 0 1 of measurement range 1 kHz FM 20 200 kHz range 0 to 40 C 8 of reading 0 4 of measurement range Note m The deviation accuracy obtained after FM deviation calibration is 0 8 of i the reading typical data ambient temperature during calibration 5 C Y m Perform calibration again if the detection band is changed Residual FM 0300 Hz to 3 kHz bandwidth cccccc 0000 cece eee eee lt 3 Hams typical 050 Hz to 20 kHz bandwidth cccccc cs lt 8 Hams typical C N Ratio Offset frequency range Carrier gt 100 MHZ 0 00 nce teen neces 100 Hz to 9 MHz O Carrier lt 100 MHz 0 0 A 100 Hz to 10 of carrier frequency Phase noise 100 Hz offset 2 00 06 cence teeta 85 dBc Hz 90 dBc Hz typical 1 kHz offset 0 cence teen ences 110 dBe Hz 117 dBc Hz typical DIO kHz offset 0 cece nent teens 130 dBe Hz 137 dBc Hz typical 0100 kHz offset oooooooococcccnoc rr 140 dBe Hz 147 dBc Hz typical 1M 9 MHz offset 0 000 150 dBc Hz 157 dBe Hz typical See also the section on EMC of Others in General Characteristics Accuracy 100 Hz to 1 KHz offset onnee aaa 4dB typical 1 kHz to 1 MHZ offset 0 0 te tt
363. usly saved modified version of the color settings from the backup memory RECALL COLORS appears only when a color setting has been saved RETURN Returns to the previous menu First Color Adjustment Menu DATA COLO DATA Selects the data trace to change its color and displays the Second Color Adjustment menu MEMORY COLO MEM Selects the memory trace to change its color and displays the Second Color Adjustment menu LIMIT LINE PARAMETER COLO PARAM Selects the limit line to change its color and displays the Second Color Adjustment menu GRATICULE COLO GRAT Selects the GRATICULE and some softkey labels those with ON and OFF options to change its color and displays the Second Color Adjustment menu Measurement Block Analyzer Mode 8 19 Analyzer Mode WARNING COLO WARN Selects warning messages to change their color and displays the Second Color Adjustment menu TEXT MARKER COLO TEXT Selects texts for example softkey labels other than measurement data to change its color and displays the Second Color Adjustment menu MORE Displays the Change Pen Color menu RETURN Returns to the previous menu Second Color Adjustment Menu TINT TINT lt Value gt Adjusts the tint of the selected on screen information BRIGHINESS CBRI lt Value gt Adjusts the brightness of the selected color COLOR COLOR lt Value gt Adjusts the whiteness of the selected color RESET COLOR RSCO Resets a
364. values The hardkeys on the front panel are grouped by block and the menus available with each of the hardkeys are selected using the softkeys that appear on the right hand side of the LCD The 4352B has 2 measurement modes tester and analyzer modes The following list shows the measurement items available with each mode m Tester Mode Target device VCO RF Power Frequency DC Power Current FM Deviation C N Ratio Carrier Noise Analyzer Mode Target device PLL or VCO RF Power Characteristics vs DC Control Voltage Frequency Tuning Sensitivity Characteristics vs DC Control Voltage Phase Noise Characteristics vs Offset Frequency Frequency Transient Spectrum Introduction 1 1 Analyzer s Features The following paragraphs provide an outline of each part of the analyzer Detailed information on the features in each block is provided in the corresponding chapter of this manual Front and Rear Panel Functions are activated by pressing the hardkeys or softkeys provided on the front panel Measurement results are displayed on the LCD which also displays the measurement conditions and the instrument status The front panel has input and output ports to connect to the device under test DUT or the test signal source A flexible disk drive is also provided to store and retrieve data and instrument status The rear panel has input and output connector ports to control the analyzer from external equipment or to contro
365. vide ratio to a serial input PLL Let us take an example where the data signal the clock signal and the load strobe signal of the PLL are connected to this instrument as follows 24 bit I O port Pin 5 output port AO Data terminal Pin 6 output port Al Clock terminal Pin 3 OUTPUT Load terminal To 24 bit I O port on 4352B Rear Panel GND OUTPUT At AO Pin1 Pin3 Pino Pin5 43521A External Reference Signal CD00CO2 Figure C 8 Connection of serial input PLL In this example port A of the 24 bit I O port is used to sent divider data Port A sets the divider data to the PLL by sending it in binary notation through bit AO bit by bit and sending the clock signal through bit Al Figure C 9 shows the program to send divider data to the PLL through the 24 bit I O port C 14 Technical Information Technical Information X Divider FOR I 7 TO O STEP 1 WRITEIO 16 0 BIT X I Send Value 1 or 0 of Bit I of Value X to Port AO WRITEIO 16 0 BIT X I 2 Set Output Port A1 to HIGH WRITEIO 16 0 BIT X I Set Output Port A1 to LOW NEXT I Figure C 9 Sample program to send divider data to the PLL The sample program assumes that the variable name for divider data is Di
366. vider and 8 bit serial data is sent starting from MSB 1 Line 100 calls the divider data that has already set in the variable named Divider The divider data is 8 bit serial data In this example the divider data is 01010010 in binary 2 Line 110 makes setting so that 8 bit serial data is sent from MSB First set I 7 3 WRITEIO 16 0 in line 120 is a command to output data to 8 bit port A of the 24 bit I O port BIT X D is a command to specify the 1 1 th bit of variable X When I 7 the 8th bit of variable X that is O 00000000 in binary is outputted O is outputted to port AO O to port Al 4 Line 130 by sending 2 10 in binary notation causes the output from port A to change to 2 increased by 2 in binary 00000010 in binary notation compared to that of line 120 0 is outputted to port AO 1 to port Al 5 Line 140 provides the same operation as line 120 6 Line 150 makes a jump to line 110 which decrements I by 1 resulting in I 6 7 Line 120 outputs the 7th bit of variable X that is 1 00000001 in binary to 8 bit port A 1 is outputted to port AO 0 to port Al 8 Line 130 by sending 2 10 in binary notation causes the output from port A to change to 3 00000011 in binary notation increased by 2 in binary compared to the previous line 1 is outputted to port AO 1 to port Al The FOR NEXT loop in lines from 110 to 150 by decreasing the value of I outputs variable X from port AO as serial data and
367. w option system it is used to add an operation manual set optional accessory of the language the customer desires 4 No selection of addition deletion is required for the operation manual set because it is only available as an optional accessory in the new option system Manual Changes A 13 GPIB Function Specification This appendix provides an overview of GPIB and explains the GPIB functions that can be used by the analyzer This appendix is very useful when constructing a measurement system using the analyzer and peripherals This appendix explains the following a What is GPIB o GPIB Functions o GPIB Specifications The Analyzer s GPIB Functions o Bus Mode o GPIB Address Setup GPIB Function Specification B 1 What is GPIB What is GPIB The analyzer is factory equipped with a remote programming digital interface using the General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB GPIB is in compliance with IEEE 488 1 IEC 625 IEEE 488 2 and JIS C1901 This allows the analyzer to be controlled by an external computer that sends commands or instructions to and receives data from the analyzer using the GPIB In this way a remote operator has the same control of the instrument available to a local operator from the front panel except for the line power switch In addition the analyzer itself can use GPIB to directly control compatible peripherals without the use of an external controller It can output measurement results
368. y current Softkey menu called from the key for serial number JP1KE Softkey menu called from the key current Sample program using the trigger detection output function Single Bus Concept 2 2 6 1 7 2 7 2 7 5 7 7 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 15 7 19 7 21 8 2 8 2 8 5 8 9 8 11 8 12 8 13 8 14 8 22 8 26 8 29 8 33 Contents 23 C 6 C 7 C 8 C 9 C 10 Example of measuring an image frequency at early stages of transient Connection diagram when using the trigger detection output function serial input PLL Connection diagram when using the trigger detection output function parallel input PLL Program flow for the PLL frequency transient measurement o 5 Measurement trigger and transient when using the trigger detection output function Program flow of the value trigger function Measurement trigger and transient when using the value trigger function o Connection of serial input PLL o Sample program to send divider data to the PLL Timing chart of the trigger detection output function Contents 24 o o co i m RO 200 00 a a A ps ps D Ona Ww Dp aaa Tables 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 5 1 5 2 8 1 9 1 11 1 11 2 11 3 A 1 A 2 C 1 C 2 D 1 D 2 D 3 D 4 D 5 D 6 D 7 Contents oaoa a e Fuse Selection Parts Used on the Front Panel Cl Parts Used on the Rear Panel Available measurement
369. y the DUT s output frequency 58 RF Input Over Trans Max Freq Indicates that the frequency transient measurement trace was probably inaccurate because the input frequency to the 4352B was beyond the highest possible measurement frequency Note however that RF Input Under Trans Min Freq message No 57 may erroneously appear even when the above problem is present if the 4352B is operating in the heterodyne mode and if the difference between input signals from the device and the external signal generator is larger than 40 MHz Messages 12 Error Messages Alphabetical Order Verify that the DUT generates the proper signal and inputs it to the 4352B RF IN connector If the signal is generated check its frequency Press Sense Range MAX TRANS FREQ or MIN TRANS FREQ and the entry keys to change the detection bandwidth if required 57 RF Input Under Trans Min Freq Indicates that the frequency transient measurement trace was probably inaccurate because the input frequency to the 4352B was below the lowest possible measurement frequency Note however that RF Input Under Trans Max Freq message No 58 may erroneously appear even when the above problem is present if the 4352B is operating in the heterodyne mode and if the difference between input signals from the device and the external signal generator is larger than 40 MHz Verify that the DUT generates the proper signal and inputs it to the 4352B RF IN connector
370. y when the frequency to be measured is the same as the test frequency of the interfering signal This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES 001 Cet appareil ISM est conforme la norme NMB 001 du Canada Power requirements 90 V to 132 V or 198 V to 264 V 47 to 63 Hz 300 VA max Weight c ent e tee teen e nnn neces 21 5 kg max Dimensions annuun aaeeea n nee 425 W x 235 H x 553 D mm Specifications 11 11 Manual Changes Introduction This appendix contains the information required to adapt this manual to earlier versions or configurations of the 4352B than the current printing date of this manual The information in this manual applies directly to the 4352B Network Spectrum Analyzer serial number prefix listed on the title page of this manual Manual Changes To adapt this manual to your 4352B see Table A 1 and Table A 2 and make all the manual changes listed opposite your instrument s serial number and firmware version Instruments manufactured after the printing of this manual may be different from those documented in this manual Later instrument versions will be documented in a manual changes supplement that will accompany the manual shipped with that instrument If your instrument s serial number is not listed on the title page of this manual or in Table A 1 it may be documented in a yellow MANUAL CHANGES supplement In additions to change information the supplement may contain information for correct
371. you think this is possible insert a low pass filter with a cutoff frequency between approximately 100 kHz and 1 MHz into each of the DC power and control voltage input terminals of the measurement jig If a DC voltage component TTL output etc is included in the DUT output signal the measurement will not be performed accurately In this case apply a high pass filter to the DUT s output to eliminate the DC component sufficiently for the measurement Technical Information C 17 Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data This section describes storage devices and the save and recall function It also provides information on how to use data files you have saved using the save and recall functions Additional information on how to save and recall instrument states is provided in Chapter 10 Note does not access Instrument BASIC programs Instrument BASIC has i its own menus under System for accessing the built in disk drive and the RAM Y disk memory See 4352B Using HP Instrument BASIC for detail Storage Devices The analyzer supports two storage devices a built in floppy disk drive and a RAM disk memory The floppy disk drive is better suited to store a large number of files or to store files over extended periods of time The RAM disk is better suited for saving data for a short period of time or to quickly save and recall data Note Use the built in floppy disk drive to store important data that must be reta

Safety Summary - Silicon Integrated Circuit Reverse Engineering

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents